Nokia E52 User Manual
Nokia E52 User Guide Issue 2.0
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION declares that this RM-469 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Decl aratio n of Conformity can be found at http://ww w.nokia.co m/ phones/declaration_of_con formity/. é 2011 Nok ia. All rights reserved . Nokia, Nokia Connec ting People, Nokia Car e, Nokia Original Accessories logo s, Mail fo r Exchange, OVI, Eseries, and Nokia E52 ar e trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporatio n. Nokia tune is a s ound mark of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company n ames mentioned her ein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective owners. Reproduction , transfer, d istribution, or stora ge of part or all of the contents in this do cument in any form without the prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited. Nokia operates a policy of continuo us development. No kia reserve s the right to mak e changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without prior no tice. Java and all Java-based marks ar e trademarks or registered trademar ks of Sun Micros ystems, Inc. This product is licensed und er the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfo lio License ( i) for personal and noncommercial use in connection with information which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Stan dard by a consumer engaged in a personal and noncommercial activity and ( ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provi ded by a licensed video provider . No license is grante d or shall be implied for any other use. Addit iona l information, includin g that related to promo tional, interna l, and commercial us es, may be obtai ned from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegl a.com. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITT ED BY APPLICABL E LAW, UNDER NO CI RCUMSTANCES SHALL NOK IA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSOR S BE RESPONSIBL E FO R ANY LOSS OF DATA OR IN COME OR ANY S PECIAL, IN CIDENTAL , CONS EQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED "AS IS". EXCEP T AS RE Q UIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXP RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, T HE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PA RTICULAR PURPOS E, ARE MADE IN RELA TION TO THE ACCUR ACY, RELIABILITY OR C ONTENTS OF THIS DOC UMENT. NOKIA R ESERVES THE RIGH T TO REVISE THIS DOCU MENT OR WITHDRA W IT AT ANY TIME WI THOUT P RIOR NOTICE. Reverse engineering of softwa re in the device is prohibited to the extent permitted by applicable law. Insofar as this user gui de contains an y limitations on Nokia's represen tations, warra nties, dama ges and liabilities, such limitatio ns shall l ikewise limit any representations, warran ti es, damages and liabilities of Nokia's licens ors. The third-party appl ications provided wi th your device may have been created an d may be owned by persons or en tities not aff ili ated with or related to Nokia. Nokia does not own the copyrights or intellectual property rights to the third-party applications. A s such, Nokia does not take any responsibility for en d-user support, functiona lity of the applications, or the information in the application s or these materials. Nokia does no t provide a ny warranty for t he third-party applicatio ns. BY USING T HE APPLICATIONS YOU ACKNOWLEDG E THAT THE APPL ICATIONS ARE PRO VIDED AS IS WITHOU T WARRANTY O F ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, TO THE MAXIMU M EXTENT PERMIT TED BY APPLIC ABLE LAW. YOU FURTHER ACKNOWLE DGE THAT NEIT HER NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIATES MA KE ANY REPRE SENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITE D TO WARR ANTIES OF TI TLE, MERCHANTAB ILITY OR FI TNESS FOR A PARTICULA R P URPOSE, O R THAT THE APPLICATIONS WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD-PART Y PATENTS, COPYRIGH TS, TRADEMARKS, OR OTHER RIGHTS.
The availability of particular products an d applications and s ervices for these p roduc ts may vary by region. Please check with your Nokia dealer for details and availabili ty of language option s. This d evice may contain commodities, tech nology or so ftware subject to e xport laws a nd regula tions f rom the US and other countries. Div ersion contrary to law is prohibited. About Digital R ights Manageme nt When using this device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, inclu ding copyrights. Copyright protection may prevent you from copying, modifying, or transferr ing images, music, and other content. Content owners ma y use different types of digital rights manag ement (DRM) technologies to protect their intellectua l property, including copyrights. This device uses various types of DRM soft ware to access DRM-protected conten t. With this device you can access cont ent protected with WMDR M 10 and OMA DRM 2 .0. If certain DRM software fails to protect the content , content owners may ask that such DRM software's ability to access new DRM-pr otected content be revoked. Revocation may also prevent renewal of such DRM-protected content already in your device . Rev ocation of such DRM software does not affect the use of content protected with other types of DRM or the use of non-D RM-protected content. Digital rights management (D RM) protected content comes with an associated licence tha t defines your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM-protected content, to back up both the licences an d the content, use the ba ckup feature of Nokia PC Suite. Other transfer methods may not transfer the licences w hich need to be resto red with the content f or you to be able to contin ue the use of OMA DRM-protected content after the device memory is formatted. You may a lso need to restore the licences in ca se the files on y our device get co rrupted . If your device has WMDRM-protected content, both the licences and the content will be lost if the device memor y is formatted. Y ou may also lose the licences and the content if the fil es on your device get corrupted. L osing the licences or the con tent may limit your ability to use the same co ntent on your device again. For more information, contact your service provid er. Some licences may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is insert ed in the de vice. FCC/INDU STRY CA NADA NO TICE Your device may cause TV or radio interferen ce (for example, when using a telephone in clos e proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Indus try Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if such interference ca nnot be eliminated. If yo u require assistance, conta ct your local service facil ity. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Opera tion is subject to the foll owing two conditions: (1) This d evice may not cause har mful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference r eceived, including interfer ence that may cause undesired op eration. Any chan ges or modifi c ations not expressly approved by Nokia could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. /Issue 2.0 EN
Contents Safety........... .................... ................. ................7 About your device................................... ..............................7 Network services.... ........................ ..................... ................. .8 Find help................. ..................... .....................9 Support..................................................................................9 Keep your device software an d applications up to date. .9 In-device help............ ................... .................. ..................... 10 Get started....... ..................................... ..........12 SIM card, battery, chargi ng, memory card.............. .........12 Keys and parts....... .................................... ..........................15 First start-up ...................... .................. ...................... ..........17 Lock the keys.................... ....................................... ............17 Accessories....................................................... ...................17 Volume control........ ................... ................ ................... ......18 Home screen.................... ................. ..................... ..............18 Nokia Switch............................................ ...........................19 Set up your e-mail.......................................... ....................20 Antennas......... ........................ ......................... ................... .20 Nokia PC Suite............................................................ .........21 Access codes...................................................... ..................21 Tips for efficient use........................... ................................22 Ovi by Nokia...................................... ........................... .......22 Nokia E52 â The basic s ...................................24 Device setup........................................................................24 Settings wizard...................................................................24 Menu............................................. .......................................24 Display indicat ors........................... ..................... ...............25 Write text...... .................... ...................... ................ .............26 Search................................................................... ...............27 Common actions in several applications....... ...................28 Free memory.......................................................................28 Personalisa tion............... ......... ............ ..........29 Profiles ............... ............................................................ .....29 Select ringing tones. ....................... ......................... ...........29 Customise profiles............................................ ..................30 Personalise the h ome screen......... ........... ........ ......... .......30 Change the display theme..................................... ............31 Download a theme.............................................................31 Change audio themes. ................... ................... ..................31 3-D ringing tones ............................................ ...................32 New from Nok ia E serie s... .............. ................ 33 Key features...... ....................... ................. ..................... ......33 Home screen.................. ....................... ................. ..............33 One-touch keys................................... ............................. ...34 Turn to silence calls or alarms. ..........................................35 Calendar.................. ........................................... ..................35 Contacts...............................................................................37 Multitasking.... ............... .................. ............... ................... ..39 About Ovi Sync..................................... ............................ ...39 Messaging.. .............. ............... .................. ......40 Nokia Messaging..... ....................................................... .....40 E-mail service......................................................................40 E-mail......................... ..........................................................41 Messaging folders............ ...................................................44 Contents
Text and multimedia messages ................. ............... ........44 Organise messages ..................................... ........................47 Message reader................................................................... 47 Speech.................. ........................ .................... ....................48 Special message t ypes............ ............... ............. .............. .48 Cell broadcast.............. ....................................................... .49 Messaging settings.............................................................49 Phone..................... .............. ............... ...........52 Voice calls............................................................................52 Voice mail ...........................................................................53 Video calls................ .................... ........................ ................53 Video sharing......................................................................54 Internet calls............................................................. ..........56 Voice functions.......... ...................... .................. ..................57 Speed dialling................................ ..................... ................58 Call divert............... ............................. ................................. 58 Call barring..........................................................................58 Bar net calls........................................ .................................59 Send DTMF tones............ ............................................. ........59 Talking theme.....................................................................59 Voice commands.................. ................................... ............60 Push to talk.......................... ............................. ..................61 Log............. ................. .................... ..................... ................ .64 Internet.......................... ................... .............67 Browser.......... .................... ...................... ................ ............67 Browse the intranet ............................. .............. ...............71 Ovi Store........................................... ...................................71 Connect your computer to web. .................................. ......71 Travelling...................... ............. ............... .....72 Positioning (GPS)............................................ ....................72 Maps............................................. ........................................75 Nokia Office Tools. .................. ....................... .84 Active notes............. ........................................ ....................84 Calculator................... .................................... ......................84 File manager.................................... .................................. .85 Quickoffice........................... ......................................... .......86 Converter.............................................................................86 Zip manager........................................................................87 PDF reader...........................................................................8 7 Printing................... ............................................................. 87 Clock..................................................................................... 88 Dictionary............................................................................89 Notes ............................... ................................................... .90 Media................................................. .............91 Camera................................. ................................................91 Gallery..................................................................................94 Photos..................... .................................................... .........95 Share online......................................................................100 Nokia Video Centre...........................................................103 Music player.................................... ............................ ......105 RealPlayer.............. .......................... ............................ ......106 Recorder............................................................... .............107 Flash player.......................................................................108 FM radio................................................. ............................108 Nokia Internet Radi o........................................................109 Connectivity. ................... .................... ..........112 Fast packet data........ ................... ................. ....................1 12 Data cable..................... ........................ .............................1 12 Bluetooth....... ...................... .................. ...................... ......113 SIM access profile............ .................. ...................... ..........115 Wireless L AN .................... ........................ .................... .....116 Connection manager........................................................118 Contents
Security and data management...................120 Lock the device................................................. ................120 Memory card security.......................................................120 Encryption....................................................... ..................121 Fixed dialling........... ...................... .................. ..................121 Certificate manager............ .............................................. 122 View and edit security modules.............. ........................123 Remote configuration...................................................... 123 Application manager... ................................ .....................124 Licenses................................................ .............................126 Sync............................... ............................................ .........128 Mobile VPN............................ ......................... ...................128 Settings................ ........... ........... .............. ....130 General settings.......... ..................................... .................130 Telephone settings........ ....................................... ............133 Connection settings... ........................... ......................... ...135 Application settings............................ .................. ...........142 Shortcuts.................. ............... ........... ..........143 General shortcuts.. ..................... ............... .................. ......143 Noki a or igi nal acce ssori es .................. .........144 Practical rules about accessories...................... ........... ...144 Battery...............................................................................144 Troubleshooti ng....... .................. ..................145 Protect the en vironment ..............................148 Save energy........................ ...............................................148 Recycle...............................................................................148 Product and safety information .......... .........149 Index..................... ............... ................ ........155 Contents
Safety Read these simple guidelines . Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES F IRST Obey all local laws. Alwa ys keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while dr iving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be susce ptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF I N RESTRICTED AREAS Follow any restrictions. Sw itch the device off in aircraft, near medical equipment, fuel, chemicals, or blas ting areas. QUALIFIED SERVI CE Only qualified personne l may install or repair this product. ACCESSORIE S AND BATTERI ES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect inc ompatible prod ucts. WATER-RESI STANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the UMTS 900 and 2100 MHz networks, and GSM 850, 900, 1800, and 1900 MHz networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. Your device support s severa l connectiv ity methods and like computers may be exposed to viruses a nd other harmful content. Exercise caution with message s, connectivity requests, brow sing, and downloads. Only install and use services an d software from trustworthy sources that offer adequat e security and protection, such as applications th at are Symb ian Signed or have passed the Java Verified⢠testing. Co nsider installing antivirus and other security software on your device and any connected computer. Your device may hav e preins talled bookmarks and links for third-party internet sites and may allow you to access third-party sites. These are not affiliat ed with Nokia, and Nokia does not endorse or assume liability for them. If you access such sites, take precautions for secu rity or content. Warning: To use any feat ures in this device, other than the alarm clock, the dev ice must be switched on. Do 7 Safety
not switch the device on wh en wireless device use may cause interference or danger. When using this device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright prot ection may prevent some images, music, and other content from being copied, modified, or transferred. Make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. When connecting to an y other device, read it s user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. The images in this guide may differ from your device display. Refer to the user guide for other important information about your d evice. Network services To use the device you must have service from a wireless service provider. Som e features are not ava ilable on all networks; other features may require that you make specific arrangements with yo ur service provider to use them. Network services inv o lve transmission of data. Check with your service provid er for details about fees in your home network and when roaming on other networks. Your service provid er can explain what charges will apply. Some networks ma y have limi tations that affect how you can u se some featur es of this device requiring network support such as support for specific technologies like WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and S SL) that run on TCP/IP protocols and la nguage-dependent characters . Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not ac tivated in your device. If s o, these features will not appear o n your device men u. Your device may also have customized items such as menu names, menu o rder, and icons. 8 Safety
Find help Support When you want to lea rn more about how to use you r product or you are un sure how your device should function, go to www.nokia.com/support , or using a mobile device, nokia.mobi/support. Y ou can also select Menu > Help > Help in your device. If this does not resolve your issue, do one of the following: ⢠Switch off the device, and remove the battery. A fter about a minute, replace the battery, an d switch on the device. ⢠Restore the original factory settings. ⢠Update your device software. If your issue remains unsolve d, contact Nokia for repair options. Go to www.nokia-asia.com/repair. B efore sending your device for repair , always back up the d ata in your device. Keep your device software and applications up to date About device software and application updates With device software upda tes and application updates, you can get new features and enhanced functions for your device. Updating the software ma y also improve your device performance. 9 Find help
It is recommended that you back up yo ur personal data before updating your device software. Warning: If you install a software update, you cannot use the device, even to make emergency calls, until the installation is completed and the device is restarted. Downloading software updates may involve the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Make sure that the device battery has enough power, or connect the charger before starting the u pdate. After you update your device software or a pplication s, the instructions in the user guide ma y no longer be up to da te. Update device software and applications using your device You can check if there are updates available for your device software or for indi vidual applicati ons, and then download and install them to your device ( network service). You can also set your device to automatically check for upda tes and notify you when impo rtant or recommended updates are available. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > SW update . If there are available update s, select which update s to download and inst all, and select . Set your device to automatically che ck for updates â Select Options > Settings > Auto-check for up dates . Update software using your PC Nokia Software Updat er is a PC applicat ion that enables you to update your device so ftware. To update your device software, you need a compatible PC, broa dband internet access, and a compat ible US B data cable to connect your device to the PC. To get more informat ion and to download the Nokia Software Updater application, go to www.nokia- asia.com/softwareupdate. In-device help Your device contains instructions to help to use the applications in your device. To open help texts from the main menu, select Menu > Help > Help and the application for which you want to read instructions. When an application is op en, to access the help text for the current view, select Options > Help . When you are read ing the instructions, to change the size of the help text, select Op tions > Decrease font size or Increase font si ze . 10 Find help
You may find links to related topics at the end of the help text. If you select an underlined word, a short explanation is displayed. Help texts us e the following indicators: Link to a related help topic. Link to the application being discussed. When you are reading the inst ructions, to switch between help texts and the application that is open in the background, select Options > Show open ap ps. and th e desired application. 11 Find help
Get started Your Nokia E52 is a business device t hat adapts to your free time as well. Read these first p ages to get started, t hen use the rest of the guide to explore what new features Nokia E52 brings to you. SIM card, battery, charging, memory card Put the pieces together, and ge t started with your Nokia E52. Insert the SIM card and battery Important: Do not use a mini-UICC SIM ca rd, also known as a micro-SIM card, a micro-SIM card with an adapter, or a SIM card that has a mini-UICC cutout (see figure) in this device. A micro SIM card is smaller than the standard SIM card. Th is device does not support the use of micro-SIM cards and use of incompatible SIM cards may damage the card or the de vice, and may corrupt data stored on the card. Safe removal. Always sw itch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. 1. To open the back cover of the device, with the back facing you, unlock the back co ver release latch, and lift the back cover. 2. If the battery is inserted, li ft the battery in the direction of the arrow to remove it. 3. Insert the SIM card . Ensure the contact area on the card is facing the connectors on the device an d that the bevelled corner is facing the bottom of the device. 12 Get started
4. Align the contacts of the ba ttery with the corresponding connec tors on the battery compartment, and inse rt the battery in the direction of the arrow. 5. To replace the back cover, direct the top locking catches toward thei r slots, and press down until t he cover locks into place. Charge the battery Your battery has been partia lly charged at the factory. If the device indicates a low charge, do the following: 1. Connect the charger to a wall outlet. 2. Connect the charger plug to the USB port in the device. 3. When the device indicates a full charge, disconnect the charger from the device, th en from the wall outlet. You do not need to charge th e battery for a specific length of time, and you can use the device while it is charging. If the battery is completely discha rged, it may take several minutes before the chargi ng indicator appears on the display or before an y calls can be made. Charging with the USB data cable Charging with the U SB data cable is slower th an charging with the charger. Cha rging with the USB data ca ble may not work if you use a USB h ub. USB hubs may be incompatible for chargi ng a USB device. Charging with the U SB data cable may take a long time if the battery is completely discha rged. When the USB data cable is connected, you can transfer data at the same time as charging. 1. Connect a compatible USB device to your device using a compatible USB da ta cable. Depending on the type of the device that is used for charging, it may take a while for charging to start. 2. If the device is switched on, select from the available USB mod es. 13 Get started
Insert the memory card Use a memory card to save the memory on your device. You can also back up informat ion from your device to the memory card. Use only compatible microSD and microSDHC cards approved by Nokia for use with this device. Nokia uses approved industry standards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully comp atible with this device. Incompatible cards may damage th e card and the device and corrupt data st ored on the card. Keep all memory cards out of the reach of small children. Check the compatibility of a memory card with its manufacturer or provider. A compatible memory card may be included in the sales package. The memory card may be already inserted in the device. If not, do the following: 1. To prevent the battery from coming loose, place the device so that the back cover is facing up. 2. Remove the back cover. 3. Insert the memory card in the slot with the cont act area first. Ensure the con tact area is facing the connectors on the device. 4. Push the card in until it locks into place. 5. Replace the back cover. Remove the memory card Important: Do not remove the memory card durin g an operation when the card is being accessed. Doing so may damage the memory card and the device, and corrupt data stored on the card. 1. Press the power key briefly, and select Remove memory card . 2. To prevent the battery from coming loose, place the device so that the back cover is facing up. 3. Remove the back cover. 4. Press the end of the memory card to release it from the memory card slot, and remove the card. 5. Replace the back cover. 14 Get started
Keys and parts Keys and parts 1 â Power key 2 â Light sensor 3 â Selection key. Press the selection key to perform the function displayed above it. 4 â Home key 5 â Call key 6 â Calendar key 7 â Microphone 8 â E-mail key 9 â End key 10 â Backspace key. Press the key to delete items. 11 â Selection key 12 â Navi⢠key; hereafter referred to as scroll key. Press the scroll key to make a selection, or to scroll left, right, up, or down on the display. Press and hold the scroll key to accelerate the scrolling. 13 â Earpiece 14 â Secondary camera 15 â Heads et connecto r 1 â Flash 2 â Main camera 3 â Loudspeaker 15 Get started
Keys and parts (sid es) 1 â Micro USB connector 2 â Volume up/Zoom in key 3 â Mute key/Push to talk key 4 â Volume down/Zoom out key 5 â Capture key The surface of this device is nickel-free. During extended operation such as an activ e video call and high speed data connection, th e device may feel warm. In most cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect the device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorised service facility. Keep your device away from magnets or magneti c fields. One-touch keys With One-touch keys, you can access app lications and tasks quickly. To change the assig ned applicat ion or task, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Personalisation > One- touch keys . Your service provider may have assigned applications to the keys, in which case you cann ot change them. 1 â Home key 2 â E-mail key 3 â Calendar key Key Press quickly Press and hold Home key (1) Access the home screen View the list of active applications E-mail ke y (2) Open your defa ult mailbox Create a new e- mail message Calendar key (3) Open the Calendar application Create a new meeting entry 16 Get started
First start-up 1. Press and hold the power key until you feel the device vibrate. 2. If prompted, enter the PIN code or lock code, and select OK . 3. When prompted, enter the country in which you are located an d the current date and time. To find your country, enter the first letters of the country name. It is importa nt to select the correct country, because scheduled calendar entries may change if you change the country later an d the new country is located in a different time zone. 4. The Phone setup application opens. To set up an application, select Start . To bypass setting up applications, select Skip rep eatedly. To open the Phone setup application later, select Menu > Help > Phone setup . To configure the vari ous settings in your device, use the wizards available in t he ho me screen and the Settings wizard application. When you sw itch the device on, it may recognise the SIM card pr ovider and configure some settings automatically. Y ou ca n also contact y our service provider for the correct settings. You can switch the device on without insertin g a SIM card. The device starts up in the Offline profile, and you cannot use the network-dep end ent phone functions. To switch the device off, press an d hold the power ke y. Lock the keys When the device or keypad is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. The keypad of your device locks automatically to p revent accidental keypres ses. To change the length of time after wh ich the keypad is locked, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Sett ings and General > Security > Phone and SIM card > Ke ypad autolock period . To lock the keys manually in the home screen, press the left selection key and then the right selection key. To lock the keys manually in the menu or in an open application, press the power key briefly, and select Lock keypad . To unlock the keys, pr ess th e left selection key and then the right selection key. Accessories You can connect you r device to a range of comp atible accessories. Check the availa bility of the approved accessories with your dealer. 17 Get started
Connect the headset Warning: When you us e the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. Connect the co mpatible headset to the heads et connector of your device. Attach a wrist strap Thread the wrist stra p, and tighten it. Volume control To adjust the earpiece volume during a phone call or the volume of the media applicat ions, use the volume keys. Home screen In the home screen, you can quickly access your most frequently used app lications, and view at a glance if you have missed calls or new messages. Whenever you see the icon, scroll right to access a list of available actions. To close the list, scroll left. The home screen consists of the following: 1. Application shortcuts. To access an application, select the shortcut of the application. 2. Information area. To check an item displayed i n the information area, select the item. 3. Notification area. To view the notifications, scroll to a box. A box is only visible if there are items in it. You can define two separate home screens for different purposes, for example, one sc reen to show your busin ess e-mail and notifications, and another to show your personal e-mail . This way, you do not have to see busine ss- related messages outside office hours. 18 Get started
To switch between the home screens, select . To define which items and shortcuts you want in the home screen, and to set the ap pearance of the home screen, select Menu > Ctrl. panel and Modes . Nokia Switch Transfer content You can use the Switch ap plic ation to copy content such as phone numbers, addresses, calendar item s, and images from your previous Nokia device to y our device. The type of content that can be transferred depends on the model of the device from which you wan t to transfer content. If that devi ce supports synchron isation, you can also synchronise data between the devices. Your device notifies you if the other device is not compatible. If the other device cannot be switched on without a SIM card, you can insert your S IM card in it. When your device is switched on without a SI M card, the Offline profile is automatically activated, and transfer can be done. Transfer content for the first time 1. To retrieve data from the other device for the first time, on your device, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Switch . 2. Select the connection type y ou want to use to transf er the data. Both devices must su pport the selected connection type. 3. If you select Bluetooth connecti vity as the connection type, connect the two devices. To have your device search for devices with Blue tooth connectivity, select Continue . Select the device from which you want to transfer content. You are as ked to enter a code on your device. Enter a code (1-16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the ot her device, and select OK . The devices are now paired. Some earlier Nokia devices may not have the Switch application. In this case, the Switch application is sent to the other device as a me ssage. To install the S witch application on the other device, open the message, and follow the instruction s on the display. 4. On your device, select the con tent you want to tran sfer from the other device. When the transfer has starte d, you can cancel it and continue later. Content is tr ansferred from the memory of the other device to the corresponding location in your device. The transfer time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. Synchronise, retrieve, or send content Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Switch . After the first transfer, select from the following to start a new transfer , depending on the model: to synchronise content between your device and the other device, if the other device supports synchronisation. The synchronisation i s two-way. If an item is deleted in one device, it is deleted in both. You cannot restore deleted items with synchronisation. to retrieve content from the other device to your device. With retrieval, content is transferred from the 19 Get started
other device to your device. You may be asked to keep or delete the original content in the other device, depending on the device model. t o s e n d c o n t e n t f r o m y o u r d e v i c e t o y o u r o t h e r d e v i c e If you cannot send an item, dependin g on the type of t he other device, you can add the item to the Nokia folder, to C:\Nokia or E:\Nokia in your device. When you select the folder to transfer, the items are synchronised in the corresponding folder in the other device, and vice versa. Use shortcuts to repeat a transfer After a data transfer, you can save a shortcut with the transfer setti ngs to the ma in view to repeat the same transfer later. To edit the shortcut, select Options > Shortcut settings . For example, you can cr eate or chan ge the name of the shortcut. A transfer log is shown after every transfer. To view the log of the last transfer, select a shortcut in the main view and Options > View log . Handle transfer conflic ts If an item to be transferred has been edited in both devices, the device attempts to merge the changes automatic ally. If this is no t possible, th ere is a transfer conflict. Select Check one by one , Priority to this phone , or Priority to other phone to solve the conflict. Set up your e-mail Your Nokia Eseries de vice works the sa me hours as you, and at the same speed. Keep your e-ma il, contac ts, and calendar synchronised - qui ckly and conveniently with high speed connections. When sett ing up y our e-mail, you may be promp ted for the following information: user name, e-mail type, incoming mail server, incoming mail server port, outgoing mail server, outgoing mail server port, password, or access point. With the E-mail wiza rd, you can set up business e-mail accounts, such as Microsoft Exchange, or internet e-mai l accounts, such as Google's e-mail services. The wizard supports POP/IMAP, and ActiveSync protocols. If you are setting up your business e-mail, ask your company IT department for de tails. If you are setting up your internet e-mail, see yo ur e-mail service providerâÂÂs website for details. To start the E- mail wizard: 1. In the home screen, scro ll to the E-mail wizard. 2. Enter yo ur e-mail a ddress and password. If the wizard is not able to configure your e-mail settings automatically, select your e-mail a ccount type, and enter the related settings. Tip: If you have not configured your mailbox, press the e-mail key to start the E-mail wizard. If your device contains addit ional e-mail clients, those are offered to you when you start th e E-mail wizard. Antennas Your device may have intern al and external antennas. Avoid touch ing the antenna area unnecessarily while the antenna is tr ansmitting or receiving. Contact with 20 Get started
antennas affects the communication qu ality and may cause a higher power level during operation and may reduce the battery life. Nokia PC Suite Nokia PC Suite is a set of applications that you can install to a compatible PC. N okia PC Suite grou ps all available applications in a la uncher window from which you can run the applicat ions. Nokia PC Su ite may be included on a memory card if one is pr ovided with your device. You can use Nokia PC Suite to synchron ise contacts, calendar, and to-do and other notes between your device and a compatible PC applicat ion, such as Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes. You can also use Nokia PC Suite to transfer bookmarks between your device and compatible browsers, and transfer imag es and video clips between your device and compatible PCs. Note: Pay attention to sync hronisation settings. Data deletion as part of no rmal synchronisation p rocess is determined by the settings selected. To use Nokia PC Suite, you n eed a PC that runs Microsoft Windows XP (SP2) or Windows Vista, and is compatible with a USB data cable or with Bluetooth connectivity. Nokia PC Suite does not work with Macintosh. For further information on No kia PC Suite, see its help function or the Nokia website. To install Nokia PC Suite: 1. Ensure the memory card is inserted in your Nokia E52. 2. Connect the USB cable. Yo ur PC recognises the new device and installs the nece ssary drivers. This can take several minutes to complete. 3. Select Mass storage as the USB connection mode in your device. Your device is displayed in Windows file browser as a Remo vable Disk. 4. Open the root of the me mory card drive with the Windows file browser, an d select the PC Suite installation. 5. The installation is star ted. Follow the displayed instructions. Tip: To update Nokia PC Suite, or if you have problems when installing Nokia PC Suite from the memory card, copy the installa tion file to your PC, and start the installat ion from your PC. Access codes If you forget any o f the access codes, contact your service provider . ⢠Personal identification number (PIN) code â This code protects your SIM card again st unauthorised use. The PIN code (4 - 8 digits) is us ually supplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. 21 Get started
⢠UPIN code â This code may be supplied with the USIM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by 3G mobile phones. ⢠PIN2 code â This code (4 - 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, an d is required to access some functions in your device. ⢠Lock code (also known as security code) â The lock code helps you to protect your device against unauthorised use. The preset code is 12345. You can create and change the co de, and set the device to request the code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your device. If you forget the code and your device is locked, your device will require service. Additional charges may a pply, and all the personal data in your devi ce may be deleted. For more information, co ntact a Nokia Care point or your device dealer. ⢠Personal Unblocking Key (PUK) code and PUK2 code â These codes (8 digits ) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PI N2 code, respectively. If the codes are not supplied wit h the SIM card, contact the network service provider whose SIM card is in your device. ⢠UPUK code â This code (8 di gits) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, contact the network service provider whose USIM card is in your device. ⢠International Mobile Equipment Iden tity (IMEI) number â This number (15 or 17 digits) is used to identify valid devices on the GSM network. Devices that are, for example, stolen, can be blocked from accessing the network. The IMEI number for your device can be found under the battery. Tips for efficient use To switch profiles, press the power key briefly. To switch to the Si lent profile, press and hold # . To search for items in your device or on the internet (network service), select Menu > Applications > Search . When bro wsing w eb page s with the Web browser application or maps in th e Maps a pplication, press * to zoom in and # to zoom out. Ovi by Nokia With Ovi by Nokia, you can fi nd new places and services, and stay in touch wi th your friends. You ca n do, for example, the following: ⢠Download games, ap plications, videos, an d ringtones to your device ⢠Find your way with free walk and drive navigati on, plan trips, and view locati ons on a map ⢠Get a free Ovi Mail account ⢠Get music Some items are free of charge, others you may need to pay for. The available services may also vary by country or region, and not all languages are supported. To access Nokia's Ovi s ervices, go to www. ovi.com, and register your own Nokia account. 22 Get started
For more information, go to the support section at www.ovi.com. 23 Get started
Nokia E52 â The basics Device setup With the Phone setup application, you can do the following, for example: ⢠Define the regional settings , such as the lang uage of the device. ⢠Transfer data from your old device. ⢠Personalise your device. ⢠Set up your mail accou nts. ⢠Sign up for the My Nokia service to receive free tips, tricks, and support for your Nokia device. You will also receive notifications when new software updat es are available for your device. ⢠Activate Ovi services. When you switch on your device for the first time, the Phone setup application open s. To open the ap plication later, select Menu > Help > Phone setup . Settings wizard Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Sett. wizard . Use Settings wizard to de fine e-mail and connection settings. The avai lability of the items in Settings wizard depends on the features of the device, SIM card, service provider, and the data in th e Settings wizard da tabase. To start Sett ings wizard, select Start . To get the best results when using the settings wi zard, keep your SIM card inserted in the device. If the SIM card is not inserted, follow the instructions on the display. Select from the following: ⢠Operator â Define the operator-specific setting s, such as MMS, internet, WAP, and streaming se ttings. ⢠E-mail setup â Configure a POP, IMAP, or Mail for Exchange account. ⢠Push to talk â Configure push to talk setti ngs. ⢠Video sharing â Configure vide o sharing settings. The settings available for editing may vary. Menu Select Menu . The menu is a start ing point from which you can open all applications in the device or on a memory card. The menu contains applications and folders, which are groups of similar applications. All applications you install in the device yourself are by default saved in the Applications folder. To open an application, select the applicat ion, that is, s croll to it, and press the scroll key. 24 Nokia E52 â The basics
To switch between the open applications, press and hold the home key, and select an application. Leaving applications runnin g in the background increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Change Menu view â View applications in a list or a grid. ⢠Memory details â View the memory consumption of different applications and data stored on the device or memory card and to check the amount of free memory. ⢠New folder â Create a new folder. ⢠Rename â Rename a new folder. ⢠Move â Rearrange the folder. Scroll to the appl ication you want to move, and select Move . A check mark is placed beside the application. Scroll to a new location, and select OK . ⢠Move to folder â Move a n application to a differen t folder. Scroll to the applicat ion you wa nt to move , and select Move to folder , the new folder, and OK . ⢠Download applications â Download applications from the web. Display indicators The device is being us ed in a UMTS network (network service). The battery charge level. The higher the bar, the stronger the charge in the battery. You have one or more un read messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received new e-mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages waitin g to be sent in the Outbox folder in Messaging. You have one or more missed phone calls. The keys of the device are locked. An alarm is act ive. You have activated the Silen t profile, and the device does not ring for an incoming call or message. Bluetooth con nectivity is ac tivated. A Bluetooth connection is established. When the indicator is blinking, yo ur device is trying t o connect with an other device. A GPRS packet data co nnection is available (network service). indicates that the connection is active. indicates that the connection is on hold. An EGPRS packet data co nnection is available (network service). indicates that the connection is active. indicates that the connection is on hold. A UMTS packet data connection is available (network service). indicates that the connection 25 Nokia E52 â The basics
is active. indicates that the connection is on hold. High-speed packet access (HSPA) is supported an d available (network service). The icon may vary between regions. indicates that the connection is active. indicates that the connection is on hold. You have set the device to scan for wireless LANs (WLAN), and a WLAN is available. A WLAN connection is active in a network th at does not have encryption. A WLAN connection is acti ve in a network that has encryption. Your device is connected to a computer with a USB data cable. The second phone line is being used (network service). All calls are forwarded to another number. If you have two phone lines, a number indicates the active line. A headset is connected to the device. A handsfree car kit is connected to the device. A loopset is connected to the device. A text phone is con nected to the device. Your device is synchronising. You have an ongoin g push to talk ( PTT) connection. Your push to ta lk connection is in do not disturb mode, because the ringing type of your device is set to Beep once or Sile nt , or you have an incoming or ongoing phone call. In this mode, you cannot make PTT calls. Write text The input methods provided in the device may vary according to different sales market s. Traditional text input indicates traditional text input. and indi cate the uppercase and lowercase. indicates the sentence case, that is, the first letter of the sentence is written in uppercase and all the other letters are automatically writte n in lowercase. indicates number mode. To write text with the keypad, press a number key, 2-9, repeatedly until the desired character is displayed. There are more characters av ailable for a number key than are printed on the key. If the next letter is locat ed on the same key as the present one, wait until th e cursor is displayed, and enter the letter. To insert a number, press and hold the number key. 26 Nokia E52 â The basics
To switch between the different character cases a nd modes, press # . To erase a character, press the backspace key. Press and hold the backspace key to erase more than one charac ter. To enter the most common pu nctuation marks, pre ss 1 repeatedly until the desired punctuation mark is displayed. To add special characters, press and hold * . To add a smiley, press * , and select More em oticons and a smiley. To insert a space, pr ess 0 . To insert a line break, press 0 three times. Predictive text input With predictive input, you can enter any letter with a single keypress. Predictive text i nput is based on a built- in dictionary. To activate or deactivate pr edictive text input, select Options > Inpu t options . The indicator is displayed. When y ou start writing a w ord, your device suggests possi ble words. When the correct word is found, press the space key ( 0 ) to confirm it and to a dd a space. While writi ng, you can scro ll down to access a li st of suggested words. If the desire d word is on the list, select the word. If the ? character is displa yed after the word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To add a word to the dictionary, select Sp ell , enter the wo rd using traditional text input, and select OK . When the dictionary is full, the new word replaces the oldest added word. To deactivate automati c word completion, select Options > Input options > Settings . To change the wr iting lang uage, select Options > Input options > Writing language . Search About Search Select Menu > Applications > Search . Search (network service) enables you to use vario us internet-based search services to find, for example, websites and images. The conten t and availability of the services may vary. Start a search Select Menu > Applications > Search . To search the contents of your mobile device, enter search terms in the search field, or browse the content categories. While you enter the search term s, the results are org anised into categories. To search for w eb pages on the internet, select Search the Internet or a search p rovider, and enter yo ur search terms in the search field. The search provider you selected is set as your default internet search provider. To change the default search provider, select Options > Settings > Search services . To change the country or re gion setting to find more search providers, select Opt ions > Settings > Country or region . 27 Nokia E52 â The basics
Common actions in several applications You can find the following ac tions in several applications: To change the profile, or switch off or lock the device, press the power key briefly. If an application consists of several tabs (see figure), open a tab by scrolling right or left. To save the settings that you have configured in an application , select Ba ck . To save a file, select Options > Save. There are different saving options depending on the application you use. To send a file, select Options > Send . You can send a file in an e-mail or multimedia message, or using different connectivity methods. To copy, press and hold t he shift key, and select the text with the scroll key. Press and hold the shift key, and select Copy . To paste, s croll to where you want to paste the text, press and hold t he shift key, an d select Paste . This m ethod may not work in a pplications t hat have their own copy and paste commands. To select diffe rent items, such as messages, files, or contacts, scroll to the item you want to select. Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to select one item or Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark a ll to select all items. Tip: To select almost all items, first s elect Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark all , then select the items you do not want, and Options > Mark/ Unma rk > Unmark . To select an object (for ex ample, an attachment in a document) scroll to t he object so that square markers appear on each side of the object. Free memory To view how much memory is availa ble for different data types, select Menu > Office > File mgr. . Many features of the device use memory to st ore data. The device notifies you if available memory is low. To free memory, transfer data to an al ternative memory (if available) or compatible computer. To remove data you no long er need, use File manager or the respective a pplication. You can remo ve the followin g: ⢠Messages in the folders in Messaging and retrieved e- mail messages from the mailbox ⢠Saved web pages ⢠Contact information ⢠Calendar notes ⢠Applications shown in Applic ation manager that you do not need ⢠Installation files (with .sis or .sisx file extensions) of installed applications. Back up the installation files to a compatible computer. ⢠Images and video clips in Phot os. Back up the files to a compatible computer using Nokia PC Suite. 28 Nokia E52 â The basics
Personalisation You can personalise your device by, for examp le, adjusting the various tone s, background im ages, and screen savers. Profiles Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Profiles . You can adjust and customise the ringing tones, alert tones, and other dev ice tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. The active profile is shown at the top of the display in the home screen. However, if the active profile is General, only today's date is shown. To create a new profile, select Options > Create new , and define the settings. To customise a profile, select a profile and Options > Personalise . To activate a profile, select a profile and Options > Activate . To set the profile to be active unt il a certain time within the next 24 hours, scroll to the profile, select Option s > Timed , and set the time. When the time ex pires, the profile changes back to the previously ac tive non-timed profile. When the profile is timed, is displayed in the home screen. The Offline profile cannot be timed. To delete a profile that you created, select Options > Delete profile . You cannot delete the predefined profiles. When the Offline profile is ac tivated, your connection to the cellular network is closed. All radio frequency signals between the device and the cellular network are prevented. If you try to send a message, it is placed in the Outbox folder, and is sent only when another profile is activated. You can also us e your device without a S IM card. If you remove the SIM card, the Offline profile is activated. Importa nt: In the Offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Calls may still be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To make calls, you must firs t activate the phon e function by changing profiles. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code. When you use the Offline pr ofile, you can still use a wireless LAN (WLAN), for example, to read your mail or browse the internet. You can also use Bluetoot h connectivity. Remember to comply with any applicable safety requirements when yo u establish and use WLAN or Bluetooth connections. Select ringing tones To set a ringing tone for a profile, select Options > Personalise > Ringing tone . Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for downloading tones using the browser. Any downloaded tones are saved to Gallery. 29 Personalisation
To play the ringing tone for a selected contact group only, select Opt ions > Personali se > Alert for , and select the desired group. Phone calls coming from outs ide that group have a s ilent alert. To change the message tone, select Option s > Personalise > Message alert tone . Customise profiles Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Profiles . Select Options > Personalise and from the following: ⢠Ringing tone â Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of book marks for downloading tones using the browser. If you have two alternate phone lines in use, you can sp ecify a ringing tone for each line. ⢠Video call tone â Select a ringing tone for video calls. ⢠Say caller's name â When you select this option and someone from your contacts list calls you, the device sounds a ringin g tone that is a combination of the spoken name of the contact and the selected ringing tone. ⢠Ringing type â Select how you wa nt the ring ing tone to alert. ⢠Ringing volume â Select the volume level of the ringing tone. ⢠Message alert tone â Select a to ne for received text messages. ⢠E-mail alert tone â Select a tone for received e-mail messages. ⢠Vibrating alert â Set the device to vibrate when you receive a call or message. ⢠Keypad tones â Select the vo lume level of the keypad tones. ⢠Warning tones â Deactivate the warning tones. Th is setting also a ffects the tones of some games and Java⢠applications. ⢠Alert for â Set the device to ring only upon calls from phone numbers that belong to a selected contact group. Phone calls coming from outside that group have a silent alert. ⢠PTT call alert tone â Select a ringing tone for PTT calls. ⢠Push to talk status â Set the PTT status to ea ch profile. ⢠Profile name â Y ou can giv e a na me t o a new pro f ile or rename an existing prof ile. The General and Offline profiles cannot be renamed. Personalise the home screen Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Modes . To change the name of the current home screen, select Options > Rename mode . To select which applications and notifications you want to see in the home screen, select Home screen applications . To change the theme of the ho me screen currently in use, select General them e . To change the background image of the home screen currently in use, select Wallpaper . 30 Personalisation
To change from one home screen to another, scroll to Current mode , and select Op tions > Change . Change the display theme Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Themes . Select from the following: ⢠General â Change the theme us ed in all applications. ⢠Menu view â Change the them e used in the main menu. ⢠Standby â Chan ge the them e used in the home screen. ⢠Wallpaper â Change the background image of the home screen. ⢠Power saver â Select an anim ation for the power saver. ⢠Call image â Change the image displayed during calls. To activate or deacti vate the theme effects, select General > Options > Theme effect s . Download a theme Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Themes . To download a theme, select General > Download themes > Options > Go to > New web page . Enter the web address from which you want to download your theme. Once the theme is downloaded, you can pr eview or activate the theme. To preview a theme, select Options > Preview . To activate a th eme, select Option s > Set . Change audio themes You can set sounds for various device events. The sounds can be tones, speech, or a combination of both. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Themes and Audio themes . To change the current audio theme, select Active audio theme . To add 3-D effects to the audio theme, selec t Option s > 3-D ringing tones . To create a new audio theme, select Options > Save theme . To set a sound for an event, select an event group , such as Messaging events. Select the desired event and from the following: ⢠Silent â Deactivate the sound of the device event. ⢠Tone â Set a tone as th e sound for the dev ice event. ⢠Speech â Set a synthesised voice tag as the sound for the device event. Enter th e desired text, and select OK . Select an event group, such as Messaging events. Select the desired event, Options , and from the following: ⢠Play â Play the sound before activating it. ⢠Activate sounds â Activate all the sounds in the event group. ⢠Deactivate sounds â Deactivate all the sounds in the event group. 31 Personalisation
3-D ringing tones Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > 3-D tones . To enable three-dimensional (3-D) sound effects for ringing tones, select 3-D ringing tone effects > On . Not all ringing tones s u pport 3âÂÂD effects. To change the 3âÂÂD effect that is a pplied to the ringing tone, select Sound trajector y and the desired effect. To modify the 3âÂÂD effect, select from the following: ⢠Trajectory sp eed â Select the speed at which sound moves from one direction to an other. This setting is not available for all effects. ⢠Reverberation â Select the desired effect to adjust the amount of echo. ⢠Doppler effect â Select On to set the ring ing tone sound higher when you are closer to your device, and lower when you are farther away. This setting is not available for all effects. To listen to the ringing tone with the 3âÂÂD effect, select Options > Play tone . To adjust the volume of the ringing tone, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Profiles and Options > Personalise > Ringing volume . 32 Personalisation
New from Nokia Eseries Your new Nokia Eseries device contains new versions of the Calendar, Cont acts, and E-mail applicat ions, as well a s a new home screen. Key features Your new No kia E52 helps y ou manage your busines s and personal information. Some of the key features are highlighted h ere: Read and reply to your e-mail while on the move. Stay up-to-date a nd plan your meetings with the Calendar application. Manage your business partners and free time friends with the Contacts application. Connect to a wireless LA N (WLAN) with the WLAN wizard application. Work with documents, spre adsheets, and presentations with th e Quickoffice application. Find points of interest with th e Maps application. Switch from business to personal mode. Edit the appearance and se tup of your home screen with the Modes applicat ion. Browse your company int ranet with the Intranet application. Move your contact and calendar inform ation from a previous device to your Nokia E52 with the Switch application. Check the available updates for applications and download them to your device with the Software update ap plication. Encrypt your device or memor y card t o prevent outsiders from accessing your important information. Home screen In the home screen, you can quickly access your most frequently used features and applications, and view at a glance if you have missed calls or new messages. Home screen In the home screen, you can quickly access your most frequently used applications, and view at a glan ce if you have missed calls or n ew messages. 33 New from Nokia Eseries
Whenever you see the icon, scroll right to access a list of available actions. To close the list, scroll left. The home screen consists of the following: 1. Application shortcuts. To access an application, select the shortcut of the application. 2. Information area. To check an item displayed in the information area, select the item. 3. Notification area. To view the notifications, scroll to a box. A box is only visible if there are items in it. You can define two separate home screens for different purposes, for example, one sc reen to show your business e-mail and no tifications, and an other to sho w your personal e-mail. This way, yo u do not have to see busin ess- related messages outside office hours. To switch between the home screens, s elect . To define which items a nd shortcuts you want in the home screen, and to set the appe arance of the home screen, select Menu > Ctrl. panel and Modes . Work on the home screen To search for contacts in th e home screen, start entering the contact's name. When ente ring the char acters, press each key once. For example, to enter "Eric", press 3742 . The device suggests matching contacts. To switch between the alphabetic an d number modes, select Options > Alpha mode or Number mode . Select the desired contact from the list of proposed matches. This feature may not be avai lable in all languages. To call the contact, press the call key. To disable the cont act se arch, select Options > Contact search off . To check your received messages, select the message box in the notifica tion area. To read a message, s elect the message. To a ccess other tasks, s croll right. To view your missed calls, select the calls box in the notification area. To return a call, select a call, and press t h e c a l l k e y . T o s e n d a t e x t m e ssage to a caller, select a call, scroll right, and select Send message from the list of available actions. To listen to your voice mail, select the voice mail box in the notification area. Select the desired voice mailbox, and press the call key. One-touch keys With the One-touch keys, you can access app lications and tasks quickly. Each key has been assigned an applica tion or a task. To chang e these, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Personalisatio n > One-to uch keys . Your service provider may have assigned applications to the keys, in which case you cannot change them. 34 New from Nokia Eseries
1 â Home key 2 â E-mail key 3 â Calendar key Home key To access the home screen, press the home key briefly. Press the home key briefly again to access th e menu. To view the list of active applications, press th e home key for a few seconds. When the list is open, press the home key briefly to scroll the list. To open the selected application, press t he home key for a few seconds, or press the scroll key. To close the se lected application, press th e backspace key. Leaving app lications running i n the background increases the demand on battery power an d reduces the battery life. Calendar key To open the Calendar applic ation, press the calendar key briefly. To create a new meeting entry, press the calendar key for a few seconds. E-mail key To open your default mailbox, pr ess the e-mail key briefly. To create a new e-mail message, press the e-mail key for a few seconds. Turn to silence calls or alarms When you activate the sensors in your device, you can control certain functions by turning the device. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Sensor settings . Select from the following: ⢠Sensors â Set the display to rotate automat ically according to the de vice's orientation. ⢠Turning control â Set the device to silence incoming calls or snooze alarms when you turn the device face down. To enable this option , the Sensors option needs to be activated. Calendar Select Menu > Calendar . About Calendar Select Menu > Calendar . 35 New from Nokia Eseries
With calendar, you can create and view scheduled events and appointments, and switch between different calendar views. In the month view, calendar entries are marked with a triangle. Anniversary entries are also marked with an exclamation mark. The entrie s of the selecte d day are displayed as a list. To open calendar entries , select a calendar v iew and an entry. Whenever you see the icon, scroll right to access a list of available actions. To close the list, scroll left. Create calendar entries Select Menu > Calendar . You can create the following types of calendar en tries: ⢠Meeting entries remind you of events that have a specific date and time. ⢠Meeting requests are invita tions that yo u can send to the participants. Before you can create meeting requests you must have a compa tible mailbox configured to your device. ⢠Memo entries are related to the whole day but not to a specific time of the day. ⢠Anniversary entries remind you of birthdays and special dates. They refer to a certain day but not a specific time of the day. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. ⢠To-do entries remind you of a ta sk that has a due date but not a specific time of the day. To create a calendar entry, select a date, Options > New entry , and the entry type. To set the priority for meeting entries, select Option s > Priority . To define how the entr y is handled during synchronisation, select Private to hide the entry from viewers if the calendar is available online, Public to make the entry visible to viewers, or None to not copy the entry to your comput er. To send the entry to a compatible device, select Opti ons > Send . To make a meeting request of a meeting entry, select Options > Add participants . Create meeting requests Select Menu > Calendar . Before you can create meetin g requests, you must have a compatible mailbox configured f or your device. To create a meeting entry: 1. To create a meeting en try, select a day and Opti ons > New entry > Meeting requ est . 2. Enter the name s of the required participants. T o add names from your contacts list, enter the first few characters, and select from the proposed matches. To add optional participan ts, select Option s > Add optional part icipants . 3. Enter the subject. 4. Enter th e start and end t i mes and dates, or sele ct All- day event . 5. Enter the location. 6. Set an alarm for the entry, if needed. 36 New from Nokia Eseries
7. For a recurring meeting, set the recurrence time, and enter the end date. 8. Enter a description. To set the priority for th e meeting request, select Options > Priorit y . To send the meeting request, select Options > Send . Calendar views Select Menu > Calendar . You can switch between the following views: ⢠Month view shows the current month and th e calendar entries of the selected day in a lis t. ⢠Week view shows the events for the selected week in seven day boxes. ⢠Day view shows the events for the selected day grouped into time slots according to their starting time. ⢠To-do view shows all to-do items. ⢠Agenda view shows the even ts for the selected day in a list. Tip: To switch between views, press * . To change the view, select Options > Change view and the desired view. Tip: To open the week vi ew, select the week number. To move to the next or th e previous day in month, week, day, and agenda view, select the desired day. To change the defa ult view, select Options > Settings > Default view . Contacts About Contacts Select Menu > Contacts . With Contacts, you can save and updat e contact information, such as phone numbers, home addresses, and e-mail addresses of yo ur contacts. You can add a personal ring ing tone or a thumbn ail image to a conta ct. You can also creat e contact groups, which allow you to communicate with several contacts at the same time, and send contact information to compatible devices. Whenever you see the icon, scroll right to access a list of available actions. To close the list, scroll left. Work with contacts Select Menu > Contacts . To create a contact, select Options > New contact , and enter the details of the contact. To copy contacts from the memo ry card, if available, select Options > Create backup > Memory card to phone . To search for contacts, start entering the contact's name in the search field. To switch to predicti ve search mode, select Options > Activate predict . search . 37 New from Nokia Eseries
To search for contacts in predictive search mode, start entering the contact's name in the s earch field. Create contact groups Select Menu > Contacts . 1. To create a contact group, sc roll to each contact you want to add to the group, a nd select Options > Mark/ Unmark > Mark . 2. Select Option s > Group > Add to group > Create new group , and enter a name for the group . If you want t o make conferen ce calls to the group using a conference service, define the following: ⢠Conf. service number â Enter the co nference call service number. ⢠Conf. service ID â Enter the conference call ID. ⢠Conf. service PIN â Enter the conference call PIN code. To make a conference call to the group using the conference service, select the group and Options > Call , scroll right, and select Call conference ser. . Search for contacts in a remote database To activate remot e contact search , select Options > Settings > Contacts > Remote search server . You must define a remote server before you can do remote contact searches. To search fo r contacts in a remote database, select Contacts > Options > Search from remote . Enter the name of the contact you want to search for, and select Search . The device establishes a data connection to the remote database. To search for contacts in th e home screen, start entering characters in th e home screen, an d select the data base from the proposed matches. To change the rem ote contacts da tabase, select Options > Settings > Contacts > Remote sear ch server . This setting affects the da tabase used in the Contacts an d Calendar applications and th e home screen, but not the database that is used for e-mail. Add ringing tones for contacts Select Menu > Contacts . To add a ringing tone for a contact, select the contact, Options > Ringing tone , and a ringing tone . The ringing tone sounds when th e contact calls y ou. To add a ringing tone for a contact group, select the contact group, Options > Group > Ringing tone , and a ringing tone. To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Contacts settings Select Menu > Contacts . To modify the settings of t he Contacts application, select Options > Settings > Contacts and from the following: ⢠Contacts to dis play â Show conta cts that are stored in the device memory, on the SIM card, or both. 38 New from Nokia Eseries
⢠Default saving memory â S elect where to save contacts. ⢠Name display â Change the way contacts' names are displayed. This setting is no t available for all languages. ⢠Default contact list â Select which conta cts list opens when you open the Contacts appli cation. This setting is only available when there is more than one contacts list. ⢠Remote search server â Change the remote contacts database. This option is available only if remote contacts data bases are supporte d by your service provider. Multitasking You can ha ve several applications open at the same tim e. To switch between active appl ications, press and hold the home key, scro ll to an applic ation, and press the scroll key. To close the selected application, press the backspace key. Example: When you have an active phone call and want to check your calendar, press the home key to access the menu, an d open the Calendar application. The phone call remains active in the background. Example: When you are writing a message and want to check a web site, press the home key to access the menu, an d open the Web application. Select a bookmark or enter the web address manually, and select Go to . To return to your message, p ress and hold the home key, scroll to the message an d press the scroll key. About Ovi Sync Select Menu > Applications > Ovi sync . With Ovi Sync, y ou can synchro nise contacts, calendar entries, and notes between your device and Ovi. To use Ovi Sync, you need a Nokia a ccount. If you do not have a Nok ia account, create one a t www.ovi.com. 39 New from Nokia Eseries
Messaging Select Menu > Messaging . In Messaging (network servi c e), you can send and receive text messages, multimedia messages, a udio messages, and e-mail messages. You can also receive web service messages, cell broadcast me ssages, and s pecial messages containing data, and send service commands. Before sending or receivin g messages, you may need to do the following: ⢠Insert a valid SIM card in the device and be located in the service area of a cellular network. ⢠Verify that the network supports the messaging features you want to use and th at they are activated on your SIM card. ⢠Define the internet access p oint settings on the device. ⢠Define the e-mail account settings on the device. ⢠Define the text messa ge settings on th e device. ⢠Define the multimedi a message settings on the device. The device may recognise the SIM card provider and automatic ally configure so me of the mess age settings . If not, you may need to define th e settings manually; or contact your service provider to configure the settings. Nokia Messaging The Nokia Messaging service automatically transf ers e- mail from your existing e-mail address to your Nokia E52. You can read, respond to, and or ganise your e-mails on the go. The Nokia Mess aging service works wi th a number of internet e-mail providers that are often used fo r personal e-mail, such as Google e-mail services. The Nokia Messaging service may be chargeable. For information on possible costs, contact your se rvice provider or the Nokia Messaging service. The Nokia Messagi ng service must be sup ported by your network and may not be available in all regions. Install the Nokia Messaging application 1. Select Menu > Email and New mailb. . 2. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 3. Select Connect to allow your device to access the network. 4. Enter your e-mail address and password. The Nokia Messaging service can run on your device even if you have installed other e-ma il applications, such as Mail for Exchange. E-mail service The e-mail service automatica lly pushes e-mail from your existing e-mail address to your Nokia E52. You can read, resp ond to, and organis e your e-mail on the go. The e-mail service works with a number of internet e- mail providers th at are ofte n used for personal e-mail. 40 Messaging
This service must be support ed by your network and may not be available in all countrie s or regions. For availability, contact your service provider. Set up e-mail on your device 1. Select Menu > Email > New mailb. . 2. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 3. If requested, allow your device to connect to the internet. 4. Select your e-mail service provider or account type. 5. Enter the required accoun t details, such as e-mail address and password. The e-mail service can run on your device even if you have installed other e-mail applications, such as Mail for Exchange. E-mail Set up your e-mail With the E-mail wizard, you can set up your corporate e- mail account, such as Mail fo r Exchange, and your internet e-mail account. When setting up your co rporate e-mail, you may be prompted for the name of the server associated with your e-mail address. For detail s, contact your company IT department. 1. To open the wizard, in the home screen, select Set up e-mail . 2. Enter your e-mail address and pa ssword. If the wizard is not able to configure your e-mail settings automatic ally, you need to select your e-mail ac count type, and enter the rela ted account settings. If your device contains any a dditional e-mail clients, those are offered to you when you open the wizard. Mail for Exchange Use of the Mail for Exchange is limited to over-the-air synchronisation of PIM informat ion between the Nokia device and the authorised Microsoft Exchange server. Send e-mail Select Menu > Messaging . 1. Select your mailbox and Options > Create email . 2. In the To field, enter the recipient's e-mail address. If the recipient's e-mail addres s can be found in Con tacts, start entering the recipient's name, and select th e recipient from the proposed ma tches. If you add several recipients, insert ; to separate the e-ma il addresses. Use the Cc field to send a copy to other recipients, or the Bcc fiel d to send a blind copy to recipients. If the Bcc field is not visible, select Options > More > Show Bcc field . 3. In the Subject field, ente r the subject of the e-mail. 4. Enter your message in the text area. 5. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Add attachment â Add an attachmen t to the message. ⢠Priority â Set the priority of the message. ⢠Flag â Flag the message for follow-up. ⢠Insert temp late â Insert text from a template. 41 Messaging
⢠Add recipient â Add recipients to the message from Contacts. ⢠Editing op tions â Cut, copy, or paste the selected text. ⢠Input opt ions â Activate or deactivate predictive text input, or select th e writing language. 6. Select Option s > Send . The available options m ay vary. Add attachments Select Menu > Messaging . To write an e-mail message, select your mailbox and Options > Create email . To add an attachmen t to the e-mail message, select Options > Add attachment . To remove the selected attachment, select Optio ns > Remove attachment . Read e-mail Select Menu > Messaging . Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Me ssages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your dev ice or PC. To read a received e-mail mess age, select the mailbox, and select the messa ge from the list. To reply to the message sender, select Options > Reply . To reply to the sender and all other recipients, select Options > Reply to all . To forward the message, select Options > Forward . Download attachments Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To view the attach ments in a received e-mail message, scroll to th e attachmen t field, and select Options > Actions . If there is one attachment in the message, select Open to open the attachment . If there are several attachments, select View list to see a list showing which attachments h ave been downloaded. To download the selected attachment or all the attachments from the list to your device, select Options > Actions > Download or Download al l . The attach ments are not saved in your device , and are deleted when you delete the message. To save the selected attachment or all the downloaded attachment s in your device, select Options > Actions > Save or Save all . To open the selected, downloaded attachment, select Options > Actions > Open . Reply to a meeting request Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. Select a received meeting request, Options , and from the following: ⢠Accept â Accept the meeting request. ⢠Decline â Decline the meeting request. ⢠Forward â Forward the meet ing request to another recipient. 42 Messaging
⢠Remove from calendar â Remove a cancelled meeting from your calendar. Search for e-mail messages Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To search for it ems within the recipients, subjects, and body texts of the e-mail mess ages in the mailbox, select Options > Search . To stop the search, select Options > Stop search . To start a new search , select Options > New sea rch . Delete e-mails Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To delete an e-mail me ssage, select the message and Options > Act ions > Delet e . The message is placed in the Deleted items folder, if avai lable. I f there is no Deleted items folder available, the message is deleted permanently. To empty the Deleted items fo lder, select the fo lder and Options > Empty deleted items . Switch between e-mail folders Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To open another e-mail folder or mailbox, select Inbox at the top of the display. Select the e-mail folder or mailbox from the list. Disconnect from the mailbox Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To cancel the synchroni sation between the device and the e-mail server, and to work with e-ma il without a wireless connection, select Options > Disconnect . If your mailbox does not have the Disconnect option, select Options > Exit to disconnect from the mailbox. To start the syn chronisation again, select Options > Connect . Set an out-of-office reply Select Menu > Email . To set an out-of-office reply, if available, select your mailbox and Option s > Settings > Mailbox > Out of office > On . To enter the text for the reply, select Out of office repl y . General e-mail settings Select Menu > Email and Settings > Global settings . Select from the following: ⢠Message list layout â Select whether the e-mail messages in In box display one or t wo lines of text. ⢠Body text p review â Preview messa ges when scrolling through the list of e-mail messages in Inbox. ⢠Title dividers â To be able to expand and collapse the list of e-mail mess ages, select On . 43 Messaging
⢠Download notifications â Set the device to display a notification when an e-mail attachment has been downloaded. ⢠Warn before de lete â Set the device to di splay a warning before you dele te an e-mail message. ⢠Home screen â Defin e how many lines of e-mail are displayed in the home screen information area. Messaging folders Select Menu > Messaging . Messages and data received using Bluet ooth connectivity are stored in the Inbox folder. E-mail messages are stored in the Mailbox folder. Messages that you have been writi ng can be stored in the Dra fts folder. Messages that are waiting to be sent are stored in the Outbox folder, and messages that have been sent, excluding Bluetooth messages, a re stored in the Sen t folder. Tip: Messages are placed in the Outbox folder, for example, when your device is outside network coverage. Note: The message sent icon or text on your device screen does not indicate that the message is received at the intended destination. To request the network to se nd you a delivery rep ort of the text messages and mult imedia messag es you have sent (network service), select Optio ns > Settings > Text message > R eceive re port or Multimedia message > Receive reports . The reports are saved in the Reports folder. Text and multimedia messages Select Menu > Messaging . Only devices that have com p atible features can receive and display multimed ia messages. The appearance of a message may vary depending on the receiving device. A multimedia mess age (MMS) can con tain text and ob jects such as images, sound clips, or video clips. Before you can send or receive multimedia me ssages on your device, yo u must define the multimedia message setting s. Your device may recognise the SIM card provider and configure the correct multimedia mes sage setting s automatically . If not, contact your service provider for the correct settings, order the settings from your service provider in a configuration message, o r use th e Settin gs wizard application. Write and send messages Select Menu > Messaging . Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Mess ages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your dev ice or PC. Before you can create a mult imedia message or write an e-mail, you must h ave the co rrect connection settings in place. The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceed s this limi t, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS . 44 Messaging
Check the size limit of e-mail messages with your service provider. If you attempt to send an e-mail message t hat exceeds the size limit of the e-mail server, the mess age is left in the Outbox folder, and the device attempts to resend it periodically. Sending an e-mail requires a data connection, and continuous attempts to resend the e-mail may increase your data transfer costs. In the Outbox folder, you can delete such a message, or move it to the Drafts folder. 1. Select New mess age > Message to send a text or multimedia message (MMS), Audio message to send a multimedia message th at includes one sound clip, or E-mail to send an e-mail message. 2. In the To field, press the scroll key to select recipients or groups from the contacts list, or enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail a ddress. To add a semicolon (;) that separates t he recipients, press * . You can a lso copy and paste the number or address from the clipboard. 3. In the subject field, enter the subject of the e-mail. To change the fields that are visible, select Options > Message header fields . 4. In the message field, write the message. To insert a template or no te, select Options > Insert conte nt > Insert text > Template or Note . 5. To add a media file to a multimedia message, select Options > Insert conte nt , the file type or source, and the desired file. To insert a business card, s lide, note, or some other file to the message, select Options > Insert content > Insert other . 6. To capture an image or r ecord a video or sound clip for a multimedia messa ge, select Options > Insert content > Inse rt image > New , Insert video clip > New , or Insert sound clip > New . 7. To add special characters, press * , and select More symbols an d a symbol. 8. To add a smiley, pre ss * , and select More emoticons and a smiley. 9. To add an a ttachment to an e-mail, select Op tions and the attachment type. E-mail attachments are indica ted by . 10. To send the message, select Options > Send , or press the call key. Note: The message sent icon or text on yo ur de vi ce screen does not indicate that the message is received at the intended destination. Y o u r d e v i c e s u p p o r t s t e x t m e s s a g e s b e y o n d t he l i m i t f o r a single message . Longer me ssages are sen t as two or more messages. Your service pro vid er may charge accordingly. Characters with accents, other ma rks, or some language options take more space, and limit the number of characters that can be sent in a single messa ge. You may not be able t o send video clips that are saved in the MP4 file format or that exceed the size limit of the wireless network in a multimedia message. Text messages on the SIM card Select Menu > Messaging and Options > SIM messages . Text messages may be stored on your SIM card. Before you can view SIM messages, you mu st copy the messages to a folder in the device. After copying the messa ges to a folder, 45 Messaging
you can view them in the fold er or delete them from the SIM card. 1. Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark al l to mark every message. 2. Select Option s > Copy . 3. Select a folder and OK to begin copying. To view SIM card messages, open the folder where you copied the messages, and open a message. Receive and reply to multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Me ssages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your dev ice or PC. Tip: If you receive multim edia mess ages that contain objects unsupported by y our device, you cannot open them. Try to send these objects to another device such as a computer, an d open them there. 1. To reply to a multimedia message, open the message, and select Opt ions > Reply . 2. Select To sender to reply to the sender, To all to reply to everyone included in the received message, Via audio messa ge to reply with an audio message, or Via e-mail to reply with an e-mail message. E-mail message is available only if a mailbox is configur ed and the message is sent fr om an e-mail address. 3. Enter the text of the message, and select Opt ions > Send . Create presentations Select Menu > Messaging . Creating multimedia presen tations is not possible if MMS creation mode is set to Restricted . To chan ge the setting, select Options > Setti ngs > Multimed ia message > MMS creat ion mode > Free or Guided . 1. To create a presentation, select New message > Message . The message type is changed to multimedia message based on the inserted content. 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scroll key to add a recipient from the contacts list. If you enter more than one num ber or e-mail address, separat e them with a semicolon. 3. Select Options > Insert conten t > Insert presentati on and a presenta tion template. A template may define which media objects you can include in the presentation , where they appear, and which effects are displa yed between images and slides. 4. Scroll to the text area, and enter the text. 5. To insert images, sound or video clips, or notes in your presentation, scroll to the corresponding object area, and select Options > Insert . 6. To add slides, select Options > Insert > New slide . To select the background colour for the presentation and background images for different slides, select Options > Background settings . To set effects between images or slides, select Options > Effect settings . 46 Messaging
To preview the presentation, select Options > Preview . Multimedia presentations may only be viewed in compatible de vices that sup port presentati ons. They may appear different in different devices. View presentations To view a presentation, op en the multimedia message from the Inbox folder. Sc roll to the presentation, and press the scroll key. To pause the presentation, press either selection key. To resume playing the presentation, select Options > Continue . If the text or images are too large to fit on the display, select Options > Activate scrolling , and scroll to see the entire presentation. To find phone numbers and e-mail or web addresses in the presentation, select Options > Find . You may use these numbers and addres ses to make ca lls, send messages, or create bookmarks, for example. View and save multimedia attachments To view multimedia messages as complete present ations, open the message, and select Options > Play present ation . Tip: To view or play a multimedia object in a multimedia message, select View image , Play sound clip , or Play video cli p . To view the name and size of an att achment, select th e message and Op tions > Objects . To save a multimedia object, select Options > Objects , the object, and Options > Save . Organise messages Select Menu > Messaging and My folders . To create a new folde r to organise your messages, select Options > New folder . To rename a folder, select Options > Rename folde r . You can only rename folders that you have created. To move a message to another folder, select the message, Options > Move to folder , the folder, and OK . To sort messages in a specific order, select Options > So rt by . To view the properties of a message, select the message and Options > Message details . Message reader With Message reader you can lis ten to text, multimedia, audio, and e-mail mess ages. To listen to new messages or e-mail, in the home screen, press and hold the left sele ction key until Message reader opens. To listen to a message from your Inbox, scroll to the message, and s elect Options > Listen . To listen to an e- mail message from your mailbox, scroll to the message, 47 Messaging
and select Options > Listen . To stop the reading, press the end key. To pause and continue the read ing, press the scroll key. To skip to the next message, scro ll right. To replay the current message or e-mail, scroll left . To skip to the previous message, scroll left at the beginning of the message. To view the current message or e-mail in text format without the soun d, select Options > View . Speech Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Speech . With Speech , you can set the langua ge, voice, and voice properties for the message reader. To set the language for the message read er, select Language . To download additi onal languages to your device, select Optio ns > Dow nload la nguage s . Tip: When you download a new langu age, you must download at least one voice for that language. To set the speaking voice, select Voice . The voice depends on the selected language. To set the spea king rate, select Sp eed . To set the spea king volume, select Volume . To view details of a voice, open the voice tab, and select the voice and Options > Voice details . To listen to a voice, select the voice and Options > Pl ay voice . To delete languages or v oices, select the item and Options > Delete . Message reader settings To change the messa ge reader settings, open the Set tings tab, and define the following: ⢠Language detection â Activate automatic reading language detection. ⢠Continuous reading â Activate continuous readin g of all selected messages. ⢠Speech prompts â Set the message reader to insert prompts in messa ges. ⢠Audio source â Listen to m essages throu gh the earpiece or loudspeaker. Special message types Select Menu > Messaging . You can receive special messa ges that contain data, such as operator logos, ringing tones, bookmarks, or internet access or e-mail account settings. To save the contents of these messages, select Option s > Save . Service messages Service messages are sent to your device by service providers. Service messages may contain notifications such as news head lines, services, or links through wh ich the message content can be downloaded. To define the service message settings, select Options > Settings > Service message . To download the service or message content, select Options > Download messa ge . 48 Messaging
To view information about the sender, web address, expiration date, and other de tails of the message before downloading it, select Options > Message details . Send service commands You can send a service request message (also known as a USSD command) to your se rv ice provider and request activation for certai n network services. Contact your service provider for the service request text. To send a service reque st message, se lect Options > Service commands . Enter the service request text and select Option s > Send . Cell broadcast Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Cell broadcast . With the cell broadc ast network serv ice, you can receive messages on various topics from your service provider, such as weather or traffic conditions in a particular region. For available topics and r ele vant topic nu mbers, contact your service provider. Cell broadcast messages cannot be received when the device is in the remote SIM mode. A packet data (GPRS) connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS (3G) networks. To receive cell broadcast messages, you may need to turn cell broadcast reception on. Select Optio ns > Settings > Reception > On . To view messages related to a top ic, select the topic. To receive messages related to a topic, select Op tions > Subscribe . Tip: You can set important topics as hot topics. You are notified in the home screen, when you receive a message related to a hot topic. Select a topic and Options > Hotmark . To add, edit, or delete topics, select Options > Topic . Messaging settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings . Open the message type in qu estion, and define all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Your device may recognise the SIM card provider and configure the correct text message, multimedia message, and GPRS settin gs automati cally. If no t, contact yo ur service provider for the correct settings, order the settings from your service provider in a configuration message, or use the Settings wizard application. Text message settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Text message . Select from the following: ⢠Message centres â View the available message centres for your device, or add a new one. ⢠Message centre in use â Select a message centr e to send the message. 49 Messaging
⢠Character encoding â Select Reduce d support to use automatic character conversion to another encoding system when available. ⢠Receiv e report â Select Yes if you want the network to send you delivery reports on your messages (network service). ⢠Message validity â Select how long the message centre resends your messag e if the first attempt fails (network service). If the re cipient cannot be reached within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. ⢠Message sent as â Convert the message to another format. Change this option only if you are sure that your message centre is able to convert text messages into these other formats. For more information, contact your service provider. ⢠Preferred connection â Select the preferred method of connection when sending text messages from your device. ⢠Reply via same centre â Select whether you want the reply message to be sent using the sa me text message centre number (network service). Multimedia message settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Multimedia message . Select from the following: ⢠Image size â Scale images in multimedia messages. ⢠MMS creation mode â Select Rest ricted to set your device to prevent you from including content in multimedia messages that m ay not be supported by the network or the receiving de vice. To receive warnings about including such content, select Guided . To create a multimedia message with no restricti ons on attachment type, s elect Free . If you select Restricted , creating multimedia presentations is not possible. ⢠Access point in use â Selec t the default access point to connect to the multimedia messa ge centre. You may not be able to change the default access point i f it is preset in your device by your service provider. ⢠Multimedia re trieval â Select how you want to receive messages, if available. Select Always automatic to receive multimedia messages always automatically, Auto in home netw. to receive notification of a new multim edia message that you can retrieve from the message centre (for example, when you are travelling abroad and are outside your home network), Manual to retrieve multimedia messages from the message ce ntre manually, or Off to prevent receipt of any multimed ia message s. Automatic retrieval may not be supported in all regions. ⢠Allow anonymous msgs. â Receive messages from unknown senders. ⢠Receive adverts â Recei ve messages de fined as advertisements. ⢠Receive reports â Request for delivery and read reports of sent messages (n etwork service). Receiving a delivery report of a mu ltimedia message th at has been sent to an e-mail address ma y not be possible. ⢠Deny report sending â Select Yes to not send delivery reports from your device for received multimedia messages. ⢠Message validity â Select how long the messaging centre tries to send t he message (netw ork service). If the recipient of a message cannot be rea ched within the validity period, the message is removed from the multimedia messaging centre. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the ne twork. 50 Messaging
The device requires network support to indicate th at a sent message has been received or read. Depending on the network and other circumstances, this inform ation may not always be reliable. Service message settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Service message . To allow your device to receive service messages from your service provider, select Service messages > On . To select how to dow nload services and serv ice message content, select Download messages > Automaticall y or Manually . If you select Automatically , you may still need to confirm some downloads si nce not all services can be downloaded automatically. Cell broadcast settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Cell broadcast . To receive cell broadcast messages, select Recepti on > On . To select the langua ges in which you want to receive cell broadcast messages, select Language . To display new topics in the ce ll broadcast topics list, select Topic detection > On . Other settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Other . Select from the following: ⢠Save sent messages â Select whether to save sent messages in the Sent folder. ⢠Number of saved msgs. â Enter the number of sent messages to save. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. ⢠Memory in use â Select where to save your messages. You can save messages to the memory card only if a memory card is inserted. 51 Messaging
Phone To make and receive calls, the device must be switched on, it must have a valid SIM card insta lled, a nd you must be located in the service area of a cellular network. To make or receive a net call, your device must be connected to a net call service. To connect to a net call service, your device must be in the coverage of a connection network, such as a wireless LAN (WLA N) access point. Voice calls Note: The actual in voice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. Noise canc ellation Noise from the surrounding environment is actively removed from your speech using dual microphone noise cancellation technology. Noise picked up by a secondary microphone is removed from the signal of the main microphone into which you speak. This results in a significantly imp roved transmission of speech in a noisy environment. Noise cancellation is not available when using th e loudspeaker or a headset. For the best results, hold the device with the main microphone to wards your mouth. Answer a call To answer a call, press the call key. To reject a call, press the end key. To mute the ringing tone instead of answering a call, select Silence . When you have an active ca ll and the call waiting function (network service) is activate d, press the call key to answer a new incoming call. The first call is put on hold. To end the active call, press the end key. Make a call To make a call, enter the p h one number, including the area code, and press the call key. Tip: For internation al calls, add the character that replaces the intern ational access code, and enter the country code, area code (omit the leadin g 0, if necessary), and phone number. 52 Phone
To end the call or cancel th e call attempt, press the end key. To make a call using the saved contacts, open the contacts. Enter the first letters of the name, scroll to the name, and press the call key. To make a call using the log, press the call key to view up to 20 numbers that you last called or attempted to call. Scroll to the desired number or name, and press the call key. To adjust the volume of an active call, use the volume keys. To switch from a voice call to a video call, select Option s > Switch to video call . The device ends the voice call and makes a video call to the recipient. Make a conference call 1. To make a conference call, enter a participant's phone number, and press the call key. 2. When the participant answers, select Optio ns > New call . 3. When you have made a phone call to all the participants, select Options > Conference to merge the calls into a conference call. To mute the microphone during the call, press the mute key. To drop a participant from the conference call, select Options > Conf erence > Drop participant and the participant. To discuss privately with a conference call participant, select Option s > Conference > Private and the participant. Voice mail Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Call mailb ox . When you open the Voice mail application (network service) for the first time, you are asked to enter the number of your voice mailbox. To call your voice mailbox, scroll to Voice mailbox , and select Optio ns > Call voice mailbox . If you have configured net call settings to your device and have an internet call mailbox, to call the mailbox, scroll to the mailbox, and select Options > Call internet call mbx. . To call your mailbox in the home screen, press and hold 1 ; or press 1 and then the call key. Select the mailbox you want to call. To change the mailbox numb er, select the mailbox and Options > Change number . Video calls About video calls To be able to make a video call, you need to be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For availability and subscription to video call services, contact your service provider. While talking, you ca n see a real-time, two-way video between you and the reci pient of the call, if the recipient has a compati ble device. The video image recorded by the camera in yo ur device is shown to the video call recipient. A video call can only be made between two parties. 53 Phone
Make a video call To make a video call, enter th e phone number or select the recipient from the contacts list and Options > Cal l > Video call . When the video call sta rts, the camera of the device is activated. If the camera is already in use, video sending is disabled. If the recipient of the call does not want to send video back to you, a still image is shown instead. To define the still image sent from your device instead of video, select Menu > Ctrl. p anel > Settings and Phone > Call > Image in video cal l . To disable the sending of aud io, video, or video and audio, select Options > Disable > Sending audio , Sending video , or Sending au d. & video . To adjust the volu me of an active video call, use the volu me keys. To use the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate loudspeaker . To mute the loudspeaker and use the earpiece, select Options > Activate han dset . To swap the places of im ages, select Opti ons > Swap images . To zoom the image on the display, select Options > Zoom and scroll up or down. To end the video call and make a new voice call to the same recipient, select Options > Switch to voice call . Video sharing Use video sharing (network service) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. The loudspeaker is acti ve when you activate video sha ring. If you do not want to use th e loudspeaker for the voice call while you share video, you can also use a compatible headset. Warning: Continuous exposure to high volume may d a m a g e y o u r h e a r i n g . L i s t e n t o m u s i c a t a m o d e r a t e l e v e l , and do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use. Video sharing requirements Video sharing requires a 3G connection. For more information on the service, 3G network availability , and fees associated with using this service, conta ct your service provider. To use video sharing you must do the following: ⢠Ensure that your device is set up for person-to-person connections. ⢠Ensure you have an active 3G connection and are withi n 3G network coverage. If you move outside the 3G network during a video sh aring session, the sharing stops while your voice call continues. ⢠Ensure that both the sender and recipien t are registered to the 3G network. If you invite someone to a sharing session and the recipientâ s device is not within 3G network coverage , does not have video sharing installed, or person -to-person connections set up, the recipient does not receive invitations. You receive an error message tha t indicates that the recipient cannot acce pt the invitation. 54 Phone
Settings To set up video sha ring, yo u need person-to-person and 3G connection settings. Person-to-person connection settings A person-to-person connect ion is also known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) connection. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you can use video sharing. Ask your service provider for the SIP profile settings, and save them in you r device. Your service provider may send you the settings or give you a list of the needed parameters. To add a SIP address to a conta ct card: 1. Select > Contacts . 2. Open the contact card (or start a new card for that person). 3. Select Options > Add detail > Share video . 4. Enter the SIP address in the format username@domainname (you can use an IP address instead of a domain name). If you do not know the S IP address for the contact, you can use the phone number of the recipient, including the country code, to share video (if supported by the network service provider). 3G connection settings To set up your 3G connection: ⢠Contact your service provider to establish an agreement for you to use the 3G network. ⢠Ensure that your device 3G access point connection settings are configured pro perly. Share live video or video clips During an active voice call, select Options > Share video . 1. To share live video during the call, select Live video . To share a video clip, select Video clip and the clip you want to share. You may need to convert the video clip into a suitable format to be able to share it. If your device notifies you that the video clip must be co nverted, select OK . You r device must have a video editor for the conversion to work. 2. If the recipie nt has severa l SIP addresse s or phone numbers including the country code saved in the contacts list, select the de sired address o r number. If the SIP address or phone number of the recipient is not available, enter the address or number of the recipient including the country code, and select OK to send the invitation. You r device sends the invi tation to the SIP address. Sharing begins automa tically when the recipient accepts the invitation. Options during video sharing Zoom the video (ava ilable for sender only). Adjust the brightness (a vailable for sender only). or Mute or unmute the microphone. or Turn the loudspeaker on and off. or Pause and resume video sharing. Switch to full screen mode (available for receiver only). 55 Phone
3. To end the sharing session, select Sto p . To end the voice call, press the end ke y. When you end the call, video sharing also ends. To save the live video you shared, select Yes when prompted. The device notifies you of the memory location of the saved video. To define the preferred memory location, select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Settings an d Connection > Video sharing > Preferred savin g memory . If you access other applicat ions while you are sharing a video clip, the sharing is paus ed. To return to the video sharing view, and to con tinue sharing, in the home screen , select Options > Continue . Accept an invitation When someone sends you a vi deo sharing invitation, the invitation message displays the senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is not set to silen t, it rings when you receive an invitation. If someone sends yo u a share invitation an d you are not within UMTS network covera ge, you will not know that you received an invitation. When you receive an invitation , select from the following: ⢠Yes â Accept the invitation, and activat e the sharing session. ⢠No â Reject the invitation. The sender receives a message that you rejected the inv itation. You can a lso press the end key to reject the invitation and end the voice call. To mute the video on your device, select Optio ns > Mute . To play the video at the original volume, select Options > Original volume . This does not affect the audio playback of the other party of the phone call. To end the sharing session, select Stop . To end the voice call, press the end key. When you end the call, also video sharing ends. Internet calls About internet calls With the internet call servic e (network service), you can make and receive calls over th e internet. Internet calls can be established between co mputers, between mobile phones, and between a VoIP device and a tradit ional telephone. To be able to use the service, you must subscribe to the service, and have a user acc ount. To make or receive an intern et call, you must be in the service area of a wireless LAN, and connected to an internet call service. Activate internet calls Select Menu > Contacts . Scroll left, and select the internet calls service from the list. To make or receive internet calls, contact your service provider to receive the intern et call connection settings. To connect to an internet call service, your devi ce must be in a network service area. To activate your inte rn et call service, select Options > Activate servi ce . 56 Phone
To search for available wireless LAN (W LAN) connections, select Option s > Sear ch for WLAN . Make internet calls When you have activat ed the in ternet call feature, you can make an internet call from all applications where y ou can make a regular voice call, such as the contacts list or log. For example, in the contacts list, scroll to the desired contact, and select Options > Call > Int ernet call . To make an internet call in the home screen, enter the phone number or internet address, and select Net call . 1. To make an internet call to an internet a ddress that does not start with a digit, press any n umber key in the home screen, then press # for a few seconds to clear the display and to switch from number mode to letter mode. 2. Enter the internet address, and pr ess the call key. Internet call settings Select Menu > Contacts . Scroll left, and select the internet calls service from the list. To view or edit intern et call settings, select Optio ns > Settings and from the following: ⢠Service co nnectivi ty â Select the destinati on settings for internet call connectivity, and edit destination details. To change a destination, scroll to the servi ce, and select Change . ⢠Availability r equests â Select whether to automatically accept all in comi ng presence requests without a confirmation query. ⢠Service information â View technical information about the selected service. Voice functions Voice functions With the Voice functions application, you can use your voice to carry out basic tasks. You can call or send audio messages to contacts, answer ca lls, and listen to your messages. You need to re cord a personal wake-up command before you can ca rry out these tasks. When Voice functions is activated, th e device is listening for your wake-up command. When t he wake-up command is given , the tasks can be carried out. Activate Voice functions Select Menu > Applications > Voice funct. . To activate the appl ication, do the following: 1. Select Rec. commands > Start co mmand to record the wake-up command. 2. In the main view, select Voice functi ons . 3. Say the wake-up command. Select from the following: ⢠Rec. commands â Record commands. ⢠Settings â Chan ge the settings. 57 Phone
⢠What is this? â Read information about the application. The available options m ay vary. Speed dialling Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Phone > Call > Speed diallin g . Speed dialling allows you to make a call by pressing and holding a number key in the home screen. To activate speed dialling, select On . To assign a number key to a phone number, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Pho ne > Speed dial . Scroll to the number key (2 - 9) on the display, and select Options > Assign . Select the desired number from the contacts list. To delete the phone number assigned to a number key, scroll to the speed dialling key, and select Options > Remove . To modify a phone number assigned to a number key, scroll to the speed dialling key, and select Options > Change . Call divert Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Sett ings and Phone > Call divert . Divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or to another phone number. For details, cont act your service provider. Select the type of calls to divert and from the following: ⢠All voice calls or All fax call s â Divert all incoming voice or fax calls. You cann ot answer the calls, only divert the calls to another number. ⢠If busy â Divert incoming calls if you have an active call. ⢠If not answered â Divert incoming calls after your device rings for a specified length of time. Select the length of time for the device to ring before diverting the call. ⢠If out of reach â Divert calls when the device is switched off or out of network coverage. ⢠If not available â Divert calls if you have an active call, do not answer, or the device is switched off or out of network coverage. To divert calls to your voice mailbox, select a call type, a diverting option, and Options > A ctivate > To voice mailbox . To divert calls to another ph one number, select a call type, a diverting option, and Options > Activate > To other number . Enter the number, or select Fi nd to retrieve a number saved in Contacts. To check the current diverting status, scroll to the diverting option, and select Options > Ch eck status . To stop diverting calls, scroll to the diverting option, and select Options > Deactivate . Call barring Select Menu > Ct rl. panel > Se ttings an d Phone > Call barring . If you have defined int e rnet call settings, select Internet call barring . 58 Phone
You can bar the calls that can be made or received with the device (network service). To modify the settin gs, you need the barring password from your service provider. Call barring affects all call types. Select from the following voice call barring settings: ⢠Outgoin g calls â Prevent making voice calls with your device. ⢠Incoming calls â Prevent incoming calls. ⢠Internatio nal calls â Prevent calling to foreign countries or regions. ⢠Incoming calls when roaming â Prevent incoming calls when outside your home country. ⢠International calls except to home country â Prevent calls to foreign countries or regions, but allow calls to your home country. To check the status of voice call barrings, s elect the barring option and Options > Check status . To deactivate all voice call ba rrings, select a barring option and Options > Deactivate all barrings . To change the password used for barring voice and fax calls, select Options > Edit barring password . Enter the current code, then the new code twice. The barring password must be four digits long. For deta ils, contact your service provider. Bar net calls Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Ph one > Call barring > Internet call barring . To reject net calls from anonymous callers, select Anonymous call barring > On . Send DTMF tones You can send dua l-tone multifrequency (DTMF) tones during an active call to contro l your voice mailbox or other automated phone services. Send a DTMF tone sequence 1. Make a call, and wait until the recipien t answers. 2. Select Options > Send DTMF . 3. Enter the DTMF tone sequence, or select a predefined sequence. Attach a DTMF tone sequence to a contact card 1. Select Menu > Contacts . Select a contact and Options > Edit > Options > Add detai l > DTMF . 2. Enter the tone sequence. To insert a paus e of about 2 seconds before or between DTMF tones, enter p . To set the device to send the DTMF tones only aft er you select Send DTMF during a call, enter w . To enter p and w with the keypad, press * repeatedly. 3. Select Done . Talking theme Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Themes and Standby > Talking theme . When the talking theme is acti vated, a list of functions supported by the talking them e is displayed in the home screen. As you scroll through the functions, the device reads the displayed functions aloud. Select the desired function. 59 Phone
To listen to the entries in y our contacts list, select Call features > Contacts . To listen to information on yo ur missed and received calls, and dialled numbers, select Call features > Recen t calls . To make a call by entering the phone number, select Call features > Dialler and the desired numbers. To enter a phone number, scroll to the digits and select them one by one. To call your voice mailbox, select Call features > Voice mailbox . To use voice commands to make a call, select Voice commands . To have your received messages read aloud, select Message reader . To listen to the current time, select Cloc k . To listen to the current date, scroll down. If the calendar alarm expires when you are using voice aid, the application reads the calen dar alarm content aloud. To listen to the avai lable options, select Options . Voice commands Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Voice comm. . Use voice commands to make phone calls and launch applications, profiles, or othe r functions on the device. To start voice recognition, press and hold the mute key. The device creates a voice tag for the entries in Contacts and for the functions design ated in the Voice commands application. When a voice command is spoken, the device compares the spoken words to the voice tag stored in the device. Voice commands are not dependent on a speakerâÂÂs voice; however, the voice recognition in the device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to recognise voice commands better. Make a call A voice tag for a contact is the name or nickname that is saved for the contact in the contacts list. Note: Using v oice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an em ergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dia lling in all circumstances. To listen to a voice tag, select a contact and Options > Voice tag d etails > Options > Play voice tag . 1. To make a call using a voice command, press and hold the mute key. 2. When you hear the tone or see the visual display, clearly say the name saved for the con tact. 3. The device plays a synthe sised voice tag for the recognised contact in the selected device la nguage and displays the n ame. After a ti me-out period of 1.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the recognised contact was not correct, select another contact from the proposed matches, or select Quit to cancel dialling. If several numbers are saved for the contact, select the contact an d the desired numb er. 60 Phone
Launch an application The device creates voice tags for the applications listed in the Voice commands application. To launch an ap plication using a voice command, press and hold the mute key, and clearly say the name of the application. If the recognised application was not correct, select another application from the proposed matches, or select Quit to cancel. To change the voice command of an application, select Options > Ch ange command , and enter the new command. Change profiles Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Voice comm. . The device creates a voice tag for each profile. To activate a profile using a voice command, press and hold the mute key in the home screen, and say the name of the profile. To change the voice command, select Profiles > Options > Ch ange command . Voice command settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Voice comm. . Select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Synthesiser â Activate the synthesiser that pla ys recognised voice commands. ⢠Playbac k volume â Adjust the speech volume. ⢠Recognitio n sensitiv ity â Adjust the voice c ommand recognition sensitivity. ⢠Command verification â Select whether the voice commands are accepted au tomatically , manually, or by voice verification. ⢠Remove voice adapts. â Reset voice recognition learning when the main user of the device has changed. Push to talk Some features may not be av ailable in your region. For availability, contact your service provider. Select Menu > Applications > PTT . About push to talk Push to talk (PTT) (network service) is a real-time voice- over-IP service that uses the cellular network. PTT provides direct voice communication , with the push of a key. Use PTT to have a conversation with one person or with a group of people. Before you can use PTT, you mus t define the PTT set tings (access point, PTT, SIP, XDM, a nd Presence). You may receive the settings in a special text message from the service provider that offers the PTT service. You can also use the Settings wizard application to configure PTT, if supported by your service provider. For more i nformation on the PTT application, see th e user guide for your device or your local Nokia website. In PTT communication, one pe rson talks while the others listen through the built-in loudspeaker. Speakers take turns respondi ng to each other. Beca use only one group member can talk at a ny time, the maximum duration of a speec h turn is limited. Th e 61 Phone
maximum duration is usually se t to 30 seconds. For details of the speech turn duration for your network, contact you r service provider. Phone calls always ta ke priority over push to talk activities. Log in and exit PTT When you start th e push to talk (PTT) service , you are automatic ally logged in and connect ed to the channels that were acti ve the last time y ou closed the ap plication. If the connection fa ils, to attempt to log in again, select Options > Log in to PTT . To exit PTT, select Options > Exit . To switch to another open a pplication , press an d hold the menu key. Make and receive a PTT call To make a PTT call, press and hold the call key as long as you talk. To listen to the response, release the call key. To check the login status of your contacts, in PTT, s elect Options > PTT contac ts > Contacts and from the following: ⢠â person available ⢠â person unknown ⢠â person does not want to be disturbed, but can receive callback request ⢠â person has PTT switched off This service depends on your network operator and is only available for subscr ibed cont acts. To subscribe a contact, select Options > Show login st atus . Make a one-to-one call Select Options > PTT contacts > Contacts . Select the contact you want to talk to and Options > Talk 1 to 1 . Press and hold the PTT key the entire time you are talking. When you have finished, release the key. To talk to a contact, press and hold the PTT key also in other views in the PTT app lication , for example, the Contacts view. To make a new phone call, fi rst end the one-to-one call. Select Disconnect . Tip: Hold the device in front of yo u during a PTT ca ll so you can see the display. Speak towards the microphone, and do not cover the lou dspeaker with your hands. Make a group call To call a group, select Options > PTT cont acts > Contacts , mark the con tacts you want to call, and select Options > Talk to many . Answer a PTT call To answer a on e-to-one call, press the call key. To dismiss the call, press the end key. Tip: You can also make a one-to-one or group call from Contacts. Select Options > PTT > Talk 1 to 1 or Talk to many . Callback requests To send a callback request: 62 Phone
In the contacts list, scroll to th e desired name, and select Options > Send callback request . When someone sends you a callback request, 1 new callback request is displayed in the home screen. To respond to a callback request: Select Show , a contact, and Options > Talk 1 to 1 to start a one-to-one call. PTT groups Channels A PTT channel consists of a gr oup of people (for example, friends or a work team) who joined the channel after they were invited. When you call a channel, all members joined to the channel hear the call simu ltaneously. You can join pre-configured ch annels. Public channels are open to anyone who kn ows the URL for the channel. When you are conn ected to a channel an d talk, all members joined to the channel he ar you talking. Up to five channels can be active at the sam e time. Select Options > PTT contacts > Netw. grps./ channels . To connect to a public pre-configured network group or channel for the first time, you must first create the group or channel. Select Options > Add existing , and enter th e required information. After th e link to the group has been created, you can attempt to join the group. Network groups Network groups consist of pre-configured lists of members that are stored on the server. You can define participants by adding them to the member list. When you want to talk to a n etwork group, you ca n select the group, and make a call to it. The serv er calls each participant in the group, and the call is read y when the first participant answers. To make a call, select Options > PTT contacts > Netw. grps./ channels , open the PTT groups tab, select a group, and press the PTT key. Create a channel group To create a new configured network group or channel, select Optio ns > Create ne w , PTT network grou p , or PTT channel . You can create your own publi c channels, choose you r own channel name, and invite members. Those members can invite more members to the publi c channel. You may also set up private chan nels. Only users inv ited by the host are allowed to join and use private channels. For each channel, define Network group name , Nickname , and Thumbnail (optional). When you have s uccessfully creat ed a channel, you a re asked if you want to send channe l invitat ions. Channel invitations are text messages . Talk to a channel or group To talk to a channel after you log i n to the PTT service, press the PTT key. A tone sounds , indicating that access is granted. Continue to press and hold the PTT key the entire time you are talking. W hen yo u finish talking, release the key. If you try to respond to a channel by pressing th e PTT key while another memb er is talking, Wait is displayed. 63 Phone
Release the PTT key, wait fo r the other person to finish talking, and pr ess the PTT key again. Alternatively, press and hold the PT T key, and wa it for Talk to be displayed. When you are talking in a channel, the first person to press the PTT key when someone st ops talking can talk next. To view the currently active members o f a channel during an active call to the channel, select Options > Active members . When you have finished the PTT call, select Disconnect . To invite new members to a n ac tive call, select the channel when you are connected to it. Select Option s > Send invitation to open the invitation view. You can only invite new members when you are the host of a private channel, or when the channel is a public channel. Channel invitations are text messages. You can also advertise your ch annel, so that others may become aware of it and then join. Select Options > Send invitation , and enter the requ ired information. Respond to a channel invitation To save a received channel invitation, select Options > Save channel . The chan nel is added to y our PTT co ntacts, channels view. After you save the cha nnel invitation, you are as ked if you want to connect to the channel. Select Yes to open the PTT sessions view. Your device logs in to the service, if you are not logged in already. If you reject or clear the invitation, the invitation is stored in your messaging inbox. To join t he chan nel late r, open the invitation message, and save the inv itation. Select Yes from the dialog to connect to t he channel. View the P TT log Select Options > PTT log and Missed PTT calls , Received PTT calls , or Created PTT calls . To make a one-to-one call fr om the PTT log, select a contact, and pr ess the PTT key. PTT settings To change your push to talk (PTT) user set tings, select Options > Settings > User settings and from the following: ⢠Incoming calls â Allow or block PTT calls. ⢠Incoming callback reqs. â Receive or block incoming callback requests. ⢠Accepted list calls â Set the device to notify you of incoming PTT calls, or answer the calls automatically. ⢠Callback request tone â Select a ringing tone for callback requests. ⢠Application start-up â Select if you want to log in to the PTT service when you switch on your device. ⢠Default nickname â Enter your default nickname that is displayed to other users. You may not be able to edit this setting. ⢠Show my PTT address â Select when to show you PTT address to the other part ies of the call. You may not be able to select some of the options. Log Select Menu > Log . 64 Phone
The Log application stores information about the communication history of the device. The device registers missed and received calls only if the network supports these functions, and if the devi ce is switched on and within the network service area. Call and data registers Select Menu > Log . To view recently missed, rece ived, and dialled calls, select Recent calls . Tip: To view the dialled numbers when in the home screen, press the call key. To view the approxim ate duration of calls to and from your device, select Call duration . To view the amount of data transferred duri ng packet data connections, select Packe t data . Monitor all communications Select Menu > Log . To monitor all voice calls , text messages, or data connections registered by the device, open the general log tab . To view detailed inform ation about a communication event, select the event. Tip: Subevents, such as sending a tex t message in more than one part or opening a packet data connection, are logged as one communication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging cen tre, or web pages a re shown as packet data connections. To add the phone number fr om a communication event to Contacts, select Options > Save to Cont acts , and create a new contact, or add t he ph one number to an existing contact. To copy the number, for example to paste it to a text message, selec t Optio ns > Use number > Co py . To view a single type of communication event or communication events with one other party, select Options > Filter and the desired filter. To erase the contents of the lo g, recent c alls register, and messag ing de livery repo rts permanently, select Options > Clear log . Call and send messages from Log Select Menu > Log . To call back a caller, select Recent cal ls > Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled n umbers . Select the caller and Options > Call . To reply to a caller with a message, select Recent calls > Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled numbers . Select the caller and Options > Create message , and send a message. Log settings Select Menu > Log . 65 Phone
To set the time for keeping all communication events in the log, select Option s > Settin gs > Log duration and the time. If you select No log , all log contents are permanently deleted. 66 Phone
Internet With your Nokia E52, you can browse the web and download and install n ew applications to your device. Yo u can also use your device as a modem and co nnect your PC to the internet. Browser About Browser With the Browser application, you can view web pages on the internet. Select Menu > Web . If the web page displays u nreadable characters while browsing, select Menu > Web and Options > Settings > Pa ge > Default encoding , and a corresponding encoding. To browse the web, you need to have an internet access point configured in your device. The browser requires network service. Browse the web With the Browser application, you can browse web pages. Select Menu > Web . Shortcu t: To open Browser, press and hold 0 in the home screen. Go to a web page â In the bookmarks view, select a bookmark, or start en tering a web address (the field opens automatically), and select Go to . Some web pages may contain material, such as video clips, that requires a large amou nt of memory to view. If your device runs out of memory while loading such a web page, insert a memory card. Otherwise, the video clips are not displayed. Disable graphics to save memory and spee d up downloading â Select Options > Settings > Page > Load content > Text only . Refresh the cont ent of th e web page â Select Options > Web page opt ions > Reload . View snapshots of we b pages you have visited â Select Back . A list of pages you have visi ted during the current browsing s ess ion opens. This opt ion is available if History list is activate d in the browser settings. Block or allow the automatic opening of multiple windows â Select Options > Web page options > Block pop-ups or Allow pop-ups . View the shor tcut keys â Select Options > Keypad shortcuts . To edit the sh ortcut keys, select Edit . Zoom in or out o n a web page â Pres s * or # . Tip: To go to the home screen w ithout exiting the Browser application or clos ing the connection, press the end key once. 67 Intern et
Browser toolbar The browser toolbar helps yo u select frequently used functions of the browser. To open the toolbar, press and hold the scroll key on a blank spot on a web page. To move within the toolbar, scroll left or right. To select a function, press the scroll key. To view a description of a toolbar icon's function, scroll to the toolbar icon. Navigate pages When you are browsing a large web page, you can use Mini Map or Page overview to vi ew the page at one glance. Select Menu > Web . Activate the Mini Map â Select Options > Settings > General > Mini map > On . When you scroll through a large web page, the Mini Map opens and shows an overview of the page. Move on the Mini Map â Scroll left, ri gh t, up, or down . When you find the desired loca tion, stop scrolling. The Mini Map disappears and leaves yo u at the select ed location. Find information on a web page with Page overview 1. Press 8 . A miniature image of the current web page opens . 2. Move on the miniature im age by scrolli ng up, d own, left, or right. 3. When you find a section you wa nt to view, select OK to go to that section on the web page. Web feeds a nd blogs With web feeds, you can easi ly follow news headlines and your favourite blogs. Select Menu > Web . Web feeds are XML files on web pages. They are us ed to share, for example, the latest news headlines or blogs. It is common to find web feeds on web, blog, an d wiki pages. The browser application automatically detects if a web page contains web feeds. Subscribe to a web fe ed wh en a feed is available on the page â Select Options > Add fe ed . Update a web feed â In the Web feeds view, select a feed and Options > Web feed options > Refresh . Set automatic up date for all web fee ds â In the Web feeds view, select Options > Edi t > Edit . This option is not available if one or more feeds are marked. Widgets Widgets bring more content to your device! Widgets are small, downloadable web ap plications that deliv er multimedia, news feeds, an d other information, such as weather reports, to your device. Installed widgets appear as separate applications in the Applications folder. You can download widgets from the w eb. You can also install widget s on a compatible memo ry card (if available). 68 Intern et
The default access point for wi dgets is the same as in the web browser. When active in the background, some widgets may updat e information automatically i n your device. Using widg ets may involve t h e transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For information about data transmission charges, contact your service provider. Content search With keyword search, you can quickly find the information you are looking for on a web page. Select Menu > Web . Search for text within the current web page â Select Options > Find word . To go to the previous or next match, scroll up or down. Tip: To search for text within the current web page, press 2 . Bookmarks You can store your favourite web pages in Bookmarks for instant access. Select Menu > Web . Access bookmarks 1. If you have a page othe r than Bookmarks as your homepage, select Options > Go to > Bookmarks . 2. Select a web address from th e list or from the collection of bookmarks in the Recently visited pages folder. Save the current web page as a bookma rk â While browsing, select Options > Web page option s > Save as bookmark . Edit or delete bookmarks â Selec t Options > Bookmark manager . Send or add a bookmark, or set a bookmarked web page as the homepage â Select Options > Boo kmark options . Empty the cache Emptying the cache memory helps you keep your data secure. The information or se rvices you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the device. If you have accessed or tried to access confidential information requiring passwords, empty th e cache after each browsing session. Select Options > Clear privacy data > Cache . End the connection End the con nection and close the Bro wser application â Sel ect Options > Exit . Delete cookies â Select Options > Clear privacy data > Cookies . Cookies contain information collected about your v isits to web pages. Connection security If the security indicator ( ) is displayed during a connection, the data transm i ssion between the device and the internet gateway or server is encryp ted. 69 Intern et
The security icon does not in dicate that the data transmission between the ga teway and the content server (where the data is stored) is secure. The service provider secures the data transmiss ion between the gateway and the content server. Security certificates may be required for some services, such as banking services. You ar e notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. Important: Even if the use of ce rtificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably sm aller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate mana ger must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certific ates for increased security to be available. Certificates ha ve a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. Before changing an y certificate settings, you must make sure that you really trust th e owner of the certificate and that the certific at e really belongs to the listed owner. Web settings Select Menu > Web and Options > Sett ings and from the following: General settings ⢠Access point â Change the default access point . Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service pro vider. You may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. ⢠Homepage â Define the homepage. ⢠Mini map â Turn Mini Map on or off. Mini Map helps with web page nav igation. ⢠History li st â If you select On , while browsing, to see a list of the pages you ha ve visited during the curren t session, select Back . ⢠Web address suffix â Enter a web address suffix that the device uses by default when you enter a web address in the Go to field (f or example, .com or .org). ⢠Security warnings â Hide or show security notification s. ⢠Java/ECMA script â Enable or disable the use of scripts. ⢠Java/ECMA script errors â Select whether you want to receive script notifications. Page settings ⢠Load content â Select whether you want to load images and other objects wh ile browsing. If you select Text only , to lo ad images or objects later during browsing, select Opti ons > Display opti ons > Load images . ⢠Default encoding â If text characters are not shown correctly, you can select an other encoding according to the language for the current page. ⢠Block pop-ups â Allow or block automatic opening of different pop- ups while brow sing. ⢠Automatic reload â Select whether yo u want the web pages to be refreshed automatically whi l e browsing. ⢠Font size â Define the font size that is used for web pages. Privacy settings 70 Intern et
⢠Recently visited pages â Enable or disable automatic bookmark collecting. If you wa nt to contin ue saving the addresses of the visited web pages into the Recently visited pa ges folder, but hide the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder . ⢠Form data saving â Select whether you want the password data or data you enter on different forms on a web page to be saved a nd used the next time you open the page. ⢠Cookies â Enable or disa ble the receiving and sending of cookies. Web feed settings ⢠Acc. point for auto-update â Select the desired access point for updating. This option is only av ailable when Automati c updates is active. ⢠Update when ro aming â Select whether you want the web feeds to be up dated automatically when roaming. Browse the intranet Select Menu > Office > Intranet . To connect to an intra net, open the Intranet appl ication and select Options > Connect . If you have several intranet destinations define d in Connection settings, select Change destinatio n to select which intranet to browse. To define the settings for the intra net connection, select Options > Se ttings . Ovi Store About Ovi Store With Ovi Store, you can downloa d mobile games, applications, videos, pictures , themes, and ringing tones to your device. Some items are free of charge; others you n e e d t o p a y f o r w i t h y o u r c r e d i t c a r d o r i n y o u r ph o n e b i l l . The availability of pay ment methods depends on your country of residence and your network service provider. Ovi Store offers content that is compatible with your mobile device and relevant to your tastes and location. Connect your computer to web You can use yo ur device to connect y our PC to the web . 1. Connect the data cable to the USB connectors of your device and your PC. 2. Select Connect PC to web . The necessary software is automatically installed from your device to the PC. 3. Accept the installation in your PC. Accept also the connection, if prompted. Wh en the connection to the web is established, the web browser of your PC opens. You must have administrator rights to your PC, a nd the autorun opti on enabled in the PC. If you use Mac OS , select PC Suite as the connection method. For more information, see www.nokia .com/ support . 71 Intern et
Travelling Need directions? Looking for a restaurant? Your device has the tools to get you where y ou want to be. Positioning (GPS) You can use applic ations such as GPS da ta to determine your location or measure di stances. These applications require a GPS connection. About GPS The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by th e government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accura cy and maintena nce. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made by the United St ates government and is subject to change with t he United States Department of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan . Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Avai lability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buil dings, natural obstacles, an d weather condit ions. GPS signals may not be available inside buildings or underground and may be impaired by materials s uch as concrete and metal. GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data fro m the GPS receiver and cellular radi o networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. The coordinates in the GP S are expressed using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. The availability of the coordinates ma y vary by region. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) Your device also supports assisted GPS (A-GPS) . A-GPS requires network support. Assisted GPS (A -GPS) is used to retrieve ass istance data over a packet data connection, which assi sts in calculating the coordinates of your current location when your device is receiving sign als from satellites. When you activate A-GPS, your device receives use f ul satellite information from an assistance data server over the cellular network. With the help of assisted data, your device can obtain the GPS position faster. Your device is preconfigured to use the Nokia A-GPS service, if no service provid er-specific A-GPS settings are available. The assistan ce data is retrieved from th e Nokia A-GPS service server only when needed. To disable the A-GPS service, select Menu > Applications > GPS dat a and Options > Positio ning settings > Positioni ng methods > As sisted G PS > Options > Disable . 72 Travelling
You must have an inte rnet access point defined in the device to retrieve assistance data from t he Nokia A-GPS service over a packet data connection. The ac cess point for A-GPS can be defined in posi tioning settings. A wireless LAN (WLAN) access point cannot be used for this service. Only a packet data internet access point can be used. Your device asks you to select the internet a ccess point when GPS is used for the first time. Tips on creating a GPS connection Check the satelli te signal status â Select Menu > Applications and GPS data > Options > Satellit e status . If your device has found satellites, a bar for each satellite is shown in the satellite information view. The longer the bar, the stronger the satellite signal. When your device has receiv ed enough data from the satellite signal to calculate yo ur location, the colour of the bar changes. Initially your device must rece ive signals from at least four satellites to be able to calc ulate your location. When the initial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating your location with three satellites . However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. If no satellite signa l can be found, consider the following: ⢠If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. ⢠If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. ⢠If the weather conditions ar e bad, the signal strength may be affected. ⢠Some vehicles have tinted (athermic) win dows, which may block the satellite sign als. ⢠Ensure you do not cover th e antenna w ith your hand . Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to several minu tes. Establishing a GPS con nec tion in a vehicle may take longer. The GPS receiver draw s its po wer from the device battery. Usin g GPS may dra in the battery faster. Position requests You may receive a request from a network service to receive your position inform ation. Service providers may offer information about local topics, such as weather or traffic conditions, based on th e location of your device. When you receive a position request, the service that is making the request is displayed. Select Accept to allow your position information to be sent or Reject to deny the request. Landmarks With Landma rks, you can save the position information of specific locations in your de vice. You can sort the saved locations into different catego ries, such as business, and 73 Travelling
add other information to them, su ch as addresses. You can use your saved landmarks in compatible applications, such as GPS dat a. Select Menu > Applications > Landmarks . The coordinates in the GPS are expressed using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. Select Options and from the following: ⢠New landmark â Create a new landmark. To make a positioning request for your current location, select Current positi on . To select the location from the map, select Select from map . To enter the position information manually, select Enter manually . ⢠Edit â Edit or add inform ation to a saved lan dmark (for example, a street address). ⢠Add to category â Add a landmark to a category in Landmarks. Select ea ch category to which you want to add the landmark. ⢠Send â Send one or several landmarks to a compatible device. Your received landmarks are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You can sort your landmarks into preset categories, and create new categories. To ed it and create new landmark categories, open the categories tab, and select Options > Edit categori es . GPS data Select Menu > Applications > GPS data . GPS data is designed to provide route guidance information to a select ed destination, position information about your curre nt location, and tr avelling information, such as the approximat e distance to the destination and the app roximate duration of travel. The coordinates in the GP S are expressed using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. To use GPS data, the GPS receiver of your device must initially receive position information from at least four satellites to calculate your location. W hen the initial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating your location with three satellites. However, the accuracy is generally bett er when more satellites are found. Route guidance Select Menu > Applications > GPS data and Navigation . Start the route guidan ce outdoors. If started in doors, the GPS receiver may not receiv e the necessary informat ion from the satellites. Route guidance uses a rotating compa ss on the device display. A red ball shows the direction to th e destinatio n, and the approximate distance to it is shown inside the compass ring. Route guidance is designed to show the straightest route and the shortest distance to the destination, measured in a straight line. Any obstacle s on the route, such as buildings and natural obstacle s, are ignored. Differences in altitude are not ta ken into account when calcula ting the distance. Route guidance is active only wh en you move. To set your trip destination, select Opt ions > Set destinati on and a landmark as the destination, or enter the latitude and longitu de coordinates. 74 Travelling
To clear the destination set for you r trip, select Stop navigation . Retrieve position information Select Menu > Applications > GPS data and Positio n . In the position view, you can view the position information of your current lo cation. An estimate of the accuracy of the loca tion is displayed. To save your current loca tion as a landmark, select Options > Save position . Landmarks are saved locations with more information, and th ey can be used in other compatible applications and transferred between compatible devices. Trip meter Select Menu > Applications > GPS data and Trip distance . The trip meter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS sign als. To turn trip distance calculation on or off, select Options > Start or Stop . The calculated values remain on the display. Use this featu re outdoors to receive a better GPS signal. To set the trip di stance and time and average and maximum speeds to zero, and to star t a new calculation, select Option s > Reset . To set the trip meter an d total time to zero, select Rest art . Maps Maps overview Select Menu > Applications > Maps . Welcome to Maps. Maps shows you what is nearby, helps you pla n your route, and guides you where you want to go. ⢠Find cities, streets, and services. ⢠Find your way with turn- by-turn dire ctions. ⢠Synchronise your favourite loca tions and routes between your mobile device and the Ovi Maps internet service. ⢠Check weather forecasts and other local information, if available. Note: Downloading cont ent su ch as maps, satellite images, voice files, guides or traffic information may involve transmission of larg e amounts of data (network service). Some services may not be avai lable in all countries, and may be provided only in sele cted languages. T he services may be network dependent. For more information, contact your network service provider. Almost all digital cartog raphy is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the cartography that you download for use in this device. Content such as sate llite images, guides, weather and traffic information and related services are generated by third parties independent of Nokia. The content may be 75 Travelling
inaccurate and incomp lete to some extent and is subject to availability. Never rely solely on the aforementioned content and related services. View your location and the map See your current location on the map, and brows e maps of different cities and countries. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and My pos ition . marks your current position, if avai lable. If your position is not available, indicates your last known position. If only cell ID based position ing is available, a red halo around the positioning icon in dicates the general area you might be in. In den sely popu lated areas, the ac curacy of the estimate increases, a nd the red halo is smaller than in lightly popu lated areas. Move on the map â Use the scroll key. By default, the map is oriented north. View your current or last known location â Press 0 . Zoom in or ou t â Press * or # . If you browse to an area not covered by the maps that are stored on your device and you have an active data connection, new maps are automatically downloaded. Map coverage varies by country and region. Map view 1 â Selected location 2 â Indicator area 3 â Point of interest (for example, a railway station or a museum) 4 â Information area Change the look of the map View the map in different mode s, to easily identify where you are. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and My position . Press 1 , and select from the following: ⢠Map â In the standard map view , details such as location names or motorway numbers, are easy to read. ⢠Satellite â For a detailed view, use sa tellite images. ⢠Terrain â View at a glance the ground type, for example, when you are travelling off-road. Change between 2D and 3D views â Press 3 . 76 Travelling
About positioning methods Maps displays your location on the map using GPS, A-GPS, WLAN, or cell ID based positioning. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satellite-based navigation system used for calculating your location. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is a network service that sends you GPS data, improving the sp eed and accuracy of the positioning. Wireless local area network (WLAN) positioning imp roves position accuracy when GPS signals are not available, especially when you are indoors or between tall buildings. With cell ID based positioning, the position is determined through the antenna tower your mobile device is currently connected to. Depending on the available positioning method, the accuracy of positioning may vary from a few metres to several kilometres. When you use Maps for the first time, you are prompted to define the internet access point to use to download m ap information, use A-GPS, or connect to a WLAN. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operate d by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The accuracy of location data ca n be affected by adjustments to GPS satelli tes made by the United Stat es government and is subject to change with th e United States Department of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Availa bility and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather conditi ons. GPS signals may not be available inside buildings or underground and may be impaired by materials such as concrete and metal. GPS should not be us ed for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver and cellular rad io networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. Note: Using WLAN may be restricted in some countries. For example, in Fr ance, you are only allowed to use WLAN indoors. For more information, contact your local authorities. Find a location Maps helps you find spe cific locations and businesses . Select Menu > Applications > Maps and Search . 1. Enter search words, such as a street address or postcode. To clear the search field, select Clear . 2. Select Submit . 3. In the list of pro posed matches, go to the desired item. To display the location on the map, select Map . To view the other locations of the search result list on the map, scro ll up or down. Return to the li st of proposed matches â Select List . Search for diff erent types of ne arby places â Select Browse categories and a category, such as shopping, accommodation, or transport. 77 Travelling
If no search results are found, ensu re the spelling of your search terms is correct. Problems with your internet connection may also affect re sults when sea rching online. To avoid data transfe r costs, you can al so get search result s without an acti ve internet connect ion, if you have maps of the searched area stored on your device. View location details View more information about a specific location or place, such as a hotel or restau rant, if available. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and My pos ition . View the detail s of a place â Select a place, press the scroll key, and select Show details . Save places and routes Save addresses, place s of interest, and routes, so they can be quickly used later. Select Menu > Applications > Maps . Save a place 1. Select My position . 2. Go to the location. To search for an address or place, select Search . 3. Press the scroll key. 4. Select Save place . Save a route 1. Select My position . 2. Go to the location. To search for an address or place, select Search . 3. To add another route point, press the scroll key, and select Add to route . 4. Select Add new route po int and the appropriate option. 5. Select Show route > Options > Save route . View your saved places and routes â Select Favourites > Places or Rout es . View and organ i se places or routes You can quickly access the places and routes you have saved. Group the places and routes in to a collection, for example, when planning a trip. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and Favourites . View a saved place on the map 1. Select Places , and go to the place. 2. Select Show on map . To return to the list of sav ed places, select List . Create a collection â Select Create new collection , a nd enter a collection name. Add a saved place to a collection 1. Select Places , and go to the place. 2. Select Organise collections . 3. Select New collection or an existing collection. If you need to delete a route, go to the Ovi Maps internet service at www.ovi.com. 78 Travelling
Send places to your friends When you want to share pl ace information with your friends, send these details directly to their devices. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and My position . Send a place to your fr ien d's compatible device â Select a location on the map, press the scroll key, and select Send . Share location Publish your current location to Facebook, together with text and a picture. Your Facebook friends can see your location on a map. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and Share loc. . To share your location , you need a Nokia a ccount and a Facebook account. 1. Sign in to your N okia account, or, if you do not yet have one, select Create new account . 2. Sign in to your Facebook account. 3. Select your current location. 4. Enter your status upda te. 5. To attach a picture to your post, select Add a photo . 6. Select Share location . Manage your Facebook account â In the main view, select Options > Account > Share location settings > Facebook . Sharing your location and vi ewing the location of others requires an internet connec tion. This may involve the transmission of larg e amounts of data and related data traffic costs. The Facebook terms of use a pply to sharing your location on Facebook. Familiarise your self with the Facebook terms of use and the privac y practices. Before sharing your location to others, always consider carefully with whom you are sharing it. Check the privacy settings of the social netw orking service you are using a s you might share your location with a large group of people. Synchronise your Favourites Plan a trip on your com puter at the Ovi Ma ps website, synchronise the saved places and routes with your mobile device, and access the plan on th e go. To synchronise places or routes between your mobile device and the Ovi Maps internet service, you need to be signed in to your Nokia account. Select Menu > Applications > Maps . Synchronise saved places and routes â Select Favourites > Synchronise wit h Ovi . If you do not have a Nokia account, you are prompted to create one. You can set your device to synchronise your Favourites automatically when you open or close the Maps application. Synchronise Favourites automatically â Select Options > Settings > Synchronisation > Change > At start-up and shut-d. . Synchronising requires an acti ve internet connection, and may involve the transmission of large amounts of dat a through your service providerâÂÂs network. For information 79 Travelling
about data transmission ch ar ges, contact your service provider. To use the Ovi Maps internet service, go to www.ovi.com. Get voice guidance Voice guidance, if available for your language, helps you find your way to a desti nation, leaving you free to enjoy the journey. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and Drive or Walk . When you use drive or walk navigation for the first time, you are asked to select the la nguage of the voice guidance, and download the appropriat e files. If you select a langua ge that includes street names, also the street names are said al oud. Voice guidance may not be available for your language. Change the voice g uidance language â In the ma in view, select Options > Se ttings > Navigation > Drive guidanc e or Walk guid ance and the appropriate option. Deactivate voice guidance â In the main view, select Options > Settings > Navigation > Drive guidance or Walk guidance and None . Repeat the voice guidanc e for car navigation â In the navigatio n view, select Options > Repe at . Adjust the v olume of the v oice guid ance for car navigation â In the navigation view, select Op tions > Volume . Drive to your destination When you need turn-by-turn directions while driving, Maps helps you get to your destination. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and Drive . Drive to a destination â Select Set de stination and the appropriate option. Drive to your home â Select Drive home . When you select Drive home or Walk home for the firs t time, you are prompted to de fine your home location . To later change the home lo cation, do the following: 1. In the main view, select Options > Settings > Naviga tion > Home L ocation > Change > Redefine . 2. Select the appropriate option. Tip: To drive wi thout a set destination, select Map . Your location is displayed on t he centre of the map as you move. Change views d u ring navigation â Pr ess the scroll key, and select 2D view , 3D view , Ar row view , or Route overview . Obey all local laws. Always k eep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. 80 Travelling
Navigation view 1 â Route 2 â Your location and direction 3 â Compass 4 â Information bar (speed, distance, time ) Get traffic and safety information Enhance your driving expe rience with real-time information about traffic ev ents, lane assistance, and speed limit warnings, if available for your country or region. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and Drive . View traffic ev ents on the map â Duri ng drive navigation, select Options > Traffic info . The events are displayed as triangles and lines. Update traffic informati on â Select Optio ns > Traffic info > Update traffic info . When planning a route, you can set the device to avoid traffic events, such as traffic jams or roadworks. Avoid traffic ev ents â In the main view, select Options > Settings > Navigation > Rerou te due to traffic . Warning: The location of speed/safety cameras can be shown on your route during navigation, if this feature is enabled. Some jurisdictions prohibit or regulate the use of speed/safety camera location data. Nokia is not responsible for the accuracy, or the consequences of us e of speed/safety came ra location data. Walk to your destination When you need directions to follow a route on foot, Maps guides you over squares, an d through parks, pedestrian zones, and even shopping centres. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and Walk . Walk to a destination â Select Set dest ination and the appropriate option. Walk to your home â Select Walk home . When you select Drive home or Walk home for the first time, you are prompt ed to define your home locat ion. To later change the home location, do the following: 81 Travelling
1. In the main view, select Options > Settings > Naviga tion > Home Lo cation > Change > Redefine . 2. Select the appropriate option. Tip: To walk with out a set destina tion, select Map . Your location is displayed on the centre of the map as you move. Plan a route Plan your jou rney, and cr eate your route and view it on the map before sett ing off. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and My pos ition . Create a route 1. Go to your starti ng point. 2. Press the scroll key , and select Add to route . 3. To add another route point, select Add new route point and the appropriate option. Change the order of the route points 1. Go to a route point. 2. Press the scroll key , and select Move . 3. Go to the place where you want to move the route point to, and select OK . Edit the locat ion of a route poi nt â Go to the route point, press the scroll key , and select Edit and the appropriate option. View the rou te on the map â S elect Sho w route . Navigate to the dest ination â Select Show route > Options > Start driving or Start walking . Change the settings for a route The route settings affect the navig ation guidance and the way the route is displayed on the map. 1. In the route planner view, op en the Settings tab. To get to the route planner view from the navigation view, select Options > Route points or Route point list . 2. Set the transportation mode to Drive or Walk . If you select Walk , one-way streets are regarded as normal streets, and walkways an d routes through, for example, parks and shopping centres, can be used. 3. Select the desired option. Select the walking mode â Open the Settings tab, and select Walk > Preferred route > Streets or Straight line . Straight line is useful on off-road terrain as it indicates the walking direction. Use the faster or shorter driving rou te â Open the Settings tab, and select Drive > Route selection > Faster route or Shorter route . Use the opti mised driv ing route â Open the Settings tab, and select Drive > Route selection > Op timised . The optimised driving route combines the advantages of both the shorter an d the faster routes. You can also choose to allow or avoid using, for example, motorways, toll roads, or ferries. Use the compass When the comp ass is activated, both the arr ow of the compass and the ma p rotate automatically in the direction to which the top of your device is pointing. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and My position . 82 Travelling
Activate the comp ass â Press 5 . Deactiv ate the co mpass â Pres s 5 again. The map is oriented north. The compass is active when ther e is a gr een outline. If the compass needs calibration, th e outline of the compass is red or yellow. Calibrate the compass â Rotate the device around all axes in a continuous moveme nt until the outline of the compass turns green. 83 Travelling
Nokia Office Tools Nokia Office T ools support mobile business and enable effective communication with work teams. Active notes Select Menu > Office > Acti ve notes . Active notes allows you to create, edit, and view different kinds of notes, for examp le, meeting memos, hobby notes, or shopping lis ts. You can in sert images, videos, and sound in the notes. You can link notes t o other a pplications, such as Contacts, an d send notes to others . Create and edit notes Select Menu > Office > Acti ve notes . To create a note, st art writing. To edit a note, select the note an d Options > Editing options . To add boldface, italics, or underlining to your text or change the font colour, press a nd hold # , and scroll to select the text. Then select Options > Text . Select Options and from the following: ⢠Insert object â Insert images, sound or video clips, business cards, web bookma rks, and files. ⢠Insert new â Add new items to the note. Y ou can record sound and video cl ips, and capture images. ⢠Send â Send the note. ⢠Link note to call â Select Add contacts to link a note to a contact. The note is displayed when making a call to or receiving a call from the contact. Active notes settings Select Menu > Office > Activ e notes and Options > Settings . Select wher e to save notes â Select Memory in use an d the desired memory. Change the layout of active n otes â Select Change view > Grid or List . Display a note during phone calls â Select Show note during call > Yes . Tip: If you tempora rily do not want to see notes during phone calls, select S h o w n o t e d u r i n g c a l l > No . This way you do not have to remove the links between notes and contact cards. Calculator Select Menu > Office > Cal culator . This calculator has limited a ccuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, enter th e first number of the calculation. Select a function such as add or subtract from the function map. Enter the second number of the 84 Nokia Office Tools
calculation, and select = . The calculator performs operations in the order they ar e entered. The result of the calculation remains in the editor field and can be used as the first number of a new calculation. The device saves the result of the last ca lculation in its memory. Exiting the Calcula tor application or switching off the device does not clear th e memory. To recall the last saved result the next time you open the Calculator application, select Options > Last result . To save the numbers or resu lts of a calculation, select Options > Memory > Save . To retrieve the results of a calculation from the memory and use th em in a calculation, se lect Options > Memory > Recall . File manager Select Menu > Office > Fi le mgr. . About File manager Select Menu > Office > Fi le mgr. . With File manager, you ca n browse, manage, and open files. The available options may vary. To map or delete drives, or to define settings for a compatible remote drive connected to your device, select Options > Re mote drives . Find and organise files Select Menu > Office > File mg r. . To find a file, select Options > Find . Select where to search, and enter a search term th at matches the file name. To move or copy files and fold ers, or to create new folders, select Optio ns > Orga nise . Shortcut: To apply actions to multiple items at once, mark the items. To mark or unmark items, press # . Manage a memory card Select Menu > Office > File mg r. . These options are available on ly if a compatible memory card is inserted in the device. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Memory card options â Rename or format a memory card. ⢠Memory card password â Password protect a memory card. ⢠Unlock memory card â Unlock a memory card. Back up files to a memory card Select Menu > Office > File mg r. . To back up files to a memory c ard, select the file types you want to back up, and Optio ns > Back up phone memory . Ensure that your memo ry card has enough free memory for the files that you ha ve chosen to back up. 85 Nokia Office Tools
Quickoffice Read Microsoft Word, Ex cel, and PowerPoint documents You can view Microsoft Office documents, such as Word documents, Excel worksheets, or PowerPoint presentations. Select Menu > Office > Quickoffice . Open a file â Select Browse files and the memory where the file is stored, browse to the correct folder, and select the file. Sort files â Select Opt ions > Sort by . Not all formats or features are supported. Converter Select Menu > Office > Converter . The converter has limited a ccuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Convert measurements Select Menu > Office > Converter . 1. Scroll to the type field, and select Options > Conversi on type to open a list of measures. Select the measurement type to use (other t han currency) and OK . 2. Scroll to the first unit field, and select Options > Select unit . S elect the unit from which to conv ert and OK . Scroll to the next unit field, and select the unit to which to conv ert. 3. Scroll to the first amount field, and enter the value to convert. The other amount field changes a utomatically to show the converted value. Set base currency and exchange rate Select Menu > Office > Co nverter . When you change base curre ncy, you must enter new exchange rates because all pr eviously set exchange rates are cleared. Before you can make currency con versions, you must choose a base currency and add exchange r ates. The rate of the base currency is al ways 1. The base currency determines the conversion ra tes of the other currencies. 1. To set the exchange rate fo r the unit of currency, scroll to the type field, and select Opti ons > Currency rates . 2. Scroll to the currency type, and enter the exchange rate you would like to set per single un it of currency. 3. To change the base currency, scroll to the currency, and select Options > Set as base currency . 4. Select Done > Yes to save the ch anges. After you have set all the necess ary exchang e rates, you can make currency conversions. 86 Nokia Office Tools
Zip manager Select Menu > Office > Zi p . With Zip manager, you can crea te new archive files to store compressed ZIP formatted file s; add single or multiple compressed files or directories to an archive; set, clear, or change the archive pa ssword for protected archives; and change settings, such as comp ression level, and file name encoding. You can save the archive files in the device memory or on a memory card. PDF reader Select Menu > Office > Ado be PDF . With PDF reader, you can re ad PDF documents on the display of your device; search for text in the documents; modify settings, such as zoom level and page views; and send PDF file s using e-mail. Printing You can print documents, such as files, messages, ima ges, or web pages, from your device. You may not be able to print all types of documents . File printing Print files Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Printers . Before printing, ensu re that all the necessary configurations have bee n done to connect your device to the printer. Select Options > Printin g options and from t he following: ⢠Print â Print a document. To prin t to a file, select Print to file , and define the location for the file. ⢠Page setup â You can change the p aper size and orientation, define the margin s, and in sert a header or a footer. The maximum length of th e header and footer is 128 characters. ⢠Preview â Preview the document before printing. Printing options Open a document, such as a file or message, and select Options > Printing options > Print . Define the following options: ⢠Printer â Select an available printer from the list. ⢠Print â Select All pages , Even pages , or Odd pages as the print range. ⢠Print range â Selec t All pages in range , Current page , or Defined pages as the page range. ⢠Number of copi es â Select the number of copies to print. ⢠Print to file â Select to print to a file and determine the location for the file. The available options may vary. Printer settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Printers . To add a new printer, select Options > Add . Define the following: 87 Nokia Office Tools
⢠Printer â Enter a name for the printer. ⢠Driver â Select a driver for the printer. ⢠Bearer â Select a bearer for the printer. ⢠Access point â Select the access point. ⢠Port â Select the port. ⢠Host â Define the host. ⢠User â Enter the user. ⢠Queue â Enter the print queue. ⢠Orientation â Select the orientation. ⢠Paper size â Select the paper size. ⢠Media type â Select the media type. ⢠Colour mode â Select the colour mode. ⢠Printer model â Select the printer model. The available options m ay vary. Image print You can print images from yo ur device using a printer compatible with PictBridge. You can only print images that are in the JPEG file format. To print images in Photos, camera, or image viewer, mark the images, and select Options > Print . Connect to printer Connect your device to a compatible printer with a compatible data cable, and select Image transfer as the USB connection mode. To set your device to ask the purpose of the connection each time the cable is connected, select Menu > Ctrl. panel and Connectivity > USB > Ask on conn ection > Yes . Print preview After you select the p rinter, the selected images are displayed using predefined layouts. If the images do not fit on a single page, scroll up or down to display the ad ditional pages. Image print view After you select t he images to pri nt and the print er, define the printer settings. Select from the following: ⢠Layout â Select the layout for the images. ⢠Paper size â Select the paper size. ⢠Print quality â Select the print qual ity. Clock Select Menu > Applications > Clock . In the Clock application , you can view your local time an d time zone information, set and edit alarms, or modify date and time settings. Alarm clock Select Menu > Applications > Clock . To view your active an d inactive alarms, open t he alarms tab. To set a new a larm, select Options > New alarm . Define the repetition, if needed. When an al arm is active, is displayed. To turn off the sounding alarm, select Stop . To stop the alarm for a certain tim e period, select Sn ooze . If your 88 Nokia Office Tools
device is switched off when an alarm is due, your dev ice switches itself on a nd starts soundi ng the alarm tone . Tip: To define the time perio d after which the alarm sounds again when you set it to snooze, select Options > Settings > Alarm snooze time . To cancel an alarm , select Options > Remove alarm . To change the t ime, date, and clo ck type setting s, select Options > Se ttings . To automatically updat e the time, date, and time zone information to your device (network service), select Options > Se ttings > Automatic time update > On . World clock Select Menu > Applications > Cloc k . To view the time in differen t locations, open the world clock tab. To add location s to the list, select Op tions > Add location . You can add a maximum of 15 locations to the list. To set your current location, scro ll to a location, and select Options > Set as current location . The location is displayed in the clock main view, and the time in you r device is changed according to the selected location. Ensure that the t ime is correct and match es your time zone. Clock settings Select Options > S ettings . To change the t ime or date, select Time or Date . To change the clock shown on the home screen, select Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To allow the mobile phone network to update the time, date, and time zone informat ion to your device (network service), select Automatic time update > On . To change the alarm tone, select Clock alarm tone . Dictionary You can tran slate words from one langu age to another. Not all languages may be supported. Look up a word to translate 1. Select Menu > Office > Dictionary . 2. Enter text in the search field. As you enter text, suggestions of words to translate are displayed. 3. Select the word from the list. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Listen â Listen to the selected word. ⢠History â Find previously tr anslated words from the current session. ⢠Langua ges â Chan ge the source or target lan guage, download languages from th e internet, or remove a language from the dict ionary. You cannot remove t he English language from the dictionary. You ca n have two additional languages inst alled, besides English. ⢠Speech â Edit the voice feature settings. You can adjust the speed and volume of the voice. 89 Nokia Office Tools
Notes Select Menu > Office > Notes . You can create an d send notes to other compatible devices, and save received plai n text files (TXT file format) to Notes. To write a note, start en tering the text. The note editor opens automatically. To open a note, select Open . To send a note to othe r compatible devices, select Options > Send . To synchronise or to define synchronisation settings for a note, select Options > Synchronisation . Select Start to initialise synchronisation or Settings to define the synchronisation settings for the note. 90 Nokia Office Tools
Media Your device contains a va riety of media applicat ions for both business and leisure time use. Camera Activate the camera To activate the camera, select Menu > Media > Camera . Tip: You can also activate the camera by press ing and holding the capture key until the Camera application opens. Full focus Your device camera has a Full focus feature. Full focus enables you to capture images in which objects in both the foreground and back ground are in focus. Capture an image Select Menu > Media > Camera , or press the capture key to activate the camera. Your device supports an image capture resolution of 2048x1536 pixels. The image reso lution in this guide may appear different. To capture an image, use the display as a viewfinder, and press the capture key. The device saves the image in Gallery. To zoom in or out before ca pturing an image, use the zoom keys. The toolbar provides you with shortcuts to different ite ms and settings before an d after capturing an image or recording a video. Select to a toolbar item and press the scroll key. Switch to image mode. Switch to video mode. Select the scene. Switch the video light on or off (video mode only) Select the flash mode (images only). Activate the self-timer (images only). Activate sequen ce mode (images o nly). Select a colour tone. Adjust the white balance. Adjust the exposure compensation (image s only). The available option s vary depending on the capture mode and view you are in. The settings return to the default values when you close the camera. To customise the camera tool bar, switch to image mode, and select Options > Customise to olbar . 91 Media
To view the toolbar before and a fter capturing an image or recording a video, select Options > Show toolbar . To view the toolbar only when you need it, select Options > Hide toolbar . Scenes Select Menu > Media > Camera . A scene helps you to find the right colour and lighting settings for the current environment. The settin gs of each scene have been set accord ing to a certain style or environment. To change the scene, select Scene m odes from the toolbar. To make your own scene, scroll to User defined, and select Options > Change . To copy the settings of another scene, select Based on scene mode and the desired scene. To activate your own scene, select User defined > Select . Capture images in a sequence Select Menu > Media > Camera . To capture several images in a sequence, if enough memory is available, select Sequence mode fr om the toolbar and press the capture key. The captured images are show n in a grid on the display. To view an image, scroll to it and press the scroll key. If you used a time in terval, only the last image is shown on the display, and the other imag es are available in Gallery. To send the image, select Options > Send . To send the image to a caller durin g an active call, select Options > Send to caller . To deactivate sequence mode, select Sequence mode > Single shot in the toolbar. View captur ed image Select Menu > Media > Camera . The image you captured is au tomatically saved in Gallery. If you do not want to keep the image, select Delete from the toolbar. Select from the following toolbar items: ⢠Send â Send the image to compatible devices. ⢠Send to caller â Send the image to the caller during an active call. ⢠Post to â Send the image to your compatible online album (network service). To use the image as the background image, select Options > Set as wallpaper . To add the image to a contact, select Op tions > Assign to contact . Record videos Select Menu > Media > Camera . 1. If the camera is in image mode, select video mode fr om the toolbar. 2. To start recording, press the capture key. 92 Media
3. To pause recording, select Pause . Select Continue to resume recording. 4. To stop recording, select Stop . The video clip is automatically saved in Gall ery. The ma ximum length of the video clip depends on the available memory. Play a video clip Select Menu > Media > Camera . To play a recorded video clip, select Play from the toolbar. Select from the following toolbar items: ⢠Send â Send the video clip to other compatible devices. ⢠Send to caller â Send the video clip to the caller during an active call. ⢠Post to â Send the video clip to an online album (network service). ⢠Delete â Delete the video clip. To enter a new name for the video clip, select Opt ions > Rename video clip . Image settings Select Menu > Media > Camera . To change the still ima ge settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Image quality â Set the image quality. The better the image quality, the more me mory the image consumes. ⢠Show GPS info â To add the location information to the captured image, if the information is available, select On . ⢠Add to album â Define to which album t he captured images are saved. ⢠Show captured image â To see the image after the capture, select Yes . To continue capturing images immediately, select Of f . ⢠Default image name â Define the default name for the captured images. ⢠Extended digital z oom â The On (continuo us) option allows the zoom in crements to be smooth and continuous between the digi tal and extended digital zoom. The Off option allows a limited amount of zoom while retaining the image resolution. ⢠Capture tone â Set th e tone that sou nds when you capture an imag e. ⢠Memory in use â Choose where to store your images. ⢠Restore camer a settings â Restore the camera settings to the default values . Video settings Select Menu > Media > Camera . To change the video mode settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Video quality â Set the quality of the video clip. Select Sharing , if you want to send the video clip using a multimedia message. The cl ip is recorded with OCIF resolution, in the 3GPP fi le format, and the size is limited to 300 kB (approximately 20 seconds). You may not be able to send video clips saved in the MPEG-4 file format in a multimedia message. ⢠Show GPS info â To add the location information to the recorded video clip, if the information is available, select On . 93 Media
⢠Audio recording â Select Mute if you do not want to record sound. ⢠Add to album â Define to which album th e recorded videos are saved. ⢠Show captured vi deo â View the first frame of the recorded video clip after the recording stops. To view the entire video clip , select Play from the toolbar. ⢠Default video name â Define the default name for recorded video clips. ⢠Memory in use â Choose where to store your video clips. ⢠Restore camera se ttings â Restore the camera settings to the default values. Gallery About Gallery Select Menu > Media > Gallery . Gallery is a storage place for your images, video and sound clips, songs, a nd streaming links. Main view Select Menu > Media > Gallery . Select from the following: ⢠Images â View images and video clips in Photos. ⢠Video clips â View video clips in Video centre. ⢠Songs â Open Music player. ⢠Sound clips â Listen to sound clip s. ⢠Streaming links â View and open streaming links. ⢠Presenta tions â View presentations. You can browse and open fold ers and copy and move items to folders. You can also crea te albums and copy and add items t o albu ms. Files stored on your compatib le memory card (if inserted) are indicated with . To open a file, select the file from the list. Video clips and streaming links open and play in Video centre, and music and sound clips in Music player. To copy or move files to another memory location, select a file, Options > Move and copy , and the appro priate option. Sound clips Select Menu > Media > Gallery and Sound clips . This folder contains al l the sound clips you have downloaded from the web. The sound clips created with the Recorder application with MMS optimised or normal quality settings are also saved in this folder, but the sound clips created with high quali t y settings are stored in the Music player application. To listen to a sound file, select the file from the list. To rewind or fast-forward, scroll left or right. To download sounds, select Downl d. sounds . Streaming links Select Menu > Media > Gallery and Streaming links . To open a streaming link, sele ct the link from the list. 94 Media
To add a new streaming link, select Options > New link . Presentations Select Menu > Media > Gallery . With presentations, you can view scalable vector graphics (SVG) and flash file s (SWF), such as cartoons and maps. SVG images maintain their ap pearance wh en printed o r viewed with different screen sizes and resolutions. To view files, select Presentat ions . Go to an image, and select Options > Play . To pause playing, select Options > Pause . To zoom in, press 5 . To zoom out, press 0 . To rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise or anticlockwise, press 1 or 3 , respectively. To rotate the image 45 degrees, press 7 or 9 . To switch between full and normal screen mod e, press * . Photos About Photos Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Images and from the following: ⢠Captured â View all the images and videos you have captured. ⢠Months â View images and vi deos categorised by the month they where captured. ⢠Albums â View the default albums and the ones you have created. ⢠Tags â View the tags you ha ve created for each item. ⢠Downloads â View items and videos downloaded from the web or received as a multimedia or e-mail message. ⢠All â View all items. ⢠Share online â Post your images or videos to the web. Files stored on your compatible memory card (if inserted) are indicated with . To copy or move files to another memory location, select a file, Options > Move and copy , and from the available options. View images and videos Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Images and from the following: ⢠All â View all images and videos. ⢠Captured â View images captured and video clips recorded with the camera of your device. ⢠Downloads â View downloaded video clips. Images and video clips can also be sent to you from a compatible device. To be able to view a received image or video clip in Photos, you must first sa ve it. The images and video clip files are in a loop and ordered by date and time. The number of files is displayed. To browse the 95 Media
files one by one, scroll left or right. To browse files in groups, scroll up or down. To open a file, select the fi le. When an image opens, to zoom in the image, use the zoom keys. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently. To edit an image or a video clip, select Opt ions > Edit . To see where an image marked with was captured, select Options > Show on map . To print your images on a compatible printer, select Options > To printer or kiosk . To move images to an album for later printing, select Options > Add to album > Print la ter . View and edit file details Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Images . Go to an item. To view and edit image or video properties, select Options > Details > View and edit and from the following: ⢠Tags â View the currently us ed tags. To add more tags to the current file, select Add . ⢠Description â View a free-form description of the file. To add a description, select the field. ⢠Location â View GPS location information, if available. ⢠Title â View the thumbnail image of the file and the current file name. To edit th e file name, select the file name field. ⢠Albums â View in which albu ms the current file is located. ⢠Resolution â View the size of the image in pixels. ⢠Duration â View the length of the video. ⢠Usage rights â To view the DRM rights of the current file, select View . Organise images and videos Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Images . You can organise files as follows: To view items in the Tags view, add tags to the items. To view items by months, select Months . To create an album to st ore items, select Albums > Options > New album . To add an image o r a video clip to an album, select the item a nd Add to album from the active toolbar. To delete an image or vide o clip, select the item and Delete from the active toolbar. Active toolbar The active toolbar is availabl e only when you have selected an image or a video clip in a view. In the active toolbar, go to different items, and select the desired option. The available options vary depending on the view you are in and wh ether you have select ed an image or a video clip . To hide the toolbar, select Options > Hide toolbar . To activate the active toolbar when it is hidden, press the scroll key. Select an image or a video clip and from the following: 96 Media
View the image in la ndscape or portrait mode. Play the video clip. Send the image or video clip. Upload the image or video clip to a compatible online album (only ava ilable if you have set up an account for a compatible online album). Add the item to an album. Manage tags and othe r properties of the item. Albums Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Images an d Albums . With albums, y ou can conveniently m anage your images and video clips. To create a ne w album, select Options > New album . To add an image or a video clip to an album , select the item and Option s > Add to album . A list of album s opens. Select the albu m to which you want to ad d the image or video clip. The item you added to the album is still visible in Photos. To remove an image or a video clip from an album, select the album and the item, and Option s > Remove from album . Tags Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Images . Use tags to categorise media i t ems in Photos. You can create and delete tag s in Tag manager. Tag manager shows the currently used tag s and the number of items associated with each tag. To open Tag manager, select an image or video clip and Options > Details > Tag manager . To create a tag, select Options > New t ag . To assign a tag t o an image, select the image and Options > Add tags . To see the tags you have created, select Tags . The size of the tag name corresponds t o the number of items the tag is assigned to. To view all the imag es associated wit h a tag, select the t ag from the list. To view the list in alphabetical order, select Options > Alphabetical . To view the list in most fr equently used order, select Options > Most used . To remove an image from a tag, select the tag and the image, and select Options > Remove fro m tag . Slide show Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Im ages . To view your imag es as a slide s how, select an imag e and Options > Slide show > Play forwards or Play backwards . The slide show starts from the selected file. To view only the selected im ages as a slide show, se lect Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to mark images. To start the slide sh ow, select Options > Slide show > Play forwards or Play backwards . To resume a pause d slide show, select Co ntinue . 97 Media
To end the slide show, select En d . To browse the images, scroll left or right. Before starting th e slide sh ow, to adjust the slide show settings, select Options > Slide show > Settings and from the following: ⢠Music â Add sound to the slide show. ⢠Song â Select a music file from the list. ⢠Delay between slides â Adjust the tempo of the slide show. ⢠Transition â Make the slide show move smoothly from one slide to another, and zoom in and out in the images randomly. To adjust the volume duri ng the slide show, use the volume key. Edit images Image editor To edit the pictures after taki ng them or the ones already saved in Photos, select Options > Edit . The image editor opens. To open a grid where you can select different edit options indicated by small icons, select Options > A pply effect . You can crop and rotate the image; adjust the brightness, colour, contrast, and resolution ; and add effects, text, clip art, or a frame to the pict ure. Crop image To crop an image, select Options > A pply effect > Crop , and a predefined as pect r atio from the list. To crop the image size manually, select Manual . If you select Manual , a cross appear s in the upper left corner of the image. Use the scroll key to select the area to crop, and select Set . Another cross appears in the lower right corner. Again se l e c t t h e a r e a t o b e c r o p p e d . T o a d j u s t the first selected area, s elect Back . The selected areas form a rectangle that forms the cropped image. If you select a predefined aspe ct ratio, select the upper left corner of the area to be cropp ed. To resize the highlight ed area, use the scroll key. To fr eeze the selected area, press the scroll key. To move the area within the picture, use the scroll key. To select the area to be cropped, press the scroll key. Reduce re d-eye To reduce red-eye in an image, select Options > A pply effect > Red eye reduction . Move the cross onto the eye, and press the scroll key. A loop appears on the display . To resize the loop to fit the size of the eye, use the scro ll key. To reduce the redness, press the scroll key. When you have finished editing the image, press Done . To save the changes and return to the previous view, press Back . Useful shortcuts You can use th e following shor tcuts when editing images: ⢠To view a full-screen image, press * . To return to the normal view, press * ag ain. ⢠To rotate an image clockwise or counterclockwise, press 3 or 1 . ⢠To zoom in or out, press 5 or 0 . 98 Media
⢠To move on a zoomed imag e, scroll up, down, left, or right. Edit videos The video editor supports .3gp and .mp4 video file formats, and .aac, .am r, .mp3, and .wav audio file fo rmats. It does not necessa rily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. To edit video clips in Photos , scroll to a video clip, select Options > Ed it , and from the following: ⢠Merge â to add an image or a video clip to the beginning or the end of the selected video clip ⢠Change sound â to add a new so und clip, and to replace the original so und in the video clip. ⢠Add text â to add text to the beginning or the en d of the video clip ⢠Cut â to trim the video and mark the sections yo u want to keep in the video clip To take a snapshot of a vide o clip, in the cut video view, select Option s > Take snap shot . In the thumbnail preview view, press the scroll key, and select Take snapshot . Print images Image print To print images with Imag e print, select the image you want to print, and the p rin t option in Photos, camera, image editor, or image viewer. Use Image print to print your images using a compatible USB data cable, or Blue tooth connectivity. You can also print images using wi reless LAN. If a compatible memory card is inserted, you can store the images to the memory card, and print them using a compati ble printer. You can only prin t images that are in .jp eg format. The pictures taken w ith the camera ar e automatic ally saved in .jpeg format. Printer selection To print images with Ima ge pr int, select the i mage and the print option. When you use Image print for the first time, a list of available compatible printers is displayed. Select a printer. The printer is set as the default p rinter. To use a printer compatible with PictB ridge, connect the compatible data cable before you select the print option, and check that the data cable mode is se t to Image print or Ask on connection . The printer is automatica lly displayed when you select t he print option. If the default printer is not av ailable, a list of available printers is displayed. To change the default printer, select Option s > Settings > Default prin ter . Print preview After you select the printer, the selected images are displayed using predefined layouts. To change the layout, scroll left or right to browse through the available layouts for the se lected printer. If the images do not fit on a single page, sc roll up or down to display the additional pages. 99 Media
Print settings The available options v ary de pending on the capabilities of the printing device you selected. To set a defaul t printe r, select Options > Default printer . To select the paper size, select Paper size , the size of paper from the list, and OK . Select Cancel to return to the previous view. Share online About Share online Select Menu > Media > Share online . With Share online (network service), you can post your images, video clips, and sound clips from your dev ice to compatible online sharing services, such as al bums and blogs. You can also view and send comments to the pos ts in these services, and download content to your compatible Nokia device. The supported content types an d the availability of the Share online service may vary. Subscribe to services Select Menu > Media > Share online . To subscribe to an on line sharing service, go to the service provider's website, and check that your Nokia device is compatible with the service. Crea te an account as instructed on the website. You receive a user name and password needed to set up your device with th e account. 1. To activate a service, open the Share online application in your device, select a service and Options > Activate . 2. Allow the dev ice to create a network connect ion. If you are prompted for an internet access point, select one from the list. 3. Sign in to your account as instructed on the service providerâÂÂs website. For the availability a nd cost of the third party se rvices and data transfer costs, contact your se rvice provider or the relevant third party. Manage yo ur acco unts To view your accounts, select Opt ions > Settings > My accounts . To create a new account, select Options > Add new account . To change your user name or password for an account, select the account and Options > Open . To set the account as the default when sending posts from your device, select Options > Set as default . To remove an account, select the account and Options > Delete . Create a post Select Menu > Media > Share online . To post media files to a service, go to a service, and select Options > New upload . If the online sharing service 100 Media
provides channels for postin g files, select the desired channel. To add an image, video clip, or sound clip to the post, select Options > Insert . Enter a title or description for the post, if available. To add tags to the post, select Tags: . To enable the posting of lo cation information contained in the file, select Locat ion: . To send the post to the service, select Options > Upload . Post files from Photos You can post your files from Photos to an online sharing service. 1. Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Im ages and the files you want to post. 2. Select Options > Send > Upload and the desired account. 3. Edit your post as required. 4. Select Options > Upload . One-click upload One-click upload lets you post images to an online sharing service immediately af ter capturing th em. To use one-click upload, capture an image with your device camera, and select the online sharing icon from the toolbar. Tag list Select Menu > Media > Share online . Tags describe the content of the post, and help viewers find content in the online sharing services. To view the list of availabl e tags when creating a post, select Tags: . To add tags to your post, select a tag from the list and Done . To add several t ags to the post, select each tag and Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark . To search for tags, enter the search text in the search field. To add a tag to the tag list, select Options > New tag . Manage posts in Outbox Select Menu > Media > Share online . Outbox shows the posts you are currently uploading , posts that have failed to upload, and the p osts you have sent. To open Outbox, select Outbo x > Optio ns > Open . To start uploadin g a post, select the post and Option s > Upload now . To cancel uploa ding a post, select th e post and Options > Cancel . To delete a post, select the post and Op tions > Delete . View service content Select Menu > Media > Share online . 101 Media
To view the content of a serv ice, select the service and Options > Open . To open a feed, select the f eed. To open the feed in the browser, select the service provider's website. To view comments related to a file, select the file and Options > View comments . To view a file in full scre en mode, select the file. To update a feed, select the feed and Options > Update now . If you see an interestin g file and want to download the entire feed to your device, select the file and Options > Subscribe to contact . Service provider settings Select Menu > Media > Share online . To view the list of service providers, select Options > Settings > Service provide rs . To check the details of a service, select th e service from the list. To delete the selected service, select Option s > Delet e . Edit account settings Select Menu > Media > Share online . To edit your accounts, select Options > Settings > My accounts and an account. To change the user name for the account, select User name . To change the password for an account, s elect Password . To change the account name, select Account name . To determine the size for images that you p ost, select Upload image size > Original , Medium (1024 x 768 pixels), or Small (640 x 480 pixels). Edit advanced settings Select Menu > Media > Share online . To edit the advanced settings, se lect Opti ons > Settings > Advanced . To only use a wireless LAN (WLAN) connection for sharing, select Use cellu lar > Disabled . To also a llow a packet data connection, select Enabled . To allow sharing and downlo ading items while outside your home network, select Allow roaming > Enabled . To download new items from the s ervice automatically, select Download interval and the interval for the downloads. To download items manually, select Manual . Data counters Select Menu > Media > Share online . To check the amount of da ta you have uploaded and downloaded, select Optio ns > Settings > Data transferred . To reset the counters, select Optio ns > Clear sent , Cle ar receive d , or Clear all . 102 Media
Nokia Video Centre With Nokia Video Centre (network service), you can download and stream video c lips over the air from compatible internet video se rvices using a packet data or wireless LAN (WLAN) c onnection. You ca n also transfer video clips from a compatible PC to your device and view them in Video centre. Using packet data access p oints to download videos ma y involve the transmission of la rge amounts of da ta through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission cha rges. Your device may have predefined services. Service providers may provide free content or charge a fee. Check the pricing in the service or from the service provider. View and download video clips Connect to video services 1. Select Menu > Media > Video centre . 2. To connect to a service to install video services, select Add new servic es and the desired video service from the service catalogue. View a video clip To browse the content o f in stalled video services, select Video feeds . The content of some video services is divided into categories. To browse video clips, select a category. To search for a video clip in the service, select Video search . Search may not be availa ble in all services. Some video clips can be stream ed over the air, but others must be first downloaded to your device. To download a video clip, select Options > Download . Downloads continue in the background if you exit the application. The downloaded video clips are saved in My videos. To stream a video clip or view a downloaded one, select Options > Play . When the video clip is playing, use the selection keys and the scroll key to control the player. To adjust the volume, use the volume key. Warning: Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Listen to mus ic at a moderate level, and do not hold t he device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Resume download â Resume a paused or failed download. ⢠Cancel download â Cancel a download. ⢠Preview â P review a video clip. This option is available if supported by the serv ice. ⢠Video details â View information about a v ideo clip. ⢠Refresh list â Refresh the list of video clips. ⢠Open link in b rowser â Open a link in the web browser. Schedule downloads Setting the app lication to download video clips automatically may involve the tran smission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For information about data transmission charg es, contact your service provider. To schedule an automatic download 103 Media
for video clips in a service, select Opti ons > Schedule downloads . Video centre automatically downloads new video clips daily at the time you define. To cancel scheduled downloads, select Manual downl oad as the download met hod. Video feeds Select Menu > Media > Video c entre . The content of the installed vi deo services is distributed using RSS feeds. T o view and mana ge your feeds, select Video feeds . Select Options and from the following: ⢠Feed subscripti ons â Chec k your current feed subscriptions. ⢠Feed details â View information about a video. ⢠Add feed â Subscribe to new feeds. Select Via Video directory to select a feed from the services in the video directory. ⢠Refresh feeds â Refresh the content of all feeds. ⢠Manage account â Manage your account options for a particular feed, if available. ⢠Move â Move video clips to a desired location. To view the videos available in a feed, select a feed from the list. My videos My videos is a storage place fo r all video clips in the Video centre application. You can li st downloaded video clips and video clips recorded with the device camera in separate views. 1. To open a folder and view video clips, us e the scroll key. To control the video player when the video clip is playing, use the scroll key and the selection keys. 2. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Resume download â Resume a paused or failed download. ⢠Cancel download â Cancel a download. ⢠Video details â View information about a video clip. ⢠Find â Find a video clip. Enter a search term that matches the file name. ⢠Show via home network â P lay a download ed video clip in a compatible home network. The home network must be configured first . ⢠Memory status â View the amount of free and used memory. ⢠Sort by â S o r t v i d e o c l i p s . S e l e c t t h e d e s i r e d c a t e g o r y . ⢠Move and copy â Move or copy video clips. Select Copy or Move and the desired location. Transfer videos from your PC Transfer your own video clips to Video centre from compatible devices using a compatible USB data ca ble. Video centre displays only th e video c lips w hich ar e in a format supported by your device. 1. To view your device on a PC as a mass memory device where you can transfer any da ta files, make the connection with a USB da ta cable. 2. Select Mass storage as the connection mode. A compatible memory card need s to be inserted in the device. 104 Media
3. Select the video clips you wa nt t o copy from your PC. 4. Transfer the video clips to E:\My Vi deos in the memory card. The transferred video clips appear in the My videos folder in Video centre. Video files in other folders of your device are not displayed. Video centre settings In the Video centre main view, select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Video service selection â Select the video services that you want to appea r in Video centre. You can a lso add, remove, edit, and view the details of a vi deo service. You cannot edit preinstalled video services. ⢠Connectio n settings â To defin e the network destination used for the network connection, select Network connection . To select the connection manually each time Vide o ce ntre ope ns a network connection, select Always ask . To set GPRS connection on or off, select Confirm GPRS usage . To set roaming on or off, select Confirm roami ng . ⢠Parental control â S et an age limit to videos . The required password is the same as the device lock code. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . In video- on-demand services, videos which have the same or a higher age limit than you have set, are hidden. ⢠Preferred memory â Select whether downloaded videos are saved in the device memory or on a compatible memory card. ⢠Thumbnails â Select whether to download and view thumbnail images in video feeds. Music player Select Menu > Media > Music player . Music playe r supports files formats such as AAC, AAC , eAAC , MP3, and WMA. Music player does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. You can transfer music from other compatible devices to your device. See "Transfer music from PC" , p . 106 . Play a song To add all available songs to the music library, select Options > Refresh library . To play a song, selec t the de sired category, and the song. To pause playback, press the scroll key; t o resume, press the scroll key again. To s top playback, scroll down. To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold the scroll key to the right or left. To skip to the next item, scroll right. To return to the beginning of the item, scroll left. To skip t o the previous item, scroll left again within 2 s econds after a song has started. To modify the tone of the music playba ck, select Options > Equaliser . To modify the balance and ster eo image, o r to enhance the bass, select Options > Sett ings . 105 Media
To return to the home screen and leave the player playing in the background, press the end key. Playlists To view and manag e playlists, select Music player > Playlists . To create a new playlist , select Opti ons > New playlist . To add songs to the playlist , select the song and Op tions > Add to playlist > Saved playlist or New playlist . To reorder songs in a playlist, scroll to the song you want to move, and select Options > Reorder playlist . About Ovi Music With Ovi Music, you can pu rchase and download songs to your device and your computer, a nd copy the songs between the two. To manage your music collection and downloads, you can install Ov i Player on your compatible PC, or use your internet browser to download music. To start discovering music, select Menu > Media > Ovi Music or go to www.ovi.com. Transfer music from PC 1. Ensure that a compatible memory card i s inserted in the device. 2. Connect your device to the PC using B luetooth connectivity or a compat ible USB data cable. If you are using a USB data cable, connect it first to your device, and then to t he computer . 3. If you are using a U S B data cable, select Media transfer as the connection mode. If you select Media transfer as the connection mode, you can use Windows Media Play er to synchronise music between your device and PC. Preset frequency settings Select Menu > Media > Music player and Opt ions > Go to Now pl aying > Options > Equaliser . To use a preset frequency setting when playing music, select the frequency s etting you want to use and Options > Activate . To modify the frequency of a preset setting, select Options > Edit and a frequency b and, and scroll up or down to adjust its value. You hear your frequency adjustment immediately in the pla yback. To reset the fr equency bands to their original values, select Options > Reset to defaults . To create your own frequ ency setting, select Options > New pres et . Enter a name for the frequency setting. Scroll up or down to move between the frequency bands, and set the frequency for each band. RealPlayer Select Menu > Media > RealPlayer . RealPlayer plays video and s ound clips that are st ored on your device, transferred from an e-mail message, or a compatible computer, or stream ed to your device over the web. Supported file formats include MPEG-4, MP4 (not 106 Media
streaming), 3GP, RV, RA, AMR, and Midi. RealPlayer does not necessaril y suppor t all variat ions of a media file format. Play video clips and stream links To play a video clip, select Video clips and a clip. To list recently played files, in the application main view, select Recently played . To stream content over the air (network service), select Streaming links and a link. RealPlayer recognises two kinds of links: an rt sp:// URL and an http:// URL that points to a RAM file. Before the co ntent begin s streaming, you r device must connect to a websit e and buffer the content. If a network connection prob lem causes a playback er ror, RealPlayer attempts au tomatically to reconnect to the internet access point. To download video clips from the web, select Downld. videos . To adjust the volume during playback, use the volume keys. To fast-forward during playback, scroll right and hold. To rewind during play, scroll left and hold. To stop the playback or streaming, select Stop . Buffering or the connection to the stre aming site stops, the playback of the clip stops, and the clip rewinds to the beginning. To view the video clip in normal screen mode, select Options > Continue in normal scr. . View information about a media clip To view the properties of a video or sound clip, or web link, select Optio ns > Clip det ails . Informat ion may includ e for example the bit rate or the internet link of a streaming file. RealPlayer settings Select Menu > Media > RealPlayer . You may receive RealPlayer settings in a message from your service provider. To define the settings manually, select Options > Settings > Video or Streaming . Recorder Select Menu > Media > Recorder . With the Recorder application, you can record voice memos and telephone con versations. The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active. To record a sound clip, select . To stop recordin g a sound cl ip, sel ect . To listen to the sound clip , select . To select the recording qualit y or where you want to save your sound clips, sele ct Option s > Settings . 107 Media
Recorded sound clips are saved in the Sound clips folder in Gallery. To record a telephone conver sation, open recorder during a voice call, and select . Both parties hear a tone at regular intervals during recording. Flash player With Flash player, you can view, play, and intera ct with flash files made for mobile devices. To open Flash player and play a flash file, select the file. To send a flash file to compatible devices, select Opti ons > Send . Copyright protection ma y prevent the sending of some flash files. To switch between flash file s saved in the device memory or on the memory card, scro ll to the corresponding tabs. To change the flash fi le quality, select Options > Quality when you are play ing the flash file. If you select High , the playback of some flash files may appea r uneven and slow due to their original settings . Change the quality setting of such files to Normal or Low for improved playback. To organise your flash files, select Options > Organise . FM radio The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenn a. A compatible heads et or accessory needs to be attached to th e device for the FM radio to function properly. Select Menu > Media > Radio > FM radio . The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. Listen to the radio Select Menu > Media > Radio > FM radio . The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. You can make a call or answer an incoming call while listening to the radio. The ra dio is muted when there is an active call. To start a station s earch, select or . If you have saved radio stations in your devi ce, to go to the next or previous saved station, select or . Select Options and from the following: ⢠Activate loudspe aker â L i s t e n t o t h e r a d i o u s i ng t h e loudspeaker. ⢠Manual tuning â Change the frequency manually. ⢠Station dire ctory â View ava ilable stations based on location (network service). ⢠Save station â Save the station to which you are currently tuned to your station list. ⢠Stations â Open the list of your save d stations. ⢠Play in background â Return to the home screen while listening to the FM radio in the background. Saved stations Select Menu > Media > Radio > FM radio . To open the list of your saved stations, select Options > Stations . 108 Media
To listen to a saved sta tion, select Options > Station > Listen . To change station details, select Op tions > Station > Edit . FM radio settings Select Menu > Media > Radio > FM radio . To automatically search for al ternative frequencies if the reception is weak, select Options > Settings > Alternative f requencies > Auto scan on . To set the default access point for the radio, select Options > Se ttings > Access po int . To select the region where you currently are, select Options > Se ttings > Current region . This setting is displayed only if there is no network coverage when you start the application. Nokia Internet Radio Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio . With the Nokia I nternet Radio application (network service), you can listen to ava ilable radio stations on the internet. To listen to rad io stations, you must have a wireless LAN (WLAN) or pa ck et data access point defined in your device. Listening t o the stations may involve the transmission of large amounts of da ta through your service provider's network. The recommended connection method is WLAN. Check with your service provider for terms and data service f ees before using other connections. For example, a flat rate data plan can allow large data transfers for a set monthly fee. Listen to internet radio stations Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio . To listen to a radi o station on the i nternet, do the following: 1. Select a station from your favourites or the station directory, or search for stations by name from the Nokia Internet Radio service. To add a station man ually, select Options > Add station manually . You can also browse for station links with the Web browser ap plication. Compatible links are automatically open ed in the Internet Radio application. 2. Select Options > Listen . The Now playing view opens, displaying informat ion about the currently playing station and song. To pause the playback, press the scroll key; to resume, press the scroll key again. To view station in formation, select Optio ns > Statio n information (not available if you have saved the station manually). If you are listening to a station saved in your favourites, scroll left or right to listen to the previous or next saved station. 109 Media
Favourite stations Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio . To view and listen to your favourite stations, select Favourites . To add a stat ion manually to favourites, select Options > Add station manually . Enter the web address of the station and a name th at you want to ap pear in the favourites list. To add the currently pl aying station to favourites , select Options > Add to Favourit es . To view station information, to move a station up or down in the list, or to delete a station from favourites, select Options > Station and the desired option. To view only stations beginning wi th particular letters or numbers, start entering the characters. Matching s tations are displayed. Search for stations Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio . To search for radio stations in the Nokia Internet Radio service by name, do the following: 1. Select Search . 2. Enter a station name or the first letters of the name in the search field, and select Search . Matching stations are displayed. To listen to a station, select the station a nd Listen . To save a sta tion to your favou rites, select the station and Options > Add to Favourit es . To make another search, select Options > Search again . Station directory Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio and Station dire ctory . The station directory is mainta ined by Nokia. If you want to listen to internet radio stations outside the directory, add station information manu ally or browse for station links on the internet with the Web browser application. Select from the following: ⢠Browse by genre â View the availab le radio station genres. ⢠Browse by language â View the la nguages in which there are stations broa dcasting. ⢠Browse by cou ntry/region â View the countries in which there are station s broadcasting. ⢠Top stations â View the most popular stations in the directory. Internet radio settings Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio and Options > Settings . To select the default access poin t to connect to the network, select Default access point and from the available options. If you want the device to ask you t o select the access point every time you open the application, select Always ask . To change the connection speeds for different connection types, select from the following: 110 Media
⢠GPRS connection bitrate â GPRS packet data connections ⢠3G conne ction bit rate â 3 G p a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n s ⢠Wi-Fi connecti on bitrate â WLAN connections The quality of the radio broa dcast depends on the selected connection speed. The higher the speed, the better the quality. To avoid buffering, use the highest quality only with high speed connections. 111 Media
Connectivity Your device offers several options to connect to the internet, a corporate intranet, another mobile device, or a computer. Fast packet data High-speed packet access (HSPA, also called 3.5G, indicated with ) is a network service in UMTS networks and provides high-speed data downloads and uplo ads. When HSPA support in the device is activated and the device i s connected to a UMTS network t hat supports HSPA, downloading and uploading da ta such as e-mail and browse r pages throu gh the cellu lar network may be faster. An active HSPA connection is indicated with . The icon may vary between regions. To activate HS PA, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > Packet data > Hi gh speed packet access . Some cellular networks do not allow incoming voice calls when HSPA is active, in which case you need to deactivate HSPA to receive calls. For more information, contact your service provider. For availability and subscription to data connection services, contact your service provider. Data cable To avoid corrupting data, do not disconnect the USB data cable during data tran sfer. Transfer data between your device and a PC 1. Insert a memory card in your device, and connect the device to a compatible PC with the data cable. 2. When the device asks wh ich mode to use, select Mass storage . In this mode, you can see your device as a removable hard drive in your computer. 3. End the connection from the computer (from the Unplug or Eject Hardware wizard in Microsoft Windows, for example) to avo id damaging th e memory card. To use Nokia PC Suite with your device, install Nokia PC Suite on your PC, connect th e data cable, and select PC Suite . To use your device to connect your PC to the web, connect the data cable, and select Conne ct PC to web . To synchronise the music in your device with Nokia Music Player, install the N okia Music Player software on you r PC, connect the data cable, and se lect PC Suit e . To print images on a compatible printer, select Image transfer . To change the USB mode you no rmally use with the data cable, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > USB and USB connection mode , and the desired option. To set the device to ask for the mode each time you connect the data cable t o the device, select Menu > Ct rl. panel > Connectivity > USB and Ask on connection > Yes . 112 Connectivity
Bluetooth Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Bluetooth . About Bluetooth Bluetooth technolog y in your device enables wireles s connections between electronic devices within a range of 10 metres (33 feet). A Bluetooth connection can be used to send images, videos, text, bu siness cards, calendar notes, or to connect wire lessly to devices that use Bluetooth technology . Since devices using Bluetooth technology communicate using radio waves, your devi c e and the other devices do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. The two devices only need to be within a maximum of 10 metres of each other, although the connection can be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or other electronic devices. Several Bluetooth connections can be active at a time. For example, if your device is connected to a headset, you can also transfer files to another compatible device a t the same time. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 EDR supporting the following profiles: Advanc ed Audio Distribution, Audio Video Remo te Control, Basic Imaging, Basic Printi ng, Dial- up Networ king, File Transfer, Generic Access, Hands-free , Headset, Human Inte rface Device, Local Positioning, Obj ect Push, Phone Book Access, SIM Access, Serial Port, Video Distribution. To ensure interoperability between other devices supporting Bluetooth technolog y, use Noki a appro ved accessories for this model. Check with the ma nufacturers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this device. Features using Bluetooth tech nology increa se the deman d on battery power and reduce the battery life. Send and receive data with Bluetooth Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Bluetooth . 1. When yo u activate Blu etooth connect ivity for the firs t time, you ar e asked to na me your device. Give your device a unique name to ma ke it easy to recognise if there are several Blue tooth devices nearby. 2. Select Bluetoot h > On . 3. Select My phone's visibility > Shown to all or Define period . If you select Def ine period , you need to define the time during which your device is visible to others. Your dev ice and the name you entered can now be seen by other us ers with devices using Bluetooth tech nology. 4. Open the application where the item you want to send is stored. 5. Select the item and Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . The device searches for other devices using Bluetooth tech nology within range and lis ts them. Tip: If you have sent data us ing Bluetooth connectivity before, a li st of the previous search results is displayed. To se arch for more Bluetooth devices, select More devices . 113 Connectivity
6. Select the device with wh ich you want to connect . If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, you are asked to enter a passcode. When the connection has been establis hed, Sending data is displayed. The Sent folder in the Messa ging application does not store messages sent using Bluetooth connectivity. To receive data using Bluetooth connectivity, select Bluetooth > On and My phone's vi sibility > Sho wn to all to receive data from a non-paired device or Hidden to receive data from a paired de vice only. When you receive data through Blue tooth connectivity, depending on the settings of an a ctive profile, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you wan t to accept th e message in which the data is included. If you accept, the mess age is placed in the Inbox folder in the Messaging application. Tip: You can access the files in the device or on the memory card using a compat ible accessory that supports the File Transfer Profile Client service (for example, a laptop computer). A Bluetooth connection is disconnected au tomatically after sending or receiving da ta. Only Nokia PC Suite and some accessories such as headsets may mainta in a connection even if not actively used. Pair devices Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Bluetooth . Open the paired devices tab. Before pairing, decide on yo ur own passcode (1-16 digits), and agree with the user of th e other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user i n terface have a fixed passcode. You need the passc ode only when you connect the devices for the first time. Af ter pairing, it is possible to authorise the connection. Pa iring and authorising the connection makes connecti ng quicker and easier, as you do not have to accept th e connection between paired devices every time you establish a connection. The passcode for remote SIM access must have 16 digits. In remote SIM mode you can use your device's S IM card with compatible accessories. When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compatible conn ected accessory, such as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not ma ke any calls, except to the emergency numbers programmed into your device, while in this m ode. To make calls, you must fi rst leave the remote SIM mode. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code to unlock it first. 1. Select Options > New paired devi ce . The device starts to search for Bluetooth dev ices within range. If you have sent data using Bluetooth connectivit y before, a list of the previous sear ch results is displayed. To search for more Bluetooth devices, select More devices . 2. Select the device with which you wa nt to pair, and enter the passcode. The same passcode must be entered in the other device as well. 3. To make the connection be tween your device and the other device automatic, select Yes . To confirm the connection manually every ti me a connection attempt 114 Connectivity
is made, select No . After pairing, the device is saved to the paired devices page. To give a nickname to the paired device, select Options > Assign short name . Th e nickname is displayed in your device. To delete a pairing, select the device whose pairing you want to delete and Options > Dele te . To delete all pairings, select Options > Delete all . If you are curren tly connected to a device an d cancel the pairing with that device, pairing is remove d immediately, and the connection is ended. To allow a paired device to connect automatically to your device, select Set as authorised . Connections between your device and the other device can be made without your knowledge. No separate acceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status only for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or computer, or devices that belong to someone you trust. If you want to accept connection requests from the other device separately every time, select Set as unauthorised . To use a Bluetooth audio accessory, such as a Bluetooth handsfree or headset, you need to pair your device with the accessory. For the pass co de and further instructions, see the accessory user guide. To connect to the audio accessory, switch on th e accessory. Some audio accessories connect automatically to your device. Otherwise, open th e paired devices tab, and select the accessory and Options > Connect to audio device . Block devices Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Bluetooth . 1. To block a device from establishing a Bluetooth connection to your device, open the paired devices tab. 2. Select a device you want to block and Options > Block . To allow the pair ing of a device again after it was blocked, delete it from the blocked devices list. Open the blocked devices tab, and select Options > Delete . If you reject a pairing reques t from another device, you are asked if you want to block all fu ture connection requests from this device. If you accept the query, the remote device is added to the list of blocked devices. Security tips Operating th e device in hi dden mode is a safer way to avoid malicious software. Do not accept Bluetooth connectivity from sources you do not trust. Alternatively, switch off the Bluetoot h function. T his does not affect other functions of the device. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Bluetooth . When you are not u sing Bluetooth connectivi ty, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's vi sibility > Hidden . Do not pair wi th an unknown dev ice. SIM access profile With the SIM access profile, yo u can access the SIM card of your device from a compatible car kit device. This way, you 115 Connectivity
do not need a separate SIM card to access SIM card data and connect to the GSM network. To use the SIM access profil e, you need the following: ⢠Compatible car kit device that supp orts Bluetooth wireless technology ⢠Valid SIM card in your device When the wireless device is in the remote SIM m ode, you can only use a compatible conn ected accessory, such as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not ma ke any calls, except to the emergency numbers programmed into your device, while in this mode. To make calls, you must firs t leave the remote SIM mode . If the device has been locked, enter the lock code to unlock it first. For more information about car kit devices and compatibility wi th your device, see the Nokia web site and your car kit user guide. Use the SIM access profile 1. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Conne ctivity > Blueto oth and Remote SIM mode > On . 2. Activate Blu etooth connec tivity in the car kit. 3. Use your car kit to start a search for compatible devices. For instructions, see the us er guide of your car kit. 4. Select your device from th e list of compatible devices. 5. To pair the devices, enter the Bluetooth p asscode shown on the display of th e car kit to your device. Tip: If you have a lready ac cessed the SIM c ard from the car kit with the active u ser profile, the car kit searches autom atically for a device with the SIM card. If it finds your dev ice, and automatic authorisation is activ ated, the car kit automatically connects to the GSM netw ork when you switch on the car ignition. When you activate the remote S IM access profile, you can use applications on your device that do not n eed network or SIM services. To make connections between your d evice and the car kit without separa te acceptance or authorisation, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Bluetoot h , and open the paired devices ta b. Select the car kit and Set as authorised , and answer Ye s to the confirmation query. If the car kit i s set as unauth orised, c onnection requests from it must be accepted separately every time. To end the remote SIM access co nnection from your device, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Bluet ooth and Remote SIM mode > Off . Wireless LAN About WLAN Your device can detect and connect to wireless local area networks (WLA N). Using a WLAN, you can connect your device to the intern et and compatible dev ices that suppo rt WLAN. To use a WLAN connection , you need the following: ⢠WLAN must be available in your location. ⢠Your device must be connected to the WLAN. Some WLANs are protected, and you need an access key from the service provider to connect to them. 116 Connectivity
⢠An internet access point created for WLA N. Use the access point for applications that need to connec t to the internet. A WLAN connection is establ ished when you create a data connection using a WLAN intern et access point. The active WLAN connection ends when you end the data connection. You can use WLAN during a v oice call or when packet data is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several applications can use the same access point. Features that use WLAN, or that are allowed to run in the background while using othe r features, increase the demand on battery power an d reduce the battery life. Your device supports the following WLAN features: ⢠IEEE 802.11b/g standard ⢠Operation at 2.4 GHz ⢠WEP, WPA/WPA2, and 802.1x authentication methods. These function s can be used only if they are supported by the network. Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to incr ease the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encryption reduces the risk of unauthorised a ccess to your data. When the device is in the offline profile, you can still use WLAN, if available. Remem ber to comply with any applicable safety requiremen ts when establishing and using a WLAN connection. Tip: To check the unique media access contro l (MAC) address that identifies your device, enter *#62209526# in the ho me screen. Note: Using WLAN may be restricted in some countries. For example, in Fr ance, you are only allowed to use WLAN indoors. For more information, contact your local authorities. See WLAN availability To set your device to show wireless LAN (WLAN) availability, select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Settings and Connection > Wireless LAN > Show W LAN availability . If a WLAN is av ailable, is displayed. WLAN wizard Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > WLAN wiz. . The WLAN wizard helps you find and connect to a wireless LAN (WLAN). When you open the application, your device starts to scan for available WLANs an d lists them. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Refresh â Update the list of available WLANs. ⢠Filter WLAN netwo rks â Filter out WLANs in the list of found networks. The sele cted networks are filtered out the next time the ap plication searches for WLANs. ⢠Start web browsi ng â Start browsing the web using the access point of the WLAN . ⢠Cont.web browsing â Continue web browsi ng using the currently active WLAN conn ection. ⢠Disconnect WLAN â Disconnect the active connection to the WLAN. ⢠Details â View the details of the WLAN. 117 Connectivity
Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase the security of your wireless LAN conne ction. Using encrypt ion reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data. Use the WLAN wizard in the home screen In the home screen, the WLAN wizard shows the status of your WLAN connections and ne twork searches. If the WLAN wizard is not activated by default in the home screen, you can activate it in t he home screen settings. To view th e available options, select the row showing the status. Depending on the stat us, you can start the web browser using a WLAN conn ection, connect to your net call service, discon nect from a WLAN, sea r ch for WLANs, or enable or disable network scanning. If WLAN scanning is disa bled, and you are not connected to any WLAN, WLAN scanning off is displayed in the home screen. To enab le WLAN scanning, and to search for available WLANs, select the row showing the s tatus. To start a sea rch for available WLANs, select the row showing the status and Search for W LAN . To disable WLAN scanning, select the row showing the status and Switch WLAN scan off . When Start web browsing or Use for is selected, the WLAN wizard a utomatically crea tes an access point for the selected WLAN. The access point can also be used with other applications requiring WLAN connection. If you select a secured WL AN, you are asked to ente r the relevant passcodes. To connect to a hidden netw ork, you must enter the correct service set identifier (SSID). To use the foun d WLAN for a ne t call connection, select the row showing the status, Use for , the desired net call service, and the WLAN to be used. Connection manager Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connec tivity > Conn. mgr. . View and end active connections Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connec tivity > Conn. mgr. . To see the open data connections, select Active d ata connections . To view detailed information about network connections, select a connection from the lis t and Option s > Details . The type of information shown depends on the connection type. To end the selected netw ork connection, select Options > Disconnect . To end all activ e network connection s simultaneously, select Options > Disconnect all . Search for WLAN To search for WLANs availa ble within range, select Available WLAN networks . The availa ble WLANs are listed with their network mode (infrast ructure or ad-hoc), signal strength, a nd network encryption indica tors, and 118 Connectivity
whether your device has an ac tive connection with the network. To view the details of a network, scroll to it, and press t he scroll key. To create an internet access point for a network, select Options > Define access point . 119 Connectivity
Security and data management Manage the data an d software on your device, and take care of the security of th e device and its contents. Important: Your device can only support one antivirus applicat ion. Having more than one application with antiviru s functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functioning. Lock the device The lock code protects your device again st unauthorised use. The preset code is 12345. To lock the device, in the home screen, press the power key, and select Lock phone . To unlock your device, select Unlo ck > OK , enter the lock code, and select OK . To change the lock code, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Ge neral > Security > Phone and SIM card . Enter the old code and then the new co de twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alphabets and digits can be used, and both uppercase and lowercase alphabets are possible. Write down the new code, and k eep it secret and in a safe place separate from your device. If you forget the lock code and your device is locked, you must take the device to a Nokia authorised service faci lity and additional charges may apply. To unlock the device, the software must be reloaded, and the data you ha ve saved in the device may be lost. You can also lock the device remotely by sending a text message to the device. To enable remo te locking, and to define the text for the message, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Genera l > Security > Phone and SIM card > Remote phone locking > Enabled . Enter the remote lock message, and confirm the message. The message must be at least 5 characters long. Write down the text, as yo u may need it later. Memory card security Select Menu > Office > File mgr. . You can protect a memory card with a password to prevent unauthorised access . To set a password, select Optio ns > Memory card p assword > Set . The password can be up to 8 characters long an d is case-sensitive. The pa ssword is stored in your device. You do not need to enter it again while you use the memory card on the same device. If you use the memory card on anot her device, you are asked for the password. Not all memory cards support password protection. To remove the memory card password, select Options > Memory card password > Remove . When you remov e the password, the data on the memory card is not protected against unau thorised use. 120 Security and data management
To open a locked memory card, select Options > Unloc k memory card . Enter the password. If you cannot recall the password to unlock a lo cked memory card, you may reformat the card, in which case the card is unlocked and pa ssword removed. Formatting a memory card deletes all data stored on the card. Encryption Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > En cryption . Encrypt your device or memory card to prevent outsiders from accessing your important information. Encrypt device memory or memory card To encrypt the device memory, select Ph one memory . To encrypt the mem ory card, select Memory card and from the following: ⢠Encrypt witho ut saving key â En crypt the memory card without saving the encryp tion key. If you select this option, you cannot use the memory card in other devices, and if you restore fa ctory settings , you cannot decrypt the memory card. ⢠Encrypt and save key â Encrypt the memory card a nd save the key manually in the default folder. For security, store the key to a safe place outside the device. For example, you can send the key to your computer. Enter a pass phrase for the key an d a name for the key file. The pass phrase should be long and complex. ⢠Encrypt with re stored key â Encrypt the memory card with a key you have re ceived. Select the key file, and enter the pass phrase . Decrypt device memory or memory card Always remember to decrypt the device memory and/or the memory card before upda ting the device software. To decrypt the device memory, select Phone me mory . To decrypt the memory card w ithout destroying the encryption key, select Memory card > Decrypt . To decrypt the memory card and destroy the encryption key, select Memory card > Decrypt and turn off encryption . Fixed dialling Select Menu > Contacts and Options > SIM numbers > Fixed dial contacts . With the fixed dialling servic e, you can restrict calls from your device to certain phon e numbers. Not a ll SIM cards support the fixed dialling service. For more information, contact your service provider. When security feat ures that restrict calls are in use ( such as call barring, closed user gr oup, and fix ed dialling), calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Call barr ing and call diverting cannot be active at the same time. 121 Security and data management
You need your PIN2 code to acti vate and deactivate fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling contacts. Contact your service provider for your PIN2 code. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Activate fixe d dialling â Activate the fixed dialing. ⢠Deactivate fixed dialling â Dea ctivate the fixed dialing. ⢠New SIM contact â Enter the contact name and phone number to which calls are allowed. ⢠Add from Contacts â Copy a contact from the list of contacts to the fi xed dialling list. To send text mess ages to the SIM contact s while the fixed dialling service is active, you n eed to add the text message centre number to the fixed dialling list. Certificate manager Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Security > Certificate management . Digital certificates are used to verify the origins of software bu t do not guarantee safety. The re are four different types of certificat es: authority certificates, personal certificates, trusted site certificates, and device certif icates. During a se cure connection, a server may send a server certificate to your device. Upon receipt, it is checked through an au thority certificate stored in your device. You receive notification i f the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct certificate in your device. You can download a certificate from a web site, or receive a certificate as a mess age. Certific ates should be us ed when you connect to an online bank or a remote s erver to transfer confidential inform ation. They should also be used if you want to reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious software, and to check the authenticity of software when you download and install software to your device. Tip: When you add a new certificate, check its authenticity. View certificate details You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the v a lidity period of a server certificate have been checked. To view certificate details, open a certificate folder, and select a certificate and Options > Certifi cate details . One of the following notes may appear: ⢠Certificate not truste d â You have not set any application to use the certificate. You may want to change the trust setting s. ⢠Expired certificate â The period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate no t valid yet â The perio d of v alidit y has not yet begu n for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted â The certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer. Certificate trust settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Security > Certificate man agement . Trusting a certificat e means th at you authorise it to verify web pages, e-mail servers, software packages, and other 122 Security and data management
data. Only trus ted certificates c a n b e u s e d t o v e r i f y s e r v i c e s and software. Important: Even if the use of certificat es makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certi ficates for increased securit y to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. Before changing any certific ate setting s, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belon gs to the listed owner. To change the trust settings, select a certi f icate and Options > Trust se ttings . Scroll to an app lication field, and press the scroll key to select Yes or No . You cannot change the trust settin gs of a personal certificate. Depending on the certificate, a list of applications that can use the certificate is displayed: ⢠Symbian installation â N ew Symbian operating system application. ⢠Internet â E-mail and graphics. ⢠App. installation â New Java application. ⢠Online certif. check â Online certificate status protocol. View and edit security modules Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Security > Security module . To view or edit a security module, select the module from the list. To view detailed information about a security module, select Optio ns > Security detai ls . To edit the PIN codes for th e security module, open the module, and select Module PIN to edit the PIN code for the security module or Signing PIN to edit the PIN code for digital signatures. You may not be able to change th ese codes for all security modules. The key store contains the contents of the security mo dule. To delete the key store, select Options > Delete . You may not be able to delete the key store of all security modules. Remote configuration Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Device mg r. . With Device manager, you can manage settings, da ta, and software on your device remotely. You can connect to a server, and receive configuration settings for your device. You may receive server profiles and different configuration se ttings from your service providers or company information management department. Co nfiguratio n settings ma y include connection and other settings us ed by different 123 Security and data management
applications in your device . The available options may vary. The remote configuration conn ection is usually started by the server when the device se ttings need to be updated. To create a new server profile, select Options > Server profiles > Options > New server profile . You may receive these settings from your service provider in a configurati on message. If not, define the following: ⢠Server name â Enter a name for the configuration server. ⢠Server ID â Enter th e unique ID to identify the configuration server. ⢠Server password â Enter a password to identify your device to the server. ⢠Session mode â Select the preferred connection type. ⢠Access point â Select the access point to use for the connection, or create a new access point. You can also choose to be asked for the access point every time you start a connection. This setting is avai lable only if you have selected Internet as the bearer type. ⢠Host address â Enter the web address of the configuration server. ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the server. ⢠User name and Password â Enter your user ID and password for the configuration server. ⢠Allow configurat ion â Select Yes to allow the server to initiate a configuration session. ⢠Auto-accept al l requests â Select Yes if you do not want the server to ask for your confirmation when it initiates a configuration session. ⢠Network authent ication â Select whether to use http authenticati on. ⢠Network user name and Network password â Enter your user ID and pass word for the http authen tication. This setting is available only if you have selected Network authenticat ion to be used. To connect to the server and receive configuration settings for your device, select Options > Start configuration . To view the configuration log of the selected profile, select Options > View log . To update the device soft ware over the air, select Options > Check for updates . The update does not erase your setti ngs. Wh en you re c eive the update package on your device, follow the instru ctions on the display. Your device is restarted once th e installation is complete. Downloading software updates may involve the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Make sure that the device battery has enou gh power, or connect the charger before starting the u pdate. Warning: If you install a software update, you cannot use the device, even to make emergency calls, until the installation is completed and the device is rest arted. Application manager With Application manager, you can see the software packages installed in your de vice. You can view details of installed applications, remove applications, and define installation settings. You can install two types of applicati ons and software to your device: ⢠JME applications bas ed on Java technology with the .jad or .jar file extensions 124 Security and data management
⢠Other applications and software suitable for the Symbian operating system with the .sis or . sisx file extensions Only install software that is compatible with your device. Install applications and software You can transfer installation files to your device from a compatible computer, downlo ad them during browsing, or receive them in a multim edia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using othe r connectivity methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity . You can use Nokia Application Installer in Nokia PC Suite to install an application to your device. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > App. mgr. . The installation files are in the Installation files folder, and installed applications in th e Installed apps. folder. Icons indicate the following: .sis or .sisx application Java application Application installed on the memory card Important: Only install and use ap plications an d other s oftware f rom truste d so urces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or ha ve passed the Java Verified⢠testing. Before installation, note the following: ⢠To view the application type, versi o n number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Option s > View details . To display the security certificate details of the application, select View details . ⢠If you install a file that con tains an upda te or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you ha ve the original installation file or a full backup copy of the removed software package. To restore the original application, remove the application, and install the application again from the original installation file or the backup copy. The JAR file is required for installing Java applications. If it is miss ing, the device may ask you to down load it. If there is no access point defi ned for the application, you are asked to select one. When you are downloading the JAR file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the server. Y ou obtain these from the supplier or manufact urer of the application. To install an application or software, do the following: 1. To locate an insta llation file, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > App. mgr. and Installation files . Alternat ively, search inst allation files using File manager, or select Messaging > Inbox , and open a message that conta ins an installation file. 2. In Application manager, select the application you want to install. During installation, the device shows information about the progress of the ins tallation. If you install an application without a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warn ing. Continue installation only if you are sure of the origin and contents of the application. 125 Security and data management
To start an insta lled application, select the application. If the application does not ha ve a default folder defined, it is installed in the Installations folder in the main menu. To see which software packag es are installed or removed and when, select Op tions > View log . Important: Your device can only support one antivirus applicat ion. Having more than one application with antiviru s functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functioning. After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation files (.sis, .sisx) remain in the device memory. The files may use la rge amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia PC Suite to back up installation files to a compatible PC, th en use the fil e manager to remov e the installation files from the devi ce memory. If the .sis file is a message attach ment, dele te the message from the Messaging inbox. Remove applications and software Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > App. mgr. and Installed apps. . Scroll to a software package, and select Options > Uninstall . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, you can only reinstall it if you have the original software packag e or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to o pen documents created with that software. If another software packag e depends on the software package that you remov ed, the other softwa re package may stop working. For more information, see the documentation of the inst alled software package. Application manager settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > App. m gr. . Select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Software installation â Select whether Symbian software that has no verifi ed digital signature can be installed. ⢠Online certificate check â Check the online certificates before inst alling an applica tion. ⢠Default web address â Set the default add ress used when checking online certificates. Some Java applications may require that a message be sent or a network connection be made to a specific acc ess point to download extra data or components. Licenses Digital rights management Content owners may use different ty pes of digital right s management (DRM) tech nologies to protect their intellectual property, includ ing copyrights. This devi ce uses various typ es of DRM software to access D RM- protected content. With this device you can access content protected with WMDRM 10 and OMA DRM 2.0. If certain DRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask that such DRM soft ware's ability to acces s new DRM- protected content be revoked. Revocation may also 126 Security and data management
prevent renewal of such DR M-protected content already in your device. Revocation of such DRM software does not affect the use of content protected with other types of DRM or the use of non-DRM-protected content. About Licenses Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Licence s . Some media files, such as imag es, music, or video clips, are protecte d by digi tal usage ri ghts . The licenses for such files may allow or restrict their usage. For example, with some licenses you may listen to a song only a limited nu mber of times. During one playback session you may rewind, fast- forward, or pause the song, but once you stop it, you have used one of the instances allowed. Use licences Digital rights mana gement (DRM) protected cont ent comes with an associated licence that de fines your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM-protected content, to back up both the licence and the con t ent, use the backup feature of Nokia PC Suite. Other tran sfer method s may no t tr ansfer the licence which need to be restored with the content f or you to be able to continue the use of OMA DRM-protected content after the d e v i c e m e m o r y i s f o r m a t t e d . Y o u m a y a l s o n e e d t o r e s t o r e the licence in case the files on your device get corrupted. If your device has WMDRM-pr otected content, both the licence and the content will be lost if the device memory is formatted. You may also lose the licence and the content if the files on your device ge t corrupted. Losing the licence or the content may limit your ability to u se the same content on your device ag ain. For more information, contact your service provider. Some licence may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected content can be a ccessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. To view your licences by type, select Vali d licen ces , Invalid licences , or Not in use . To view the licenc e details, select Options > Licen ce details . The following details are disp layed for each media file: ⢠Status â The stat us is Licence is val id , Lic ence expired , or Licence not yet valid . ⢠Content sending â Allowed indicates that you can send the file to another device. ⢠Content in phone â Yes indicates that the file is in the device and the path of the file is displayed. No indicates that the related fi le is not currently in the device. To activate a licence, in the licences main view, select Invalid licences > Options > Get new licence . Establish a network connection at the prompt, and you are directed to a website wh ere you can purcha se rights to the media. To remove file rights, go to the desired file, and select Options > Delete . If there are several rights related to the same media fi le, all the rights are deleted. The group licence view displays all of the files related to a group right. If you have down loaded multiple media files with the same rights, they are all displayed in this view. You can open the group view fr om either the valid licences 127 Security and data management
or invalid licences tabs. To access these files, open the group rights folder. Sync Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Sync . Sync enables you to synch ronise your note s, calendar entries, text and m ultimedia messages, browse r bookmarks, or contacts with various compatible applications on a compatible computer or on the internet. You may receive synchronisat ion settings in a special message from your service provider. A synchronisation profile contains the necessary settings for synchronisation. When you open the Sy nc application, the default or previously used sync profile is displayed. To modify the profile, scroll to a sync item, and select Mark to include it in the profile or Unmark to leave it out. To manage sync p rofiles, select Opti ons and the desired option. To synchronise data, select Options > Synchronise . To cancel synchronisation before it finishes, select Cancel . Mobile VPN Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings an d Connection > VPN . The Nokia mobile virtual priv ate network (VPN) client creates a secure connection to compatible corporate intranet and services, s uch as e-mail. Your device connects from a mobile network, th rough the internet, to a corporate VPN gateway tha t acts as a front door to the compatible corporate network. The VPN client uses IP Security (IPSec) tech nology. IPSec is a framew ork of open standards for supporting the se cure exchange of data over IP networks. VPN policies define the method used by the VPN client and a VPN gateway to au thenticate each other, and t he encryption algorith ms that they us e to help protect the confidentiality of data. For a VPN policy, conta ct your company's IT department. To install and configure the VPN client, certificates, and policies, contact the IT admini strator of your organisation. Manage VPN Select from the following: ⢠VPN policies â I nstall, view, and upda te VPN policies. ⢠VPN policy servers â Edit the connection settings of VPN policy servers from which you can insta ll and update VPN policies. A polic y server refers to a Nokia Security Service Manage r (NSSM), which is not necessarily requ ired. ⢠VPN log â View the log for your VPN policy installations, updates and synchronisation s, and other VPN connections. Edit VPN access points Select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Settings and Connection > Destinations . An access point is where your phone connects to the network. To use e-mail and multimedia services, or to 128 Security and data management
browse web pages, you must first define internet access points for these services. Vi rtual private network (V PN) access points pair VPN policies with regular internet access points to create secure connections. Your service provider may pres et some or all access points for your device, and you may n ot be able to crea te, edit, or remove them. Select a destination and Options > Edit , and define the following: ⢠Connectio n name â Enter a name for th e VPN access point. ⢠VPN policy â Select the VPN policy to combine with the internet access point. ⢠Internet access point â Select the internet access point with which to combine the V PN policy to create secure connections for data tran sfer. ⢠Proxy ser ver address â Enter the proxy server address of the private network. ⢠Proxy port number â Enter the proxy port number. ⢠Use access point â Select whether connections using this access point are establish ed automatically. The settings available for editing may vary. For the correct settings, contact your company's IT department. Use a VPN connection in an application You may have to prove y our identity when you log on to the enterprise network. Contact your comp any's IT department for the credentials. To use a VPN connection in an application, the applicat ion must be associated with a VPN access poin t. Tip: Yo u can configure the ap plication's connection setting to Always ask , in which case you select the VPN access point from a li st of connections when a connection is established. 1. In the application in whic h you want to create a VPN connection, select a V PN access point as the access point. 2. If you are using legacy au thentication, enter your VPN user name and pass code or password. If the SecurID token has become out of synchronisation with the clock of the ACE/Server, enter the next passcode. If you are using certificat e-based authentication , you may have to enter the key store password. 129 Security and data management
Settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings . You can define and modify various settings of your device. Modifying these settings affe cts the operation of your device across several applications. Some settings may be preset for the device or sent to you in a special message by your service provider. You may not be able to change such settings. Select the setting you wan t to edit to do the following: ⢠Switch between two values , such as on or off. ⢠Select a value from a list. ⢠Open a text editor to enter a value. ⢠Open a slider, and scroll left or right to adjust a value. General settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General . Select from the following: ⢠Personalisation â Change the display settings, and personalise the device. ⢠Date and time â Change the date and time. ⢠Enhancement â Define the settings for your accessories. ⢠Sensor settings â Ch ange the sensor settings. ⢠Security â Define the security settings. ⢠Factory settings â Restore the original settings of the device. ⢠Positioning â Define the posi tioning method and server for GPS-based a pplications. Personalisation settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Personalisation . Display settings To define the level of light that the device needs before switching on the backlight, select Display > Light sensor . To change the text size, select Display > Font size . To adjust the length of time the display can be left idle before the screen saver is activated, select Display > Power saver time-out . To select a welcome note or logo for the display, select Display > Welcome note / logo . You can either choose the default welcome note, enter your own text, or select an image. To set how quickly the display dims after the last keypress, select Display > Light time-out . Tone settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings . Select General > Personalisation > Tones and from the following: 130 Settings
⢠Ringing tone â Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for downloading tones using the browser. I f you have two altern ate phone lines in use, you can specify a ringing tone for each line. ⢠Video call tone â Select a ringing tone for video calls. ⢠Say caller's name â If you select this se tting, and someone from your contacts list calls you, the device sounds a ringing tone that is a combination of the spoken name of the con tac t and the selected ringing tone. ⢠Ringing type â Select how you wa nt the ringing tone to alert you. ⢠Ringing volume â Set the volume level of the ringing tone. ⢠Message alert tone â Select a tone for received text messages. ⢠E-mail alert tone â Select a tone for received e-mail messages. ⢠Calendar alarm tone â Select a tone for calendar alerts. ⢠Clock alarm tone â Select a tone for clock alarms. ⢠Vibrating alert â Set the device to vibrate when you receive a call or m essage. ⢠Keypad tones â Set the volume level o f the keypad tones. ⢠Warning tones â Turn the warning tones on or off. Language settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Gene ral > Personalisation > Language . ⢠Phone la nguag e â Set the device la nguage. ⢠Writing language â Selec t the language used for writing notes and messages. ⢠Predictive te xt â Activate predictive text inp ut. ⢠Input options â Define the setti ngs for predictiv e text input. Scroll key lights Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Personalisation > Notificati on lights . To set the scroll key to blink slowly when you do not use the device, select Standby br. light . To set the scroll key to blink rapidly when you have missed calls or received messages, select Notification light , set the blinking time, and select the events you want to be notified of. Settings for One-touch keys Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Personalisation > One-touch keys . To select which application an d task is opened when you press a One-touch key, select the key and Options > Open . To restore the prese t applications and tasks, select Restore defaults . Date and time settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Date and time . Select from the following: ⢠Date and Time â Set the current date a nd time. ⢠Time zone â Define your time zone. ⢠Date format and Date separator â Define the date format and separator. 131 Settings
⢠Time format and Time separator â Select whether to use the 12-hour or 24-hour clock syst em and with which symbol to separ ate h ours and minutes. ⢠Clock type â Define the clock type. ⢠Clock alarm tone â Select the tone for t he alarm clock. ⢠Alarm snooze time â Define the snooze time for the alarm clock. ⢠Workdays â Define the days of the week that are work days for you. ⢠Automatic time update â Update the t ime, date, and time zone information au tomatically (network service). Accessory settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Enhancement . To define which profile is activated when you attach an accessory to your device, select the accessory and Default profile . To set the device to answer phone calls automatically after 5 seconds when an accessory is attached, select the accessory and Automatic a nswer > On . If the ringing type is se t to Beep once or Si lent in the selected profile, automatic answering is disabled. To illuminate the dev ice wh ile it is attached to an accessory, select Lights > On . This option is onl y available for certain accessories. Turn to silence calls or alarms When you activate the s ensors in your dev ice, you can control certain functions by turning the device. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Sensor sett ings . Select from the following: ⢠Sensors â Set the display to rotate au tomatically according to the device's orientation. ⢠Turning control â Set the device to silence incoming calls or snooze alarms when you turn the device face down. To enable this option , the Sensors o ption needs to be activated. Security settings Security settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Security . Select from the following: ⢠Phone and SIM card â M o d i f y t h e s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s f o r your device and SIM card. ⢠Certificate management â Manage your security certificates. ⢠Protected conten t â Modify your settings for DRM- protected content. ⢠Security module â Manage your security module. Avoid using codes that are si milar to emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number. Codes are shown as asterisks . When you change a code, enter the current code, then the new code tw ice. Device and SIM card security To change the PIN code, select Phone and SIM card > PIN code . The new code must be 4 to 8 digits long. The PIN code prot ects your SIM c a rd against un authorised use 132 Settings
and is provided with the SIM card. A fter three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, th e code is blocked, and you need to use the PUK code to unblock it before you can use the SIM card again. To set the keypad to lock automatically af ter a defined period, select Phone and SI M card > Keypad autolock period . To set a time-out af ter which the device is automatically locked and can be used only if the correct lock code is entered, select Phone and SI M card > Phon e autolock period . Enter a number for the time-out in minutes, or select None to set off the autolock period. When the device is locked, you can still answer inc oming calls, and calls may still be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To set a new lock code, select Phone and SIM card > Loc k code . The preset lock code is 12345. Enter the current code and then the new code twice. The new code can be 4- 255 characters long. Both a lphabets and digits can be used, and both uppercase and lowercase alp habets are possible. The device notifies you if the lock code is not properly formatted. Restore original settings To restore the original device settings, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Factory settings . To do this, you need your device lock code. After resetting, the device may take a longer time to switch on. Documents, contact information, calendar entries, and files are unaffected. Positioning settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Positioning . To use a specific positioning method to detect the location of your device, select Position ing methods . To select a positioning server, select Positioning server . To select which measurement system you wa nt to use for speeds and distances, se lect Notation preferen ces > Measurement s ystem . To define in which format the coordinate information is displayed in your device, select Notatio n preferenc es > Coordinate form at . E-mail key settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General . To select which mailbox to open with the e-mai l key, select E-mail key settings > E-mail key , and press the scroll key. Telephone settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and Phone . Select from the following: ⢠Call â Define general call settings. ⢠Call divert â Define your call divert se ttings. See "Call divert" , p. 58 . ⢠Call barring â Define your call barring settings. See "Call barring" , p. 58 . 133 Settings
⢠Network â Adjust the network settings. Call settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Phone > Call . Select from the following: ⢠Send my caller ID â Display your ph one number to the person you are calling. ⢠Send my internet call ID â Display your internet call address to the person you ar e calling using an internet call. ⢠Call waiting â Set the device to notify you of incoming calls while you are in a call (network service). ⢠Internet call waiting â Set the device to n otify you of new incoming internet ca lls while you are in a call. ⢠Internet call ale rt â To set the device t o notify you of incoming internet calls, select On . If you select Off , you receive only a notification if you missed a call. ⢠Reject call with message â Reject a call, and send a text message to the caller. ⢠Message text â Write the standard text message that is sent when you reject a call. ⢠Own video in recvd. call â Allow or deny video sending during a video call from your device. ⢠Image in video call â Display a still image if video is not sent during a v ideo call. ⢠Automatic red ial â Set your device to make a maximum of 10 attempts to con nect the call after an unsuccessful ca ll attempt. To stop a utomatic redialling, press the end key. ⢠Show call duration â Display the length of a call during the call. ⢠Summary after call â Display the length of a call after the call. ⢠Speed diall ing â Activate sp eed dialling. ⢠Anykey answer â Activate anykey an swer. ⢠Contact search â Activate contact search in the home screen. ⢠Line in use â This setting (network service) is displayed only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use for m aking calls and sending t ext messages. Calls on both lines can be answered irrespective of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you are not able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is displayed in the home screen. ⢠Line change â Prevent line selection (network service), if supported by yo ur SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Network se ttings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Phone > Networ k . To select the network mode, select Network mode and Dual mode , UMTS , or GSM . In dual mode, the device switches automatically between networks. Tip: Select ing UMTS enables faster data transfer, but may increase the dema nd on battery power and reduce the battery life. In regions close to both GSM and UMTS networks, selecting Dual mode may cause constant jumpi ng between the two networks, which also increases th e demand on battery power. 134 Settings
To select the operator, select Operato r selec tion and Manual to select from available networks, or Automati c to set the device to select the n etwork automatically. To set the device to indicate when it is used in a microcellular network (MCN), select Cell info display > On . Connection settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection . Select from the following: ⢠Blueto oth â Edit the Blu etooth settings. ⢠USB â Edit the da ta cable settings. ⢠Destinations â Set up new or edit existing access points. Some or all access p oints may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to create, edit, or remove them. ⢠VPN â Manage the sett in gs for virtual private networking. ⢠Packet data â Define when packet data network is attached, and enter the default packet switched access point name if you use your device a s a modem for a computer. ⢠Wireless LAN â Set the device to display an indicator when a wireless LAN (WLA N) is available, and define how often the device searches for netw orks. ⢠Video sharing â Enable video sharing, select the SIP profile for video sharing, and define the video saving settings. ⢠SIP settings â View or create session initiation protocol (SIP) profiles. ⢠XDM profile â Create an XDM profile. The XDM profile is required for many comm unications applications, for example, presence. ⢠Presence â Edit the settings for presence (network service). To register for the service, contact your service provider. ⢠Remote dr ives â Connect the device to a remote drive. ⢠Configurat ions â View and delete trusted servers from which your device may receive configuration settings. ⢠APN control â Restrict packet data connections. Access points Create a new access point Select Menu > Ctrl. panel and Connectivity > Destinations . You may receive acces s point settings in a m essage from a service provider. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create , edit, or remove them. When you open one of th e access point groups ( , , ), you can see th e access point type s: indicates a protected access point indicates a packet data access point indicates a wireless LA N (WLAN) access point Tip: You can create internet access points in a WLAN with the WLAN wizard. 135 Settings
To create a new access point, select Access point . The device asks to check for availa ble connections. After the search, connections that are already available are shown and can be shared by a new access poin t. If you skip this step, you are asked to select a connect ion method and to define the settings needed. To edit the settings of an a ccess point, open one of the access point groups, and select an access point. Follow the instructions from your service provider. ⢠Connection name â Enter a name for the connection. ⢠Data bearer â Select the data connection type. Depending on th e data connect ion you select, only certain setting fields are avai lable. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red *. Other fields can be left empty, unless your servic e provider has instructed otherwise. To use a data connection, your service provider must support this feature, and if necessary , activate it for your SIM card. Create access point groups Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings an d Connection > Destinations . Some applic ations allow you to use ac cess point groups to connect to a network. To avoid selecting which access point to use every time the device attempts to connect to a network, you can create a group that contai ns various access points, and define the order in which the access points are used to connect to a network. For example, you can add wireless LAN (WL AN) and packet data access points to an internet access point group and use the group for browsing the web. If you give the WLAN access point the higher priority, the device connects to the internet through a W LAN if available and through a packet data connection if not. To create a new access point group, select Options > Manage > New destination . To add access points to a n access point group, select th e group and Options > New access point . To copy an existing access point from another group , select the group, scroll to an existing access point, and select Options > Organise > Copy to other dest . . To change the priority order of access points within a group, scroll to an access point, and select Option s > Organise > Change priority . Packet data access points Select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Settings and Connection > Destinations > Access point , and follow th e instructions on the display. Or, open one of the access point groups, and select an access point marked with . Use the instructions provided by your service provi der to edit the following: ⢠Access point name â The access point name is provided by your service provider. ⢠User name â The user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by your service provider. ⢠Prompt password â If you want to set the device to ask for a password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the device, select Yes . 136 Settings
⢠Passwor d â A password may be needed to make a data connection an d is usually p r o v i d e d b y y o u r s e r v i c e provider. ⢠Authenti cation â Select Secure to always sen d your password encrypted or Normal to send your password encrypted when possible. ⢠Homepage â Depending on the access point type you are setting up, enter th e we b address or the address of the multimedia message centre. ⢠Use access point â Select After confi rmation to set the device to ask for confirmation before th e connection us ing this a ccess point is created, or Automatically to set the device to connect to t he destination using this access point automatica lly. Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: ⢠Network type â Select the internet protocol type to transfer data to and from your device. The other settings depend on the selected network type. ⢠Phone IP addr ess (for IPv4 only ) â Enter the IP address of your device. ⢠DNS addresses â Enter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers, if required by your service provider. To obtain these addresses, contact your internet service provider. ⢠Proxy server address â Enter the address of the proxy server. ⢠Proxy port number â Enter the port number of the proxy server. WLAN internet access points Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Se ttings an d Connection > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions on the display. Or, open on e of the access point groups, select an access point marked with , and select Options > Edit . Use the instructions provided by your service provider to edit the following: ⢠WLAN netwo rk name â Select Enter manually or Search for networks . If you select an exist ing network, WLAN network mo de and WLAN security mode are determined by the settings of its access point device. ⢠Network status â Define wh ether the network name is displayed. ⢠WLAN network mo de â Select Ad-hoc to create an ad hoc network, and to a llow devices to send and receive data directly; a WLAN access point device is not needed. In an ad hoc networ k, all devices must use the same WLAN network name. ⢠WLAN security mo de â Select the encryption used: WEP , 802.1x , or WPA/WPA2 . (802.1x and WPA/WPA2 are not available for ad hoc networks.) I f you select Open net work , no encryption is used. The WEP, 802.1x, and WPA functions can be used only if the ne twork supports them. ⢠Use access poin t â Select After confirmati on to set the device to ask for confirmat ion before the connection using this a ccess point is created or Automatically to set the device to connect t o the destination using this a ccess point automatically. To enter the settings for the selected security mode, select WLAN security setti ngs . Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: 137 Settings
⢠IPv4 settin gs â Enter the IP address of your device, the subnet IP address, the default gateway, and the IP addresses of the primary a nd secondary DNS servers. Contact your internet se rvi ce provider for these addresses. ⢠IPv6 settin gs â Define the type of DNS address. ⢠Ad-hoc channel (only for ad hoc networks) â To enter a channel numbe r (1-11) manually, select User defined . ⢠Proxy server address â Enter the address for the proxy server. ⢠Proxy port number â Enter the proxy port number. Packet data (GPRS) settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings an d Connection > Packet data . Your device supports packet data connections, such as GPRS in the GSM netw ork. When you are using your devi ce in GSM and UMTS networks, it is possible to hav e multiple data connections act ive at the same time; access points can share a data connection, and data connections remain active, for example, during voice calls. To define the packet data settings, select Packet data connection and When available to register the device to the packet data ne twork when you switch the device on in a supported network, or When needed to register the device to a packet data network only when an application or action attempts to establish a packet data connection. This setting affects all acce ss points for packet data connections. To use the devi ce as a packet data modem for your computer, select Access point, and enter the access point name provided by your service provider. To use a high-speed data connection, select High speed packet access > Enabled . WLAN settings Select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Settings and Connection > Wireless LA N . To have an indicator displa yed when there is a wireless LAN (WLAN) available in your current locat ion, select Show WLAN availability > Yes . To select the interval for your device to scan for available WLANs, and to update the indicator, s elect Scan for networks . This setting is not av ailable unless you select Show WLAN availabi lity > Yes . To set the device to test the internet capability of th e selected WLAN automatically, to ask for permission every time, or to never perform the connectivity test, select Internet connectivity te st > Run aut omatically , Ask every time , or Never run . If you select Run automatically or allow the test to be performed when the device asks for it, and the connectivity test is performed successfully, the access point is saved to intern et destinations. To check the unique media a ccess control (MAC) addr ess that identifies your device, enter *#62 209526# in the home screen. The MAC address is displayed. Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings . The advanced WLAN settings are normally defined automatically, and changing them is not recommended. 138 Settings
To edit the settings manually , select Automati c configuration > Disabled , and define the f ollowing: ⢠Long re try lim it â Enter the maximum number o f transmission attempts if th e device does not receive a receiving acknowledgement signal from the network. ⢠Short retry limit â Ente r the maximum nu mber of transmission attempts if th e device does not receive a clear-to-send signal from the network. ⢠RTS threshold â S elect the data packet size at which the WLAN access point devi ce issues a request to send before sending the packet. ⢠TX power level â Select the power level of your device when sending data. ⢠Radio measurement s â Enable or disable the radio measurements. ⢠Power savin g â Select whether to use the WLAN power saving mechan ism to save the power in the device battery. Using the power sa ving mechanism enhances the battery performance but may weaken WLAN interoperability. To restore all settings to their original values, select Options > Re store defau lts . WLAN security settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Se ttings an d Connection > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions on the display. To edit a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point, open one of the access point groups, and se lect an access point marked with . To enter the settings for the selected security mode, select WLAN security setti ngs . WEP security settings Select WEP as the WLAN security mode. The wired equivalent privacy (WEP) encryption method encrypts data before it is tra nsmitted. Access to the network is denied to us ers who do not have th e required WEP keys. When the WEP security mode is in use, and your device receives a data packet not encrypted with the WEP keys, the data is discarded. In an ad-hoc network, all devices must use the same WEP key. Select WLAN security settings and from the following: ⢠WEP key in use â Select the desired WEP key. ⢠Authenticati on type â Select Open or Shared . ⢠WEP key setti ngs â Edit the sett ings for the WEP k ey. WEP key settings In an ad-hoc network, all devices must use the same WEP key. Select WLAN security settings > WEP key settings an d from the following: ⢠WEP encryption â Select the desired WEP encryption key length. ⢠WEP key format â Select whe t her you want to ente r the WEP key data in ASCI I or Hexadecim al format. ⢠WEP key â Enter the WEP key data. 139 Settings
802.1x security settings Select 802.1x as the WLAN security mode. 802.1x authenticates and authorises dev ices to access a wireless network, and prevents access if the authorisation process fai ls. Select WLAN security settings and from the following: ⢠WPA/WPA2 â Select EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key us ed for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in sett ings â I f y o u s e l e c t e d WPA/WPA2 > EAP , select which EAP plug -ins defined in your device t o use with the access point. ⢠Pre-shared key â I f y o u s e l e c t e d WP A/WPA2 > Pre- shared key , enter the shared private key that identifies your device to the WLAN to which you connect. WPA security settings Select WPA/WP A2 as the WLAN security m ode. Select WLAN security settings and from the following: ⢠WPA/WPA2 â Select EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key us ed for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in settings â If you select WPA/WPA2 > EAP , select which EAP plug -ins defined in your device t o use with the access point. ⢠Pre-shared key â If you select WPA/WPA2 > Pre- shared key , enter the shared private key that identifies your device to the WLAN to which you connect. ⢠WPA2 only mod e â To allow both TKIP and AE S (Advanced Encryption Stan dard) encryption, select Off . To allow AES only, select On Wireless LAN plugins Select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Settings and Connection > Destinations , and an access poin t group. The extensible authentication protocol (EAP) plug-ins are used in wireless net works to authenticate wireless devices and authenticat ion servers, and the different EAP p lug-ins make possible the u se of various EAP methods (network service). You can view the EAP plug-ins current ly installed in yo ur device (network service). EAP plug-ins 1. To define the EAP plug-in setti ngs, select Options > New access point and define an ac cess point th at uses WLAN as a d ata bearer. 2. Select 802.1x or WPA/WP A2 as the security mode. 3. Select WLAN securit y settin gs > WPA/WPA2 > EAP > EAP plug-in settings . Use EAP plug-ins To use an EAP plug -in when you connect to a WLAN using the access poin t, select the desi red plug-in and Opti ons > Enable . The EAP plug-ins enabled for use with this access point have a check mark n ext to them. To not use a plug- in, selec t Options > Disable . To edit the EAP plug-i n settings, select Op tions > Edit . 140 Settings
To change the priority of the EAP plug-in settings, select Options > Ra ise priority to attempt to use the p lug-in before other plug-ins wh en connecting to the ne twork with the access point, or Options > Lower priority to use this plug-in for network authentication after attempting to us e other plug-ins. See the device help for more information on EAP plugins. Session initiation protocol (SIP) settin gs Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Se ttings an d Connection > SIP settings . The session initiation protocol (SIP) is used for creating, modifying, and terminating certain types of communication sessions with one or more participants (network service). Typical c ommunication sessions are video sharing and net calls. SIP profiles include settings for these sessions. The SIP profile used by default for a communication session is underlined. To create a SIP profile, select Options > New SIP profile > Use default pr ofile or Use existin g profile . To select the SIP profile you want to use by default for communication sessions, select Options > Default profile . Edit SIP profiles Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Se ttings an d Connection > SIP settings . Select Options > Edit and from the following: ⢠Profile na me â Enter a name for the SIP profile. ⢠Service prof ile â Select IETF or Nokia 3GPP . ⢠Default destination â Select the de stination to use for the internet connection. ⢠Default access point â Select the access point to use for the internet connection. ⢠Public us er name â Ent er your user name prov ided by your service provider. ⢠Use compr ession â Select if compression is used. ⢠Registration â Select the registration mode. ⢠Use secur ity â Select if security negotiation is used. ⢠Proxy se rver â Enter the proxy server settings for this SIP profile. ⢠Registrar server â Enter the registration server settings for this SIP profile. Edit SIP proxy servers Select Options > New SIP profile or Edit > Proxy server . Proxy servers are intermediate servers between a browsing service and its users used by some service providers. These servers may provide additional security and speed up access to the service. Select from the following: ⢠Proxy serve r address â Enter the host name or IP address of the proxy server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the proxy server realm. ⢠User nam e and Password â Enter your user name and password for the proxy server. ⢠Allow loose routing â Select if loose routing is allowed. ⢠Transport type â Select UDP , Automatic , or TCP . 141 Settings
⢠Port â Enter the port number of the proxy server. Edit registration servers Select Options > New SIP profile or Edit > Registrar server . Select from the following: ⢠Registrar server address â Enter the host name or IP address of the registrar server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the registrar server realm. ⢠User name and Passwor d â Enter your user name a nd password for the registrar server. ⢠Transport type â Select UDP , Automatic , or TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the registrar server. Configuration settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings an d Connection > Configurations . You can receive messages from your service provider or company informat ion management containing configuration settings for trusted servers. These settings are automatically sa ved in Configurati ons. You may receive configuration sett ings for access points, multimedia or e-mail messaging services, or synchronisation settings from trusted servers. To delete configurations for a trusted server, select Options > Delete . The configuration settings for other applications provided by this server are also deleted. Restrict packet data Select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Settings and Connection > APN control . With the access point contro l service, you can restrict packet data connections from yo ur device to certain access points only. Your SIM card may n ot support the access point control service. For more information, contact your service provider. To restrict packet data co nnections from your device, select Options > Activate restrictions . Y ou need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate access point control or to edit the packet data acce ss points on the control list. To add access points that ca n be used for packet data connections to the control list, select Options > Add name manually . To enable connections to an operator- provided access point, cr eate an empty access point. To remove access point s from the list, select Op tions > Remove . Application settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Applications . Select an applicat ion from th e list to adjust its settings. 142 Settings
Shortcuts Here are some of the available keyboard shortcuts in your device. Shortcuts can make the use of the applications more efficient. General shortcuts General shortcuts Power key Press and hold to sw itch your device on and off. Press once to switch between profiles. * Press and hold * t o turn Blu etooth connectivity on or off. # Press and hold # to turn the Silent profile on or off. Home screen Left selection key right selection key Lock and unlock the keypad an d keyboard. Call key Open the call log. 0 Press and hold to open your homepage in the Web browser. 1 Press and hold to call your voice mailbox. Number key (2â 9) Call a phone number using speed dialling. Yo u must first acti vate speed dialling in Menu > Ctrl. panel and Settings > Ph one > Call > Speed dialling . 143 Shortcuts
Nokia original accessories Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and accessories approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any othe r types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. In particular , use of unappr oved chargers or batteries may present a risk of fire, explos ion, leakage, or other hazard. For availability of approved accessories, check with your dealer. An extensive range of accessories is available for your device. For more details, seewww.nokia-asia.com/ accessories. Practical rules about accessories ⢠Keep all accessories out of the reach of small children. ⢠When you disconnect t he po wer cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug, not th e cord. ⢠Check regularly that accessories i nstalled in a vehicle are mounted and are operating p roperly. ⢠Installation of any comple x car accessories must be made by qualified personnel only. Battery Type: BP-4L Talk time: Up to 6 hours (WCDMA) / 8 hours (GSM). Standby Up to 696 hours (WCDMA) / 552 hours (GSM). Important: Battery talk and stand-by times are estimates and only possible under optimal network conditions. Actual battery talk and standby times depend on SIM cards, features used , battery age and condition, temperatures to which battery is exposed, network conditions, and many ot her factor s, and may be significantly shorter than th ose specified above. Ringing tones, hands free c all handling , use in digital mode, and other features will also consume the battery, and the amount of time a device is used for calls will affect its stand-by time. Likewise, the a mount of time that t he de v i c e i s t u r n e d o n a n d in t h e standby mode will affect its talk time. 144 Nokia orig inal accessorie s
Troubleshooting To view frequently asked qu estions about your device, go to www.nokia.com/support. Q: What is my lock, PIN, or PUK code? A: The default lock code is 12345. If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your device dealer . If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. Q: How do I close an application that is not responding? A: Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the application, and press the backspace key to close the application. Q: Why do images look smudgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, discoloured, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I switch on my device? A: This is a charact eristic of this type of display. Some displays may contain pi xels o r dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device whi le using Bluetooth con nectivity? A: Check that both devices are compatible, have activated Bluetooth connectivity , and are not in hidden mode. Check also that the distan ce between the two devices is not ov er 10 metres (33 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I c lose a Bluetooth connec tion? A: If another device is conn ected to your device, you can close the connection using the ot her device or by deactivating Bluetooth connectivity. Sele ct Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connecti vity > Bluetooth and Blueto oth > Off . Q: Why can't I see a wireless LA N (WLAN) access point even though I know I'm within its range? A: Check that the Offline profile is not in use in your device. The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can on ly access networks that u se a h i d d e n S S I D i f y o u k n o w t h e c o r r e c t S S I D , a n d h a v e c r e a t e d a WLAN access point for the ne twork on your Nokia device. Check that the WLAN access point is not on channels 12-13, as they canno t be associated wi th. Q: How do I turn the WLAN off on my Nokia device? A: The WLAN on your Nokia device deactivates when you are not connected or trying to connect to another access point, or not scanning for av ailable networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your Nokia device does not sca n, or scans le ss often, for available networks in the background. The WLAN deactivates in between background scans. 145 Troubleshooting
To stop the backgroun d scans, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Co nnection > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN availability > Neve r . You can still manually scan for available WLANs and connect to WLANs as usual. To increase the background scan interval, select Show WLAN availability > Yes , and define the interva l in Scan for network s . Q: Why can't I browse th e web even though the WLAN connection is work ing and the IP settings are correct? A: Check that you have defined the HTTP/ HTTPS proxy settings correctly in th e advanced settings of your WLA N access point. Q: How do I check the signal qu ality of my WLAN connection? â Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Co nn. mgr. and Active data connections > Options > Details . If the signal quality is weak or moderate, yo u may encounter connection problems. Try ag ain closer to the access point. Q: Why do I have problems with the security mode? A: Check that you ha ve configured the secu rity mode correctly, and that it is the same that the network uses. To check the security mode the network uses, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivi ty > Conn. mgr. and Active data co nnecti ons > Options > Details . Check also the following: you have the correct WPA mode (preshared key or EAP), you ha ve disabled all EAP types that are not needed, and all the EAP type settings are correct (passwords, us er names, certificates ). Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact for my message? A: The contact card does n ot have a phone number, an address, or an e-ma il address. Select Menu > Cont acts , and edit the contact card. Q: The note Retrieving message is sh own briefly. What i s happening? A: The device is tr ying to r etrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia messaging cent re. This note is shown if you ha ve selec ted Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Multim edia retriev al > Always automatic . Check that the settings for multimedia messaging ar e defined correctly and that there are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. Q: How can I end the da ta connection when the device starts a data connection again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia message centre. To st op the device from making a data connection, select Menu > Messagin g and Option s > Settin gs > Multimedia message > Multimedia retrieval > Manual to have th e multimedia messaging cent re save messages to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia messages. If you select Manua l , you receive a notificat ion when there is a new multimedia message that you can retrieve in the multimedia message centre. If you select Off , the device does no t make any networ k connections related to multimedia messaging. To set the device to use a pa cket data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it , select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and Connection > 146 Troubleshooting
Packet data > Packet data co nnection > When needed . If this does not help, restart the device. Q: How do I save battery power? A: Many features in your de vice increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To save battery power, do the following: ⢠Deactivate Bluetooth connectivity w hen you do not need it. ⢠Stop the background scans for WLAN. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Se ttings and Connection > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN availability > Never . You can still manually scan for available WLANs a nd connect to WLANs as us ual. ⢠Set the device t o use a pack et data connection only if you start an appli cation or action th at needs it. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > Packet data > Packet data connection > When needed . ⢠Prevent the device from automati cally downloading new maps in the Maps application. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and Option s > Settings > Internet > Connection . ⢠Change the time-out after which t he backlight is switched off. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Genera l > Personalisation > Display > Light time-out . ⢠Close the applications you are not using. Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the application, and press the backspace key to close the application. 147 Troubleshooting
Protect the environment Save energy You do not need to charge your battery s o often if you do the following: ⢠Close applications and data connections, such as your WLAN or Bluetooth connection, when not in use. ⢠Decrease the brightness of the screen. ⢠Set your device to enter power saver mode after the minimum peri od of inactivity. ⢠Deactivate un necessary so unds, such as key tones. Recycle When this device has reached the end of its working life, all of its materia ls can be recovered as materials and energy. To guarantee the correct disposal and reuse, Nokia co-opera tes with its partners through a program called We:recyc le.For information on how to recycle your old Nokia products and where to find collection sites, go to www. nokia.com/werecycle, or using a mobile device, nokia.mobi/w erecycle, or call the Nokia Contact Cent er. Recycle packaging and user guides at yo ur local recycling scheme. For more information on the environmental attributes of your device, go to www.nokia.com/ecodeclara tion. 148 Protect the environme nt
Product and safety information Digital rights manage ment Digital rights ma nagement Content owners may use different types of digital rights management (DRM) technologies to protect their intellectual property, includ ing copyrights. This device uses various types of DRM software to access DRM- protected content. W ith this device yo u can access content protected with WMDRM 10 and OMA DRM 2.0. If ce rtain DRM software fails to pr otect the content, content owners may ask that such DRM software 's ability to access new DRM- protected content be revoked. Revocation m ay also prevent renewal of such DR M-protected content already in your device. Revocation of such DRM software does not affect the use of content protected with other types of DRM or the use of non-DRM-protected content. Digital rights mana gement (DRM) protected cont ent comes with an associated licence that de fines your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM-protected content, to back up both the licence and the con t ent, use the backup feature of Nokia PC Suite. If your device has WMDRM-pr otected content, both the licence and the content will be lost if the device memory is formatted. You may also lose the licence and the content if the files on your device ge t corrupted. Losing the licence or the content may limit y our ability to use the same content on your device ag ain. For more information, contact your service provider. Some licence may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected content can be a ccessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. Battery Battery and charger information Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery intended for use with this device is BP-4L. Nokia may make additiona l battery models availa ble for this device. This device is intended for use when s upplied with power from the following ch argers: AC-10. The exact charger model number may vary depending on the type of plug. The plug va riant is identified by one of the following: E, EB, X, AR, U, A, C, K, or UB. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the talk and standby times a re noticeably shorter than normal, rep lace the battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a battery is being us ed for the first time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to connect the charger, then disconnect and 149 Product and safety information
reconnect it to begin chargin g the battery. If the ba ttery is completely discharged, it may take several minutes before the charging indicator a ppears on the display or before any calls can be made. Safe removal. Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Proper charging. Unp lug the charger from the electrical plug and the device whe n not in use. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a ch arger, since overcharging may shorten its li fetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. Avoid extreme temperatures. Always try to keep the battery between 15ðC and 2 5 ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). Extreme temperatures reduce the capa city and lifetime of the battery. A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily. Battery performanc e is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not short-circuit. Accident al short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pe n causes direct connection of th e positive ( ) and negativ e (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happe n, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short- circuiting the termin als may damag e the battery or the connecting object. Disposal. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle wh en possible. Do not disp ose as household waste. Leak. Do not dismantle, cut, open, crush, bend, pun cture, or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, prevent battery liquid contact with skin or eyes. If this happens, flush the affected areas immediately with water, or seek medical help. Damage. Do not modify , remanufacture, attempt to in sert foreign objects into the batter y, or immerse or expose it to water or other liquids. Batteries may explode if damaged. Correct use. Use the battery on ly for its i ntended purpose. Improper battery use may resu lt in a fire, explosion, or other hazard. If the device or battery is dro pped, especially on a hard surface, and you believe the battery has been damaged, take it to a servic e centre for inspection before continuing to use i t . Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Keep your battery out of the reach of small children. Taking care of your device Your device is a product of supe rior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will help you protect your warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your dev ice does get wet, remove the ba ttery, and allow th e device to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. 150 Product and safety information
⢠Do not store the device in high or cold temperature. High temperatures can shor ten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. When the devi ce warms to its normal temperature from a cold temp erature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the device other tha n as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not us e harsh chem icals, cleani ng solvents , or strong detergents to clean the device. Only use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean the surface of the device. ⢠Do not pai nt the device. Pain t can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthoris ed antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device an d may violate regulations govern ing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Backup all data you want to keep, such as c ontacts an d calendar notes. ⢠To reset the device from t ime to time for optimum performance, power off the device and rem ove the battery. These suggestions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any accessory . Recycle Always return your use d electronic products, batteries, and packaging materials to dedicated collection points. This way you help prevent uncontrolled waste disposal and promote the recycling of materials. Check product environmental information an d how to recycle your Nokia products at www.nokia .com/werecycle, or with a mobile device, nokia.mobi/werecycle. Additional safety information Small children Your device and its accessories are not toys. They may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment This device meets RF exposu re guidelines in the normal use position at the ear or at least 2.2 centimetres (7/8 inch) away from the body. Any carry ca se, belt clip, or holder for body-worn operation should not contain metal and should position the device the above-stated distan ce from your body. To send data files or messages requires a quality connection to the network. Da ta files or messages may be delayed until such a connect ion is available. Follow the separation distance in struct ions until t he tr ansmission is completed. 151 Product and safety information
Parts of the device are magnetic. Metalli c materials may be attracted to the device. Do not plac e credit cards or other magnetic storage medi a near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of radio transmitting equipmen t, including wireless phones, may interfere with the function of inadequately protect ed medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine whether they are adequately shielded from external RF energy. Swit ch off your device when regulations posted instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities ma y use equipment sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of medical devices recommen d a minimum separation of 15.3 centimet res (6 inches) between a wireless device and an implan ted medical device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the medical device. Persons who h ave such devices should: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimetres (6 inches) from the medical device. ⢠Not carry the wireless devi ce in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the wireless device to the ear opposite the medical device. ⢠Turn the wireless device off if there is an y reason to suspect that interference is takin g place. ⢠Follow the manufacturer directions for the implanted medical device. If you have any questions about u sing your wireless device with an implanted medical device, consult your health care provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. Vehicles RF signals may affect improper ly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection, el ectronic antilock braking, electronic speed control, and air bag systems. For more information, ch eck with the ma nufacturer of your v ehicle or its equipment. Only qualified personnel should service the device or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalida te your warranty. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive mat erials in the same compartment a s the device, its parts, or accessories. Remember that ai r bags inflate with great force. Do not place your device or accessories in the air bag deployment area. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircra ft and may be illegal. 152 Product and safety information
Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device in any area with a pot entially explosive atmosphere. Obey a ll posted instructions. Sparks in such areas could ca use an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at servi c e stations. Observ e restrictions in fuel depots, st orage, and dis t ribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosiv e atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include areas where you would be advis ed to turn off your vehicle engine, below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities and where the air co ntains chemicals or particles such as grain, du st, or metal powders. You should check with the manufacturers of vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) to determine if this device can be safe ly used in their vicinity. Emergency calls Important: This device operates using radio signals, wireless networks, landli ne networks, and user- programmed functions. If your device supports voice calls over the internet (i nternet calls), activate both the internet calls and the cellular phone. The device may attempt to make emergency calls over bo th the cellular networks and through your internet call provider if both are activated. Connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. Y ou should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Depending on your device, you may also need to complete the following: ⢠Insert a SIM card if your device uses one. ⢠Remove certain call restrictions you have activated in your device. ⢠Change your profile from O ffline or Flight profile to an active profile. 2. Press the end key as many ti mes as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call key. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call un til given permissi on to do so. Certification information (SAR) This mo bile dev ice meets guideli nes for exposur e to radio waves. Your mobi le device is a rad io transmi tter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended by intern ational guidelines. These guidelines were developed by the independent scientific organisation ICNIRP and incl ude safety margins designed to assure the protection of a ll persons, regardless of age and health. 153 Product and safety information
The exposure guidelines for mobile devices employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted u sing standard operating positions with the device tran smitting at its hig hest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operat ing device can be below the maximum value because the devi ce is designed to use only the power required to reac h the network. That amount changes depending on a n umber of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest SAR value under th e ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device at the ear is 1.30 W/kg. Use of device accessories ma y result in different SAR values. SAR values may va ry depending on national reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Additional SAR informat ion may be provided under product information at www.nokia -asia.com. 154 Product and safety information
Index Symbols/Numbers 3-D ringing tones 32 802.1x security settings 140 A A-GPS (assist ed GPS) 72 access codes 21 access points 135 groups 136 VPN 128 accessories settings 132 Active notes 84 active notes 84 active toolbar in Photos 96 alarm clock 88 albums media 9 7 alert tones 1 30 antennas 20 application manager 124 application settings 142 applicat ions 10, 124, 126 common actions 28 assisted GPS ( A-GPS) 72 attachments multimedia messages 47 audio files details 107 audio messages 44 audio themes 31 auto-update for time/date 88 autolock perio d 132 B background image 31 backing up device memory 85 battery charge level 25 charging 13 inserting 12 blogs 68 Bluetooth 114 receiving data 113 security 115 sending data 113 Bluetooth connect ivity blocking devices 115 bookmarks 69 browser 6 7, 69 bookmarks 67, 69 browsing pages 67, 68 cache memory 69 searching cont ent 69 security 69 settings 70 toolbar 68 widgets 68 browsing intranet 71 C cable 112 cache memory 69 calculator 84 calendar 35 creating entries 36 meeting requests 36 views 37 calendar key 35 call barring 58 net calls 59 call divert 58 caller ID 134 calls answering 52 barring net calls 59 conference call 53 internet calls 57 making 52, 60 making a call from log 65 muting the ringing tone 52 reje cting 52 restr ictin g See fixed dialling settings 134 speed dialling 58 155 Index
voice m ail 53 camera capturing images 91 full focus 91 image settings 93 playing vi deos 93 scenes 92 sequence mode 92 toolbar 91 video clips 92 video settings 93 viewing images 92 car kit remote SIM access 115 cell broadcast 49 settings 51 certificates details 122 settings 122 charger battery 13 Clock settings 89 conference calls 53 configuration messages 142 connection methods Bluetooth 113 data cable 112 connections PC connection 71 connectors 15 contacts 37 adding ringing tones 38 groups 38 searching 38 settings 38 synchronising 128 content synchronising, sending, and retrieving 19 converting currencies 86 measurements 86 cookies 69 currency conversions 86 D data connections 118 synchronisation 128 wireless 116 date settings 131 date and time 88 decrypting device memory and memory card 121 device manager 123 device setup 24 dictionary 89 digital rights 149 display indicators 25 settings 130 DTMF tones 59 E e-mail 40 accounts 43 adding attach ments 42 attachments 42 deleting 43 disconnecting 43 folders 43 out-of-office reply 43 reading 42 searching 43 sending 41 settings 43 setup 41 e-mail key 35 e-mail k ey settings 1 33 EAP plug-in s ettings 14 0 using an EAP plug-in 140 encryp ting device memory and memory card 121 enhancements remote SIM access 115 environmental tips 148 equaliser 106 F feeds, news 68 file management 85 file manager 85 files flash files 108 fixed dialling 121 FM radio 108 G gallery 94 presentations 9 5 sound clips 94 156 Index
streaming links 94 general information 9 GPRS settings 138 GPS position requests 73 GPS (global positioning system) 72, 73 H headset connecting 18 help application 10 home key 35 home screen 34 settings 30 HSPA HSDPA, HSUPA 112 I images editing 98 printing 99 indicators 25 inserting memory card 14 installing applications 12 5 internet calls 56, 134 activating 5 6 making 57 settings 57 internet connection 67 See also browse r internet radio 109 favourites 110 searching for stations 110 settings 110 station directory 110 intranet browsing 71 J Java applications 124 JME Java applicatio n support 124 K key store 123 keyguard 17 keypad lock settings 132 locking 17 tones 130 keys 15 WEP keys 139 keys and parts 16 L landmarks 73 langua ge settings 131 licences 127 location information 72 lock code 21, 120, 132 locking device 120 device autolock 132 keypad 17, 132 log 65 adding numbers to Contacts 65 deleti ng 65 making a call 65 sending message s 65 settings 65 logos welcome logo 130 M making a cal l 52 Maps 75 browsing 76 changing v iews 76 compass 82 display elements 76, 81 driving routes 80 finding locations 77 location details 78 navigating 80, 81 organising places 78 organising routes 78 planning routes 82 positioning 77 saved places 78 saving places 78 saving routes 78 sending places 79 sharing locations 79 synchronising 79 traffic information 8 1 voice guidance 80 walking routes 81 measurem ents converting 86 157 Index
media radio 108 meeting requests receiving 42 memory clearing 28 web cache 69 memory card inserting 14 locking 120 passwords 120 removing 14 menu 24 message reader 47 selecting voice 4 8 messages 44 cell broadcast settings 51 configuration messages 142 other settings 51 service messages 48 text message sett ings 49 messaging folders 44, 47 Mini Map 68 MMS (multimedia mess age service) 44, 5 0 modem 71 multimedia 94 multimedia messages 4 4, 50 attachments 47 creating presentations 46 receiving 46 replying to 46 multitasking 39 music player playing 105 playlists 106 transferring music 106 N navigation tools 72 net calls barring 59 network settings 134 news feeds 68 noise cancellation 52 Nokia Messaging 40 Nokia original accessories 144 Nokia support informatio n 9 notes 90 O office applications 86 One-touch keys 131 operator selecting 134 original settings 133 out-of-offi ce reply message 4 3 Ovi by Nokia 22 Ovi Music 106 Ovi Store 71 Ovi Sync 39 P packet data restricting 142 settings 138 packet data conne ction access point settings 136 page overview 68 pairing dev ices 114 PDF rea der 87 personalisation changing language 131 display 130 tones 130 personalising your devi ce 24, 29 photos editing 98 file details 96 organising files 96 red-eye 98 tags 97 toolbar 96 viewing 95 PictBridge 99 PIN code 21 changing 132 PIN2 co de 21 playing video and audio 107 position ing settings 133 positioning in formation 72 predictive text inp ut 27, 131 presentatio ns 46, 95 printer settings 87 printing 87 images 99 profiles creating 29 personalising 29, 30 158 Index
selecting ringing tones 29 proxy settin gs 136 PTT See push t o talk PUK codes 21 Push to talk creating a channel 63 push to talk 61 answering a PTT ca ll 62 callback requests 62 channels 63 logging in and exiting 62 making a group call 62 making a one-to-one call 62 network groups 63 responding to a cha nnel invitation 64 settings 64 talking to a channe l 63 viewing the log 64 Q Quickoffice 86 R radio 108 listening 108 settings 109 stations 108 RealPlayer playing media clips 107 settings 107 viewing clip details 107 recycling 148 red-eye removal 98 remote configuration 123 remote datab ase search 38 remote lock 120 restoring original se ttings 133 ringing tones 130 3-D 3 2 contacts 38 in profiles 29 vibrating alert 130 S saving files 28 settings 28 screen sav er 31, 130 scroll key 131 searching 27 available WLANs 118 contacts 38 security Bluetooth 115 browser 69 device and SIM card 132 memory card 120 security code 21, 120 security module 123 sending files 28 using Bluetooth 113 service commands 49 service message s 48 settings 51 settings access points 135, 136 accessories 132 advanced WLAN 138 applications 142 browse r 70 call 134 camera 93 cell broadcast 51 certificate 122 clock 89 contacts 38 date 131 display 130 e-mail key 133 EAP plug-ins 140 FM radio 109 GPRS 138 internet calls 57 internet radio 110 keypad lock 132 language 131 lights 131 log 65 messages 50 network 134 packet data 138 packet data a ccess points 136 positioning 133 printer 87 RealPlayer 1 07 restoring 133 security 132 service messages 51 SIP 141 text messages 49 time 131 159 Index
tones 130 video centre 105 video sharing 5 5 voice commands 61 WEP secu rity 13 9 WLAN 137, 138 WLAN internet access points 137 WLAN securi ty 139 settings wizard 2 4 Share online 100 account sett ings 102 accounts 100 activating services 100 advanced settings 102 creating posts 100 data counters 102 one-click upload 101 Outbox 101 posting 101 service content 101 service provider settings 102 subscribing 100 tags 101 shared video 54 sharing media files online 100 shortc uts 143 signal strength 25 SIM access profile 115 SIM card inserting 12 text messages 45 SIP creating profiles 141 editing profiles 141 editing proxy servers 141 editing registration servers 142 settings 141 slide show 97 SMS (short mess age service) 44 software 126 software applicatio ns 124 software upd ates 9, 10 sound clips 94 speech 48 speed dialling 5 8 streaming links 94 support 9 switching device on and o ff 17 Symbian applicat ions 124 synchronisation 39 synchronisation of data 128 T tabs 28 talking theme 59 text changing size 130 predictive input 27 text input 26 text messa ges messages on SIM card 45 sending 44 settings 49 themes 31 downloading 31 time settings 131 time and date 88 time zone setti ngs 89 tones personalising 31 settings 130 toolbar camera 9 1 transferring content 19, 24 troublesh ooting 145 U updates 10 applications 9, 10 device software 9, 10 UPIN code 21 changing 132 uploading me dia files 100 UPUK cod e 21 USB data ca ble 112 useful information 9 V vibrating alert 130 video playing 9 3 video calls making a call 54 switching to voice call 54 Video Centre 103 video centre downloading 103 my videos 104 transferring videos 104 video feeds 104 viewing 103 160 Index
video clips details 107 playing 107 shared 54 video sharing accepting invitation 56 sharing live video 55 sharing video clips 55 virtual private network use in applications 129 voice aid See talking theme voice commands 60 changing profiles 61 launching an app lication 61 settings 61 voice func tions 57 activating 5 7 voice mail calling 53 changing number 53 volume 18 VPN access points 128 use in applications 129 W warning tones 130 web connection 67 welcome note 130 WEP keys 139 security settings 139 widgets 68 WLAN 802.1x security settings 140 access points 117 advanced settings 138 availability 117 MAC address 138 searching for networks 118 security settings 139 settings 138 WEP keys 139 WPA security settings 140 WLAN (wireless local area network) 116 WLAN wizard 117 world clock 89 WPA security settings 140 Z Zip manager 87 161 Index
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION declares that this RM-469 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Decl aratio n of Conformity can be found at http://ww w.nokia.co m/ phones/declaration_of_con formity/. é 2011 Nok ia. All rights reserved . Nokia, Nokia Connec ting People, Nokia Car e, Nokia Original Accessories logo s, Mail fo r Exchange, OVI, Eseries, and Nokia E52 ar e trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporatio n. Nokia tune is a s ound mark of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company n ames mentioned her ein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective owners. Reproduction , transfer, d istribution, or stora ge of part or all of the contents in this do cument in any form without the prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited. Nokia operates a policy of continuo us development. No kia reserve s the right to mak e changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without prior no tice. Java and all Java-based marks ar e trademarks or registered trademar ks of Sun Micros ystems, Inc. This product is licensed und er the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfo lio License ( i) for personal and noncommercial use in connection with information which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Stan dard by a consumer engaged in a personal and noncommercial activity and ( ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provi ded by a licensed video provider . No license is grante d or shall be implied for any other use. Addit iona l information, includin g that related to promo tional, interna l, and commercial us es, may be obtai ned from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegl a.com. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITT ED BY APPLICABL E LAW, UNDER NO CI RCUMSTANCES SHALL NOK IA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSOR S BE RESPONSIBL E FO R ANY LOSS OF DATA OR IN COME OR ANY S PECIAL, IN CIDENTAL , CONS EQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED "AS IS". EXCEP T AS RE Q UIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXP RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, T HE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PA RTICULAR PURPOS E, ARE MADE IN RELA TION TO THE ACCUR ACY, RELIABILITY OR C ONTENTS OF THIS DOC UMENT. NOKIA R ESERVES THE RIGH T TO REVISE THIS DOCU MENT OR WITHDRA W IT AT ANY TIME WI THOUT P RIOR NOTICE. Reverse engineering of softwa re in the device is prohibited to the extent permitted by applicable law. Insofar as this user gui de contains an y limitations on Nokia's represen tations, warra nties, dama ges and liabilities, such limitatio ns shall l ikewise limit any representations, warran ti es, damages and liabilities of Nokia's licens ors. The third-party appl ications provided wi th your device may have been created an d may be owned by persons or en tities not aff ili ated with or related to Nokia. Nokia does not own the copyrights or intellectual property rights to the third-party applications. A s such, Nokia does not take any responsibility for en d-user support, functiona lity of the applications, or the information in the application s or these materials. Nokia does no t provide a ny warranty for t he third-party applicatio ns. BY USING T HE APPLICATIONS YOU ACKNOWLEDG E THAT THE APPL ICATIONS ARE PRO VIDED AS IS WITHOU T WARRANTY O F ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, TO THE MAXIMU M EXTENT PERMIT TED BY APPLIC ABLE LAW. YOU FURTHER ACKNOWLE DGE THAT NEIT HER NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIATES MA KE ANY REPRE SENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITE D TO WARR ANTIES OF TI TLE, MERCHANTAB ILITY OR FI TNESS FOR A PARTICULA R P URPOSE, O R THAT THE APPLICATIONS WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD-PART Y PATENTS, COPYRIGH TS, TRADEMARKS, OR OTHER RIGHTS.
The availability of particular products an d applications and s ervices for these p roduc ts may vary by region. Please check with your Nokia dealer for details and availabili ty of language option s. This d evice may contain commodities, tech nology or so ftware subject to e xport laws a nd regula tions f rom the US and other countries. Div ersion contrary to law is prohibited. About Digital R ights Manageme nt When using this device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, inclu ding copyrights. Copyright protection may prevent you from copying, modifying, or transferr ing images, music, and other content. Content owners ma y use different types of digital rights manag ement (DRM) technologies to protect their intellectua l property, including copyrights. This device uses various types of DRM soft ware to access DRM-protected conten t. With this device you can access cont ent protected with WMDR M 10 and OMA DRM 2 .0. If certain DRM software fails to protect the content , content owners may ask that such DRM software's ability to access new DRM-pr otected content be revoked. Revocation may also prevent renewal of such DRM-protected content already in your device . Rev ocation of such DRM software does not affect the use of content protected with other types of DRM or the use of non-D RM-protected content. Digital rights management (D RM) protected content comes with an associated licence tha t defines your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM-protected content, to back up both the licences an d the content, use the ba ckup feature of Nokia PC Suite. Other transfer methods may not transfer the licences w hich need to be resto red with the content f or you to be able to contin ue the use of OMA DRM-protected content after the device memory is formatted. You may a lso need to restore the licences in ca se the files on y our device get co rrupted . If your device has WMDRM-protected content, both the licences and the content will be lost if the device memor y is formatted. Y ou may also lose the licences and the content if the fil es on your device get corrupted. L osing the licences or the con tent may limit your ability to use the same co ntent on your device again. For more information, contact your service provid er. Some licences may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is insert ed in the de vice. FCC/INDU STRY CA NADA NO TICE Your device may cause TV or radio interferen ce (for example, when using a telephone in clos e proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Indus try Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if such interference ca nnot be eliminated. If yo u require assistance, conta ct your local service facil ity. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Opera tion is subject to the foll owing two conditions: (1) This d evice may not cause har mful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference r eceived, including interfer ence that may cause undesired op eration. Any chan ges or modifi c ations not expressly approved by Nokia could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. /Issue 2.0 EN
Contents Safety........... .................... ................. ................7 About your device................................... ..............................7 Network services.... ........................ ..................... ................. .8 Find help................. ..................... .....................9 Support..................................................................................9 Keep your device software an d applications up to date. .9 In-device help............ ................... .................. ..................... 10 Get started....... ..................................... ..........12 SIM card, battery, chargi ng, memory card.............. .........12 Keys and parts....... .................................... ..........................15 First start-up ...................... .................. ...................... ..........17 Lock the keys.................... ....................................... ............17 Accessories....................................................... ...................17 Volume control........ ................... ................ ................... ......18 Home screen.................... ................. ..................... ..............18 Nokia Switch............................................ ...........................19 Set up your e-mail.......................................... ....................20 Antennas......... ........................ ......................... ................... .20 Nokia PC Suite............................................................ .........21 Access codes...................................................... ..................21 Tips for efficient use........................... ................................22 Ovi by Nokia...................................... ........................... .......22 Nokia E52 â The basic s ...................................24 Device setup........................................................................24 Settings wizard...................................................................24 Menu............................................. .......................................24 Display indicat ors........................... ..................... ...............25 Write text...... .................... ...................... ................ .............26 Search................................................................... ...............27 Common actions in several applications....... ...................28 Free memory.......................................................................28 Personalisa tion............... ......... ............ ..........29 Profiles ............... ............................................................ .....29 Select ringing tones. ....................... ......................... ...........29 Customise profiles............................................ ..................30 Personalise the h ome screen......... ........... ........ ......... .......30 Change the display theme..................................... ............31 Download a theme.............................................................31 Change audio themes. ................... ................... ..................31 3-D ringing tones ............................................ ...................32 New from Nok ia E serie s... .............. ................ 33 Key features...... ....................... ................. ..................... ......33 Home screen.................. ....................... ................. ..............33 One-touch keys................................... ............................. ...34 Turn to silence calls or alarms. ..........................................35 Calendar.................. ........................................... ..................35 Contacts...............................................................................37 Multitasking.... ............... .................. ............... ................... ..39 About Ovi Sync..................................... ............................ ...39 Messaging.. .............. ............... .................. ......40 Nokia Messaging..... ....................................................... .....40 E-mail service......................................................................40 E-mail......................... ..........................................................41 Messaging folders............ ...................................................44 Contents
Text and multimedia messages ................. ............... ........44 Organise messages ..................................... ........................47 Message reader................................................................... 47 Speech.................. ........................ .................... ....................48 Special message t ypes............ ............... ............. .............. .48 Cell broadcast.............. ....................................................... .49 Messaging settings.............................................................49 Phone..................... .............. ............... ...........52 Voice calls............................................................................52 Voice mail ...........................................................................53 Video calls................ .................... ........................ ................53 Video sharing......................................................................54 Internet calls............................................................. ..........56 Voice functions.......... ...................... .................. ..................57 Speed dialling................................ ..................... ................58 Call divert............... ............................. ................................. 58 Call barring..........................................................................58 Bar net calls........................................ .................................59 Send DTMF tones............ ............................................. ........59 Talking theme.....................................................................59 Voice commands.................. ................................... ............60 Push to talk.......................... ............................. ..................61 Log............. ................. .................... ..................... ................ .64 Internet.......................... ................... .............67 Browser.......... .................... ...................... ................ ............67 Browse the intranet ............................. .............. ...............71 Ovi Store........................................... ...................................71 Connect your computer to web. .................................. ......71 Travelling...................... ............. ............... .....72 Positioning (GPS)............................................ ....................72 Maps............................................. ........................................75 Nokia Office Tools. .................. ....................... .84 Active notes............. ........................................ ....................84 Calculator................... .................................... ......................84 File manager.................................... .................................. .85 Quickoffice........................... ......................................... .......86 Converter.............................................................................86 Zip manager........................................................................87 PDF reader...........................................................................8 7 Printing................... ............................................................. 87 Clock..................................................................................... 88 Dictionary............................................................................89 Notes ............................... ................................................... .90 Media................................................. .............91 Camera................................. ................................................91 Gallery..................................................................................94 Photos..................... .................................................... .........95 Share online......................................................................100 Nokia Video Centre...........................................................103 Music player.................................... ............................ ......105 RealPlayer.............. .......................... ............................ ......106 Recorder............................................................... .............107 Flash player.......................................................................108 FM radio................................................. ............................108 Nokia Internet Radi o........................................................109 Connectivity. ................... .................... ..........112 Fast packet data........ ................... ................. ....................1 12 Data cable..................... ........................ .............................1 12 Bluetooth....... ...................... .................. ...................... ......113 SIM access profile............ .................. ...................... ..........115 Wireless L AN .................... ........................ .................... .....116 Connection manager........................................................118 Contents
Security and data management...................120 Lock the device................................................. ................120 Memory card security.......................................................120 Encryption....................................................... ..................121 Fixed dialling........... ...................... .................. ..................121 Certificate manager............ .............................................. 122 View and edit security modules.............. ........................123 Remote configuration...................................................... 123 Application manager... ................................ .....................124 Licenses................................................ .............................126 Sync............................... ............................................ .........128 Mobile VPN............................ ......................... ...................128 Settings................ ........... ........... .............. ....130 General settings.......... ..................................... .................130 Telephone settings........ ....................................... ............133 Connection settings... ........................... ......................... ...135 Application settings............................ .................. ...........142 Shortcuts.................. ............... ........... ..........143 General shortcuts.. ..................... ............... .................. ......143 Noki a or igi nal acce ssori es .................. .........144 Practical rules about accessories...................... ........... ...144 Battery...............................................................................144 Troubleshooti ng....... .................. ..................145 Protect the en vironment ..............................148 Save energy........................ ...............................................148 Recycle...............................................................................148 Product and safety information .......... .........149 Index..................... ............... ................ ........155 Contents
Safety Read these simple guidelines . Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES F IRST Obey all local laws. Alwa ys keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while dr iving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be susce ptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF I N RESTRICTED AREAS Follow any restrictions. Sw itch the device off in aircraft, near medical equipment, fuel, chemicals, or blas ting areas. QUALIFIED SERVI CE Only qualified personne l may install or repair this product. ACCESSORIE S AND BATTERI ES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect inc ompatible prod ucts. WATER-RESI STANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the UMTS 900 and 2100 MHz networks, and GSM 850, 900, 1800, and 1900 MHz networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. Your device support s severa l connectiv ity methods and like computers may be exposed to viruses a nd other harmful content. Exercise caution with message s, connectivity requests, brow sing, and downloads. Only install and use services an d software from trustworthy sources that offer adequat e security and protection, such as applications th at are Symb ian Signed or have passed the Java Verified⢠testing. Co nsider installing antivirus and other security software on your device and any connected computer. Your device may hav e preins talled bookmarks and links for third-party internet sites and may allow you to access third-party sites. These are not affiliat ed with Nokia, and Nokia does not endorse or assume liability for them. If you access such sites, take precautions for secu rity or content. Warning: To use any feat ures in this device, other than the alarm clock, the dev ice must be switched on. Do 7 Safety
not switch the device on wh en wireless device use may cause interference or danger. When using this device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright prot ection may prevent some images, music, and other content from being copied, modified, or transferred. Make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. When connecting to an y other device, read it s user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. The images in this guide may differ from your device display. Refer to the user guide for other important information about your d evice. Network services To use the device you must have service from a wireless service provider. Som e features are not ava ilable on all networks; other features may require that you make specific arrangements with yo ur service provider to use them. Network services inv o lve transmission of data. Check with your service provid er for details about fees in your home network and when roaming on other networks. Your service provid er can explain what charges will apply. Some networks ma y have limi tations that affect how you can u se some featur es of this device requiring network support such as support for specific technologies like WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and S SL) that run on TCP/IP protocols and la nguage-dependent characters . Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not ac tivated in your device. If s o, these features will not appear o n your device men u. Your device may also have customized items such as menu names, menu o rder, and icons. 8 Safety
Find help Support When you want to lea rn more about how to use you r product or you are un sure how your device should function, go to www.nokia.com/support , or using a mobile device, nokia.mobi/support. Y ou can also select Menu > Help > Help in your device. If this does not resolve your issue, do one of the following: ⢠Switch off the device, and remove the battery. A fter about a minute, replace the battery, an d switch on the device. ⢠Restore the original factory settings. ⢠Update your device software. If your issue remains unsolve d, contact Nokia for repair options. Go to www.nokia-asia.com/repair. B efore sending your device for repair , always back up the d ata in your device. Keep your device software and applications up to date About device software and application updates With device software upda tes and application updates, you can get new features and enhanced functions for your device. Updating the software ma y also improve your device performance. 9 Find help
It is recommended that you back up yo ur personal data before updating your device software. Warning: If you install a software update, you cannot use the device, even to make emergency calls, until the installation is completed and the device is restarted. Downloading software updates may involve the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Make sure that the device battery has enough power, or connect the charger before starting the u pdate. After you update your device software or a pplication s, the instructions in the user guide ma y no longer be up to da te. Update device software and applications using your device You can check if there are updates available for your device software or for indi vidual applicati ons, and then download and install them to your device ( network service). You can also set your device to automatically check for upda tes and notify you when impo rtant or recommended updates are available. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > SW update . If there are available update s, select which update s to download and inst all, and select . Set your device to automatically che ck for updates â Select Options > Settings > Auto-check for up dates . Update software using your PC Nokia Software Updat er is a PC applicat ion that enables you to update your device so ftware. To update your device software, you need a compatible PC, broa dband internet access, and a compat ible US B data cable to connect your device to the PC. To get more informat ion and to download the Nokia Software Updater application, go to www.nokia- asia.com/softwareupdate. In-device help Your device contains instructions to help to use the applications in your device. To open help texts from the main menu, select Menu > Help > Help and the application for which you want to read instructions. When an application is op en, to access the help text for the current view, select Options > Help . When you are read ing the instructions, to change the size of the help text, select Op tions > Decrease font size or Increase font si ze . 10 Find help
You may find links to related topics at the end of the help text. If you select an underlined word, a short explanation is displayed. Help texts us e the following indicators: Link to a related help topic. Link to the application being discussed. When you are reading the inst ructions, to switch between help texts and the application that is open in the background, select Options > Show open ap ps. and th e desired application. 11 Find help
Get started Your Nokia E52 is a business device t hat adapts to your free time as well. Read these first p ages to get started, t hen use the rest of the guide to explore what new features Nokia E52 brings to you. SIM card, battery, charging, memory card Put the pieces together, and ge t started with your Nokia E52. Insert the SIM card and battery Important: Do not use a mini-UICC SIM ca rd, also known as a micro-SIM card, a micro-SIM card with an adapter, or a SIM card that has a mini-UICC cutout (see figure) in this device. A micro SIM card is smaller than the standard SIM card. Th is device does not support the use of micro-SIM cards and use of incompatible SIM cards may damage the card or the de vice, and may corrupt data stored on the card. Safe removal. Always sw itch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. 1. To open the back cover of the device, with the back facing you, unlock the back co ver release latch, and lift the back cover. 2. If the battery is inserted, li ft the battery in the direction of the arrow to remove it. 3. Insert the SIM card . Ensure the contact area on the card is facing the connectors on the device an d that the bevelled corner is facing the bottom of the device. 12 Get started
4. Align the contacts of the ba ttery with the corresponding connec tors on the battery compartment, and inse rt the battery in the direction of the arrow. 5. To replace the back cover, direct the top locking catches toward thei r slots, and press down until t he cover locks into place. Charge the battery Your battery has been partia lly charged at the factory. If the device indicates a low charge, do the following: 1. Connect the charger to a wall outlet. 2. Connect the charger plug to the USB port in the device. 3. When the device indicates a full charge, disconnect the charger from the device, th en from the wall outlet. You do not need to charge th e battery for a specific length of time, and you can use the device while it is charging. If the battery is completely discha rged, it may take several minutes before the chargi ng indicator appears on the display or before an y calls can be made. Charging with the USB data cable Charging with the U SB data cable is slower th an charging with the charger. Cha rging with the USB data ca ble may not work if you use a USB h ub. USB hubs may be incompatible for chargi ng a USB device. Charging with the U SB data cable may take a long time if the battery is completely discha rged. When the USB data cable is connected, you can transfer data at the same time as charging. 1. Connect a compatible USB device to your device using a compatible USB da ta cable. Depending on the type of the device that is used for charging, it may take a while for charging to start. 2. If the device is switched on, select from the available USB mod es. 13 Get started
Insert the memory card Use a memory card to save the memory on your device. You can also back up informat ion from your device to the memory card. Use only compatible microSD and microSDHC cards approved by Nokia for use with this device. Nokia uses approved industry standards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully comp atible with this device. Incompatible cards may damage th e card and the device and corrupt data st ored on the card. Keep all memory cards out of the reach of small children. Check the compatibility of a memory card with its manufacturer or provider. A compatible memory card may be included in the sales package. The memory card may be already inserted in the device. If not, do the following: 1. To prevent the battery from coming loose, place the device so that the back cover is facing up. 2. Remove the back cover. 3. Insert the memory card in the slot with the cont act area first. Ensure the con tact area is facing the connectors on the device. 4. Push the card in until it locks into place. 5. Replace the back cover. Remove the memory card Important: Do not remove the memory card durin g an operation when the card is being accessed. Doing so may damage the memory card and the device, and corrupt data stored on the card. 1. Press the power key briefly, and select Remove memory card . 2. To prevent the battery from coming loose, place the device so that the back cover is facing up. 3. Remove the back cover. 4. Press the end of the memory card to release it from the memory card slot, and remove the card. 5. Replace the back cover. 14 Get started
Keys and parts Keys and parts 1 â Power key 2 â Light sensor 3 â Selection key. Press the selection key to perform the function displayed above it. 4 â Home key 5 â Call key 6 â Calendar key 7 â Microphone 8 â E-mail key 9 â End key 10 â Backspace key. Press the key to delete items. 11 â Selection key 12 â Navi⢠key; hereafter referred to as scroll key. Press the scroll key to make a selection, or to scroll left, right, up, or down on the display. Press and hold the scroll key to accelerate the scrolling. 13 â Earpiece 14 â Secondary camera 15 â Heads et connecto r 1 â Flash 2 â Main camera 3 â Loudspeaker 15 Get started
Keys and parts (sid es) 1 â Micro USB connector 2 â Volume up/Zoom in key 3 â Mute key/Push to talk key 4 â Volume down/Zoom out key 5 â Capture key The surface of this device is nickel-free. During extended operation such as an activ e video call and high speed data connection, th e device may feel warm. In most cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect the device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorised service facility. Keep your device away from magnets or magneti c fields. One-touch keys With One-touch keys, you can access app lications and tasks quickly. To change the assig ned applicat ion or task, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Personalisation > One- touch keys . Your service provider may have assigned applications to the keys, in which case you cann ot change them. 1 â Home key 2 â E-mail key 3 â Calendar key Key Press quickly Press and hold Home key (1) Access the home screen View the list of active applications E-mail ke y (2) Open your defa ult mailbox Create a new e- mail message Calendar key (3) Open the Calendar application Create a new meeting entry 16 Get started
First start-up 1. Press and hold the power key until you feel the device vibrate. 2. If prompted, enter the PIN code or lock code, and select OK . 3. When prompted, enter the country in which you are located an d the current date and time. To find your country, enter the first letters of the country name. It is importa nt to select the correct country, because scheduled calendar entries may change if you change the country later an d the new country is located in a different time zone. 4. The Phone setup application opens. To set up an application, select Start . To bypass setting up applications, select Skip rep eatedly. To open the Phone setup application later, select Menu > Help > Phone setup . To configure the vari ous settings in your device, use the wizards available in t he ho me screen and the Settings wizard application. When you sw itch the device on, it may recognise the SIM card pr ovider and configure some settings automatically. Y ou ca n also contact y our service provider for the correct settings. You can switch the device on without insertin g a SIM card. The device starts up in the Offline profile, and you cannot use the network-dep end ent phone functions. To switch the device off, press an d hold the power ke y. Lock the keys When the device or keypad is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. The keypad of your device locks automatically to p revent accidental keypres ses. To change the length of time after wh ich the keypad is locked, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Sett ings and General > Security > Phone and SIM card > Ke ypad autolock period . To lock the keys manually in the home screen, press the left selection key and then the right selection key. To lock the keys manually in the menu or in an open application, press the power key briefly, and select Lock keypad . To unlock the keys, pr ess th e left selection key and then the right selection key. Accessories You can connect you r device to a range of comp atible accessories. Check the availa bility of the approved accessories with your dealer. 17 Get started
Connect the headset Warning: When you us e the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. Connect the co mpatible headset to the heads et connector of your device. Attach a wrist strap Thread the wrist stra p, and tighten it. Volume control To adjust the earpiece volume during a phone call or the volume of the media applicat ions, use the volume keys. Home screen In the home screen, you can quickly access your most frequently used app lications, and view at a glance if you have missed calls or new messages. Whenever you see the icon, scroll right to access a list of available actions. To close the list, scroll left. The home screen consists of the following: 1. Application shortcuts. To access an application, select the shortcut of the application. 2. Information area. To check an item displayed i n the information area, select the item. 3. Notification area. To view the notifications, scroll to a box. A box is only visible if there are items in it. You can define two separate home screens for different purposes, for example, one sc reen to show your busin ess e-mail and notifications, and another to show your personal e-mail . This way, you do not have to see busine ss- related messages outside office hours. 18 Get started
To switch between the home screens, select . To define which items and shortcuts you want in the home screen, and to set the ap pearance of the home screen, select Menu > Ctrl. panel and Modes . Nokia Switch Transfer content You can use the Switch ap plic ation to copy content such as phone numbers, addresses, calendar item s, and images from your previous Nokia device to y our device. The type of content that can be transferred depends on the model of the device from which you wan t to transfer content. If that devi ce supports synchron isation, you can also synchronise data between the devices. Your device notifies you if the other device is not compatible. If the other device cannot be switched on without a SIM card, you can insert your S IM card in it. When your device is switched on without a SI M card, the Offline profile is automatically activated, and transfer can be done. Transfer content for the first time 1. To retrieve data from the other device for the first time, on your device, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Switch . 2. Select the connection type y ou want to use to transf er the data. Both devices must su pport the selected connection type. 3. If you select Bluetooth connecti vity as the connection type, connect the two devices. To have your device search for devices with Blue tooth connectivity, select Continue . Select the device from which you want to transfer content. You are as ked to enter a code on your device. Enter a code (1-16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the ot her device, and select OK . The devices are now paired. Some earlier Nokia devices may not have the Switch application. In this case, the Switch application is sent to the other device as a me ssage. To install the S witch application on the other device, open the message, and follow the instruction s on the display. 4. On your device, select the con tent you want to tran sfer from the other device. When the transfer has starte d, you can cancel it and continue later. Content is tr ansferred from the memory of the other device to the corresponding location in your device. The transfer time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. Synchronise, retrieve, or send content Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Switch . After the first transfer, select from the following to start a new transfer , depending on the model: to synchronise content between your device and the other device, if the other device supports synchronisation. The synchronisation i s two-way. If an item is deleted in one device, it is deleted in both. You cannot restore deleted items with synchronisation. to retrieve content from the other device to your device. With retrieval, content is transferred from the 19 Get started
other device to your device. You may be asked to keep or delete the original content in the other device, depending on the device model. t o s e n d c o n t e n t f r o m y o u r d e v i c e t o y o u r o t h e r d e v i c e If you cannot send an item, dependin g on the type of t he other device, you can add the item to the Nokia folder, to C:\Nokia or E:\Nokia in your device. When you select the folder to transfer, the items are synchronised in the corresponding folder in the other device, and vice versa. Use shortcuts to repeat a transfer After a data transfer, you can save a shortcut with the transfer setti ngs to the ma in view to repeat the same transfer later. To edit the shortcut, select Options > Shortcut settings . For example, you can cr eate or chan ge the name of the shortcut. A transfer log is shown after every transfer. To view the log of the last transfer, select a shortcut in the main view and Options > View log . Handle transfer conflic ts If an item to be transferred has been edited in both devices, the device attempts to merge the changes automatic ally. If this is no t possible, th ere is a transfer conflict. Select Check one by one , Priority to this phone , or Priority to other phone to solve the conflict. Set up your e-mail Your Nokia Eseries de vice works the sa me hours as you, and at the same speed. Keep your e-ma il, contac ts, and calendar synchronised - qui ckly and conveniently with high speed connections. When sett ing up y our e-mail, you may be promp ted for the following information: user name, e-mail type, incoming mail server, incoming mail server port, outgoing mail server, outgoing mail server port, password, or access point. With the E-mail wiza rd, you can set up business e-mail accounts, such as Microsoft Exchange, or internet e-mai l accounts, such as Google's e-mail services. The wizard supports POP/IMAP, and ActiveSync protocols. If you are setting up your business e-mail, ask your company IT department for de tails. If you are setting up your internet e-mail, see yo ur e-mail service providerâÂÂs website for details. To start the E- mail wizard: 1. In the home screen, scro ll to the E-mail wizard. 2. Enter yo ur e-mail a ddress and password. If the wizard is not able to configure your e-mail settings automatically, select your e-mail a ccount type, and enter the related settings. Tip: If you have not configured your mailbox, press the e-mail key to start the E-mail wizard. If your device contains addit ional e-mail clients, those are offered to you when you start th e E-mail wizard. Antennas Your device may have intern al and external antennas. Avoid touch ing the antenna area unnecessarily while the antenna is tr ansmitting or receiving. Contact with 20 Get started
antennas affects the communication qu ality and may cause a higher power level during operation and may reduce the battery life. Nokia PC Suite Nokia PC Suite is a set of applications that you can install to a compatible PC. N okia PC Suite grou ps all available applications in a la uncher window from which you can run the applicat ions. Nokia PC Su ite may be included on a memory card if one is pr ovided with your device. You can use Nokia PC Suite to synchron ise contacts, calendar, and to-do and other notes between your device and a compatible PC applicat ion, such as Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes. You can also use Nokia PC Suite to transfer bookmarks between your device and compatible browsers, and transfer imag es and video clips between your device and compatible PCs. Note: Pay attention to sync hronisation settings. Data deletion as part of no rmal synchronisation p rocess is determined by the settings selected. To use Nokia PC Suite, you n eed a PC that runs Microsoft Windows XP (SP2) or Windows Vista, and is compatible with a USB data cable or with Bluetooth connectivity. Nokia PC Suite does not work with Macintosh. For further information on No kia PC Suite, see its help function or the Nokia website. To install Nokia PC Suite: 1. Ensure the memory card is inserted in your Nokia E52. 2. Connect the USB cable. Yo ur PC recognises the new device and installs the nece ssary drivers. This can take several minutes to complete. 3. Select Mass storage as the USB connection mode in your device. Your device is displayed in Windows file browser as a Remo vable Disk. 4. Open the root of the me mory card drive with the Windows file browser, an d select the PC Suite installation. 5. The installation is star ted. Follow the displayed instructions. Tip: To update Nokia PC Suite, or if you have problems when installing Nokia PC Suite from the memory card, copy the installa tion file to your PC, and start the installat ion from your PC. Access codes If you forget any o f the access codes, contact your service provider . ⢠Personal identification number (PIN) code â This code protects your SIM card again st unauthorised use. The PIN code (4 - 8 digits) is us ually supplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. 21 Get started
⢠UPIN code â This code may be supplied with the USIM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by 3G mobile phones. ⢠PIN2 code â This code (4 - 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, an d is required to access some functions in your device. ⢠Lock code (also known as security code) â The lock code helps you to protect your device against unauthorised use. The preset code is 12345. You can create and change the co de, and set the device to request the code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your device. If you forget the code and your device is locked, your device will require service. Additional charges may a pply, and all the personal data in your devi ce may be deleted. For more information, co ntact a Nokia Care point or your device dealer. ⢠Personal Unblocking Key (PUK) code and PUK2 code â These codes (8 digits ) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PI N2 code, respectively. If the codes are not supplied wit h the SIM card, contact the network service provider whose SIM card is in your device. ⢠UPUK code â This code (8 di gits) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, contact the network service provider whose USIM card is in your device. ⢠International Mobile Equipment Iden tity (IMEI) number â This number (15 or 17 digits) is used to identify valid devices on the GSM network. Devices that are, for example, stolen, can be blocked from accessing the network. The IMEI number for your device can be found under the battery. Tips for efficient use To switch profiles, press the power key briefly. To switch to the Si lent profile, press and hold # . To search for items in your device or on the internet (network service), select Menu > Applications > Search . When bro wsing w eb page s with the Web browser application or maps in th e Maps a pplication, press * to zoom in and # to zoom out. Ovi by Nokia With Ovi by Nokia, you can fi nd new places and services, and stay in touch wi th your friends. You ca n do, for example, the following: ⢠Download games, ap plications, videos, an d ringtones to your device ⢠Find your way with free walk and drive navigati on, plan trips, and view locati ons on a map ⢠Get a free Ovi Mail account ⢠Get music Some items are free of charge, others you may need to pay for. The available services may also vary by country or region, and not all languages are supported. To access Nokia's Ovi s ervices, go to www. ovi.com, and register your own Nokia account. 22 Get started
For more information, go to the support section at www.ovi.com. 23 Get started
Nokia E52 â The basics Device setup With the Phone setup application, you can do the following, for example: ⢠Define the regional settings , such as the lang uage of the device. ⢠Transfer data from your old device. ⢠Personalise your device. ⢠Set up your mail accou nts. ⢠Sign up for the My Nokia service to receive free tips, tricks, and support for your Nokia device. You will also receive notifications when new software updat es are available for your device. ⢠Activate Ovi services. When you switch on your device for the first time, the Phone setup application open s. To open the ap plication later, select Menu > Help > Phone setup . Settings wizard Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Sett. wizard . Use Settings wizard to de fine e-mail and connection settings. The avai lability of the items in Settings wizard depends on the features of the device, SIM card, service provider, and the data in th e Settings wizard da tabase. To start Sett ings wizard, select Start . To get the best results when using the settings wi zard, keep your SIM card inserted in the device. If the SIM card is not inserted, follow the instructions on the display. Select from the following: ⢠Operator â Define the operator-specific setting s, such as MMS, internet, WAP, and streaming se ttings. ⢠E-mail setup â Configure a POP, IMAP, or Mail for Exchange account. ⢠Push to talk â Configure push to talk setti ngs. ⢠Video sharing â Configure vide o sharing settings. The settings available for editing may vary. Menu Select Menu . The menu is a start ing point from which you can open all applications in the device or on a memory card. The menu contains applications and folders, which are groups of similar applications. All applications you install in the device yourself are by default saved in the Applications folder. To open an application, select the applicat ion, that is, s croll to it, and press the scroll key. 24 Nokia E52 â The basics
To switch between the open applications, press and hold the home key, and select an application. Leaving applications runnin g in the background increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Change Menu view â View applications in a list or a grid. ⢠Memory details â View the memory consumption of different applications and data stored on the device or memory card and to check the amount of free memory. ⢠New folder â Create a new folder. ⢠Rename â Rename a new folder. ⢠Move â Rearrange the folder. Scroll to the appl ication you want to move, and select Move . A check mark is placed beside the application. Scroll to a new location, and select OK . ⢠Move to folder â Move a n application to a differen t folder. Scroll to the applicat ion you wa nt to move , and select Move to folder , the new folder, and OK . ⢠Download applications â Download applications from the web. Display indicators The device is being us ed in a UMTS network (network service). The battery charge level. The higher the bar, the stronger the charge in the battery. You have one or more un read messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received new e-mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages waitin g to be sent in the Outbox folder in Messaging. You have one or more missed phone calls. The keys of the device are locked. An alarm is act ive. You have activated the Silen t profile, and the device does not ring for an incoming call or message. Bluetooth con nectivity is ac tivated. A Bluetooth connection is established. When the indicator is blinking, yo ur device is trying t o connect with an other device. A GPRS packet data co nnection is available (network service). indicates that the connection is active. indicates that the connection is on hold. An EGPRS packet data co nnection is available (network service). indicates that the connection is active. indicates that the connection is on hold. A UMTS packet data connection is available (network service). indicates that the connection 25 Nokia E52 â The basics
is active. indicates that the connection is on hold. High-speed packet access (HSPA) is supported an d available (network service). The icon may vary between regions. indicates that the connection is active. indicates that the connection is on hold. You have set the device to scan for wireless LANs (WLAN), and a WLAN is available. A WLAN connection is active in a network th at does not have encryption. A WLAN connection is acti ve in a network that has encryption. Your device is connected to a computer with a USB data cable. The second phone line is being used (network service). All calls are forwarded to another number. If you have two phone lines, a number indicates the active line. A headset is connected to the device. A handsfree car kit is connected to the device. A loopset is connected to the device. A text phone is con nected to the device. Your device is synchronising. You have an ongoin g push to talk ( PTT) connection. Your push to ta lk connection is in do not disturb mode, because the ringing type of your device is set to Beep once or Sile nt , or you have an incoming or ongoing phone call. In this mode, you cannot make PTT calls. Write text The input methods provided in the device may vary according to different sales market s. Traditional text input indicates traditional text input. and indi cate the uppercase and lowercase. indicates the sentence case, that is, the first letter of the sentence is written in uppercase and all the other letters are automatically writte n in lowercase. indicates number mode. To write text with the keypad, press a number key, 2-9, repeatedly until the desired character is displayed. There are more characters av ailable for a number key than are printed on the key. If the next letter is locat ed on the same key as the present one, wait until th e cursor is displayed, and enter the letter. To insert a number, press and hold the number key. 26 Nokia E52 â The basics
To switch between the different character cases a nd modes, press # . To erase a character, press the backspace key. Press and hold the backspace key to erase more than one charac ter. To enter the most common pu nctuation marks, pre ss 1 repeatedly until the desired punctuation mark is displayed. To add special characters, press and hold * . To add a smiley, press * , and select More em oticons and a smiley. To insert a space, pr ess 0 . To insert a line break, press 0 three times. Predictive text input With predictive input, you can enter any letter with a single keypress. Predictive text i nput is based on a built- in dictionary. To activate or deactivate pr edictive text input, select Options > Inpu t options . The indicator is displayed. When y ou start writing a w ord, your device suggests possi ble words. When the correct word is found, press the space key ( 0 ) to confirm it and to a dd a space. While writi ng, you can scro ll down to access a li st of suggested words. If the desire d word is on the list, select the word. If the ? character is displa yed after the word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To add a word to the dictionary, select Sp ell , enter the wo rd using traditional text input, and select OK . When the dictionary is full, the new word replaces the oldest added word. To deactivate automati c word completion, select Options > Input options > Settings . To change the wr iting lang uage, select Options > Input options > Writing language . Search About Search Select Menu > Applications > Search . Search (network service) enables you to use vario us internet-based search services to find, for example, websites and images. The conten t and availability of the services may vary. Start a search Select Menu > Applications > Search . To search the contents of your mobile device, enter search terms in the search field, or browse the content categories. While you enter the search term s, the results are org anised into categories. To search for w eb pages on the internet, select Search the Internet or a search p rovider, and enter yo ur search terms in the search field. The search provider you selected is set as your default internet search provider. To change the default search provider, select Options > Settings > Search services . To change the country or re gion setting to find more search providers, select Opt ions > Settings > Country or region . 27 Nokia E52 â The basics
Common actions in several applications You can find the following ac tions in several applications: To change the profile, or switch off or lock the device, press the power key briefly. If an application consists of several tabs (see figure), open a tab by scrolling right or left. To save the settings that you have configured in an application , select Ba ck . To save a file, select Options > Save. There are different saving options depending on the application you use. To send a file, select Options > Send . You can send a file in an e-mail or multimedia message, or using different connectivity methods. To copy, press and hold t he shift key, and select the text with the scroll key. Press and hold the shift key, and select Copy . To paste, s croll to where you want to paste the text, press and hold t he shift key, an d select Paste . This m ethod may not work in a pplications t hat have their own copy and paste commands. To select diffe rent items, such as messages, files, or contacts, scroll to the item you want to select. Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to select one item or Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark a ll to select all items. Tip: To select almost all items, first s elect Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark all , then select the items you do not want, and Options > Mark/ Unma rk > Unmark . To select an object (for ex ample, an attachment in a document) scroll to t he object so that square markers appear on each side of the object. Free memory To view how much memory is availa ble for different data types, select Menu > Office > File mgr. . Many features of the device use memory to st ore data. The device notifies you if available memory is low. To free memory, transfer data to an al ternative memory (if available) or compatible computer. To remove data you no long er need, use File manager or the respective a pplication. You can remo ve the followin g: ⢠Messages in the folders in Messaging and retrieved e- mail messages from the mailbox ⢠Saved web pages ⢠Contact information ⢠Calendar notes ⢠Applications shown in Applic ation manager that you do not need ⢠Installation files (with .sis or .sisx file extensions) of installed applications. Back up the installation files to a compatible computer. ⢠Images and video clips in Phot os. Back up the files to a compatible computer using Nokia PC Suite. 28 Nokia E52 â The basics
Personalisation You can personalise your device by, for examp le, adjusting the various tone s, background im ages, and screen savers. Profiles Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Profiles . You can adjust and customise the ringing tones, alert tones, and other dev ice tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. The active profile is shown at the top of the display in the home screen. However, if the active profile is General, only today's date is shown. To create a new profile, select Options > Create new , and define the settings. To customise a profile, select a profile and Options > Personalise . To activate a profile, select a profile and Options > Activate . To set the profile to be active unt il a certain time within the next 24 hours, scroll to the profile, select Option s > Timed , and set the time. When the time ex pires, the profile changes back to the previously ac tive non-timed profile. When the profile is timed, is displayed in the home screen. The Offline profile cannot be timed. To delete a profile that you created, select Options > Delete profile . You cannot delete the predefined profiles. When the Offline profile is ac tivated, your connection to the cellular network is closed. All radio frequency signals between the device and the cellular network are prevented. If you try to send a message, it is placed in the Outbox folder, and is sent only when another profile is activated. You can also us e your device without a S IM card. If you remove the SIM card, the Offline profile is activated. Importa nt: In the Offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Calls may still be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To make calls, you must firs t activate the phon e function by changing profiles. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code. When you use the Offline pr ofile, you can still use a wireless LAN (WLAN), for example, to read your mail or browse the internet. You can also use Bluetoot h connectivity. Remember to comply with any applicable safety requirements when yo u establish and use WLAN or Bluetooth connections. Select ringing tones To set a ringing tone for a profile, select Options > Personalise > Ringing tone . Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for downloading tones using the browser. Any downloaded tones are saved to Gallery. 29 Personalisation
To play the ringing tone for a selected contact group only, select Opt ions > Personali se > Alert for , and select the desired group. Phone calls coming from outs ide that group have a s ilent alert. To change the message tone, select Option s > Personalise > Message alert tone . Customise profiles Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Profiles . Select Options > Personalise and from the following: ⢠Ringing tone â Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of book marks for downloading tones using the browser. If you have two alternate phone lines in use, you can sp ecify a ringing tone for each line. ⢠Video call tone â Select a ringing tone for video calls. ⢠Say caller's name â When you select this option and someone from your contacts list calls you, the device sounds a ringin g tone that is a combination of the spoken name of the contact and the selected ringing tone. ⢠Ringing type â Select how you wa nt the ring ing tone to alert. ⢠Ringing volume â Select the volume level of the ringing tone. ⢠Message alert tone â Select a to ne for received text messages. ⢠E-mail alert tone â Select a tone for received e-mail messages. ⢠Vibrating alert â Set the device to vibrate when you receive a call or message. ⢠Keypad tones â Select the vo lume level of the keypad tones. ⢠Warning tones â Deactivate the warning tones. Th is setting also a ffects the tones of some games and Java⢠applications. ⢠Alert for â Set the device to ring only upon calls from phone numbers that belong to a selected contact group. Phone calls coming from outside that group have a silent alert. ⢠PTT call alert tone â Select a ringing tone for PTT calls. ⢠Push to talk status â Set the PTT status to ea ch profile. ⢠Profile name â Y ou can giv e a na me t o a new pro f ile or rename an existing prof ile. The General and Offline profiles cannot be renamed. Personalise the home screen Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Modes . To change the name of the current home screen, select Options > Rename mode . To select which applications and notifications you want to see in the home screen, select Home screen applications . To change the theme of the ho me screen currently in use, select General them e . To change the background image of the home screen currently in use, select Wallpaper . 30 Personalisation
To change from one home screen to another, scroll to Current mode , and select Op tions > Change . Change the display theme Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Themes . Select from the following: ⢠General â Change the theme us ed in all applications. ⢠Menu view â Change the them e used in the main menu. ⢠Standby â Chan ge the them e used in the home screen. ⢠Wallpaper â Change the background image of the home screen. ⢠Power saver â Select an anim ation for the power saver. ⢠Call image â Change the image displayed during calls. To activate or deacti vate the theme effects, select General > Options > Theme effect s . Download a theme Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Themes . To download a theme, select General > Download themes > Options > Go to > New web page . Enter the web address from which you want to download your theme. Once the theme is downloaded, you can pr eview or activate the theme. To preview a theme, select Options > Preview . To activate a th eme, select Option s > Set . Change audio themes You can set sounds for various device events. The sounds can be tones, speech, or a combination of both. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Themes and Audio themes . To change the current audio theme, select Active audio theme . To add 3-D effects to the audio theme, selec t Option s > 3-D ringing tones . To create a new audio theme, select Options > Save theme . To set a sound for an event, select an event group , such as Messaging events. Select the desired event and from the following: ⢠Silent â Deactivate the sound of the device event. ⢠Tone â Set a tone as th e sound for the dev ice event. ⢠Speech â Set a synthesised voice tag as the sound for the device event. Enter th e desired text, and select OK . Select an event group, such as Messaging events. Select the desired event, Options , and from the following: ⢠Play â Play the sound before activating it. ⢠Activate sounds â Activate all the sounds in the event group. ⢠Deactivate sounds â Deactivate all the sounds in the event group. 31 Personalisation
3-D ringing tones Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > 3-D tones . To enable three-dimensional (3-D) sound effects for ringing tones, select 3-D ringing tone effects > On . Not all ringing tones s u pport 3âÂÂD effects. To change the 3âÂÂD effect that is a pplied to the ringing tone, select Sound trajector y and the desired effect. To modify the 3âÂÂD effect, select from the following: ⢠Trajectory sp eed â Select the speed at which sound moves from one direction to an other. This setting is not available for all effects. ⢠Reverberation â Select the desired effect to adjust the amount of echo. ⢠Doppler effect â Select On to set the ring ing tone sound higher when you are closer to your device, and lower when you are farther away. This setting is not available for all effects. To listen to the ringing tone with the 3âÂÂD effect, select Options > Play tone . To adjust the volume of the ringing tone, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Profiles and Options > Personalise > Ringing volume . 32 Personalisation
New from Nokia Eseries Your new Nokia Eseries device contains new versions of the Calendar, Cont acts, and E-mail applicat ions, as well a s a new home screen. Key features Your new No kia E52 helps y ou manage your busines s and personal information. Some of the key features are highlighted h ere: Read and reply to your e-mail while on the move. Stay up-to-date a nd plan your meetings with the Calendar application. Manage your business partners and free time friends with the Contacts application. Connect to a wireless LA N (WLAN) with the WLAN wizard application. Work with documents, spre adsheets, and presentations with th e Quickoffice application. Find points of interest with th e Maps application. Switch from business to personal mode. Edit the appearance and se tup of your home screen with the Modes applicat ion. Browse your company int ranet with the Intranet application. Move your contact and calendar inform ation from a previous device to your Nokia E52 with the Switch application. Check the available updates for applications and download them to your device with the Software update ap plication. Encrypt your device or memor y card t o prevent outsiders from accessing your important information. Home screen In the home screen, you can quickly access your most frequently used features and applications, and view at a glance if you have missed calls or new messages. Home screen In the home screen, you can quickly access your most frequently used applications, and view at a glan ce if you have missed calls or n ew messages. 33 New from Nokia Eseries
Whenever you see the icon, scroll right to access a list of available actions. To close the list, scroll left. The home screen consists of the following: 1. Application shortcuts. To access an application, select the shortcut of the application. 2. Information area. To check an item displayed in the information area, select the item. 3. Notification area. To view the notifications, scroll to a box. A box is only visible if there are items in it. You can define two separate home screens for different purposes, for example, one sc reen to show your business e-mail and no tifications, and an other to sho w your personal e-mail. This way, yo u do not have to see busin ess- related messages outside office hours. To switch between the home screens, s elect . To define which items a nd shortcuts you want in the home screen, and to set the appe arance of the home screen, select Menu > Ctrl. panel and Modes . Work on the home screen To search for contacts in th e home screen, start entering the contact's name. When ente ring the char acters, press each key once. For example, to enter "Eric", press 3742 . The device suggests matching contacts. To switch between the alphabetic an d number modes, select Options > Alpha mode or Number mode . Select the desired contact from the list of proposed matches. This feature may not be avai lable in all languages. To call the contact, press the call key. To disable the cont act se arch, select Options > Contact search off . To check your received messages, select the message box in the notifica tion area. To read a message, s elect the message. To a ccess other tasks, s croll right. To view your missed calls, select the calls box in the notification area. To return a call, select a call, and press t h e c a l l k e y . T o s e n d a t e x t m e ssage to a caller, select a call, scroll right, and select Send message from the list of available actions. To listen to your voice mail, select the voice mail box in the notification area. Select the desired voice mailbox, and press the call key. One-touch keys With the One-touch keys, you can access app lications and tasks quickly. Each key has been assigned an applica tion or a task. To chang e these, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Personalisatio n > One-to uch keys . Your service provider may have assigned applications to the keys, in which case you cannot change them. 34 New from Nokia Eseries
1 â Home key 2 â E-mail key 3 â Calendar key Home key To access the home screen, press the home key briefly. Press the home key briefly again to access th e menu. To view the list of active applications, press th e home key for a few seconds. When the list is open, press the home key briefly to scroll the list. To open the selected application, press t he home key for a few seconds, or press the scroll key. To close the se lected application, press th e backspace key. Leaving app lications running i n the background increases the demand on battery power an d reduces the battery life. Calendar key To open the Calendar applic ation, press the calendar key briefly. To create a new meeting entry, press the calendar key for a few seconds. E-mail key To open your default mailbox, pr ess the e-mail key briefly. To create a new e-mail message, press the e-mail key for a few seconds. Turn to silence calls or alarms When you activate the sensors in your device, you can control certain functions by turning the device. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Sensor settings . Select from the following: ⢠Sensors â Set the display to rotate automat ically according to the de vice's orientation. ⢠Turning control â Set the device to silence incoming calls or snooze alarms when you turn the device face down. To enable this option , the Sensors option needs to be activated. Calendar Select Menu > Calendar . About Calendar Select Menu > Calendar . 35 New from Nokia Eseries
With calendar, you can create and view scheduled events and appointments, and switch between different calendar views. In the month view, calendar entries are marked with a triangle. Anniversary entries are also marked with an exclamation mark. The entrie s of the selecte d day are displayed as a list. To open calendar entries , select a calendar v iew and an entry. Whenever you see the icon, scroll right to access a list of available actions. To close the list, scroll left. Create calendar entries Select Menu > Calendar . You can create the following types of calendar en tries: ⢠Meeting entries remind you of events that have a specific date and time. ⢠Meeting requests are invita tions that yo u can send to the participants. Before you can create meeting requests you must have a compa tible mailbox configured to your device. ⢠Memo entries are related to the whole day but not to a specific time of the day. ⢠Anniversary entries remind you of birthdays and special dates. They refer to a certain day but not a specific time of the day. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. ⢠To-do entries remind you of a ta sk that has a due date but not a specific time of the day. To create a calendar entry, select a date, Options > New entry , and the entry type. To set the priority for meeting entries, select Option s > Priority . To define how the entr y is handled during synchronisation, select Private to hide the entry from viewers if the calendar is available online, Public to make the entry visible to viewers, or None to not copy the entry to your comput er. To send the entry to a compatible device, select Opti ons > Send . To make a meeting request of a meeting entry, select Options > Add participants . Create meeting requests Select Menu > Calendar . Before you can create meetin g requests, you must have a compatible mailbox configured f or your device. To create a meeting entry: 1. To create a meeting en try, select a day and Opti ons > New entry > Meeting requ est . 2. Enter the name s of the required participants. T o add names from your contacts list, enter the first few characters, and select from the proposed matches. To add optional participan ts, select Option s > Add optional part icipants . 3. Enter the subject. 4. Enter th e start and end t i mes and dates, or sele ct All- day event . 5. Enter the location. 6. Set an alarm for the entry, if needed. 36 New from Nokia Eseries
7. For a recurring meeting, set the recurrence time, and enter the end date. 8. Enter a description. To set the priority for th e meeting request, select Options > Priorit y . To send the meeting request, select Options > Send . Calendar views Select Menu > Calendar . You can switch between the following views: ⢠Month view shows the current month and th e calendar entries of the selected day in a lis t. ⢠Week view shows the events for the selected week in seven day boxes. ⢠Day view shows the events for the selected day grouped into time slots according to their starting time. ⢠To-do view shows all to-do items. ⢠Agenda view shows the even ts for the selected day in a list. Tip: To switch between views, press * . To change the view, select Options > Change view and the desired view. Tip: To open the week vi ew, select the week number. To move to the next or th e previous day in month, week, day, and agenda view, select the desired day. To change the defa ult view, select Options > Settings > Default view . Contacts About Contacts Select Menu > Contacts . With Contacts, you can save and updat e contact information, such as phone numbers, home addresses, and e-mail addresses of yo ur contacts. You can add a personal ring ing tone or a thumbn ail image to a conta ct. You can also creat e contact groups, which allow you to communicate with several contacts at the same time, and send contact information to compatible devices. Whenever you see the icon, scroll right to access a list of available actions. To close the list, scroll left. Work with contacts Select Menu > Contacts . To create a contact, select Options > New contact , and enter the details of the contact. To copy contacts from the memo ry card, if available, select Options > Create backup > Memory card to phone . To search for contacts, start entering the contact's name in the search field. To switch to predicti ve search mode, select Options > Activate predict . search . 37 New from Nokia Eseries
To search for contacts in predictive search mode, start entering the contact's name in the s earch field. Create contact groups Select Menu > Contacts . 1. To create a contact group, sc roll to each contact you want to add to the group, a nd select Options > Mark/ Unmark > Mark . 2. Select Option s > Group > Add to group > Create new group , and enter a name for the group . If you want t o make conferen ce calls to the group using a conference service, define the following: ⢠Conf. service number â Enter the co nference call service number. ⢠Conf. service ID â Enter the conference call ID. ⢠Conf. service PIN â Enter the conference call PIN code. To make a conference call to the group using the conference service, select the group and Options > Call , scroll right, and select Call conference ser. . Search for contacts in a remote database To activate remot e contact search , select Options > Settings > Contacts > Remote search server . You must define a remote server before you can do remote contact searches. To search fo r contacts in a remote database, select Contacts > Options > Search from remote . Enter the name of the contact you want to search for, and select Search . The device establishes a data connection to the remote database. To search for contacts in th e home screen, start entering characters in th e home screen, an d select the data base from the proposed matches. To change the rem ote contacts da tabase, select Options > Settings > Contacts > Remote sear ch server . This setting affects the da tabase used in the Contacts an d Calendar applications and th e home screen, but not the database that is used for e-mail. Add ringing tones for contacts Select Menu > Contacts . To add a ringing tone for a contact, select the contact, Options > Ringing tone , and a ringing tone . The ringing tone sounds when th e contact calls y ou. To add a ringing tone for a contact group, select the contact group, Options > Group > Ringing tone , and a ringing tone. To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Contacts settings Select Menu > Contacts . To modify the settings of t he Contacts application, select Options > Settings > Contacts and from the following: ⢠Contacts to dis play â Show conta cts that are stored in the device memory, on the SIM card, or both. 38 New from Nokia Eseries
⢠Default saving memory â S elect where to save contacts. ⢠Name display â Change the way contacts' names are displayed. This setting is no t available for all languages. ⢠Default contact list â Select which conta cts list opens when you open the Contacts appli cation. This setting is only available when there is more than one contacts list. ⢠Remote search server â Change the remote contacts database. This option is available only if remote contacts data bases are supporte d by your service provider. Multitasking You can ha ve several applications open at the same tim e. To switch between active appl ications, press and hold the home key, scro ll to an applic ation, and press the scroll key. To close the selected application, press the backspace key. Example: When you have an active phone call and want to check your calendar, press the home key to access the menu, an d open the Calendar application. The phone call remains active in the background. Example: When you are writing a message and want to check a web site, press the home key to access the menu, an d open the Web application. Select a bookmark or enter the web address manually, and select Go to . To return to your message, p ress and hold the home key, scroll to the message an d press the scroll key. About Ovi Sync Select Menu > Applications > Ovi sync . With Ovi Sync, y ou can synchro nise contacts, calendar entries, and notes between your device and Ovi. To use Ovi Sync, you need a Nokia a ccount. If you do not have a Nok ia account, create one a t www.ovi.com. 39 New from Nokia Eseries
Messaging Select Menu > Messaging . In Messaging (network servi c e), you can send and receive text messages, multimedia messages, a udio messages, and e-mail messages. You can also receive web service messages, cell broadcast me ssages, and s pecial messages containing data, and send service commands. Before sending or receivin g messages, you may need to do the following: ⢠Insert a valid SIM card in the device and be located in the service area of a cellular network. ⢠Verify that the network supports the messaging features you want to use and th at they are activated on your SIM card. ⢠Define the internet access p oint settings on the device. ⢠Define the e-mail account settings on the device. ⢠Define the text messa ge settings on th e device. ⢠Define the multimedi a message settings on the device. The device may recognise the SIM card provider and automatic ally configure so me of the mess age settings . If not, you may need to define th e settings manually; or contact your service provider to configure the settings. Nokia Messaging The Nokia Messaging service automatically transf ers e- mail from your existing e-mail address to your Nokia E52. You can read, respond to, and or ganise your e-mails on the go. The Nokia Mess aging service works wi th a number of internet e-mail providers that are often used fo r personal e-mail, such as Google e-mail services. The Nokia Messaging service may be chargeable. For information on possible costs, contact your se rvice provider or the Nokia Messaging service. The Nokia Messagi ng service must be sup ported by your network and may not be available in all regions. Install the Nokia Messaging application 1. Select Menu > Email and New mailb. . 2. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 3. Select Connect to allow your device to access the network. 4. Enter your e-mail address and password. The Nokia Messaging service can run on your device even if you have installed other e-ma il applications, such as Mail for Exchange. E-mail service The e-mail service automatica lly pushes e-mail from your existing e-mail address to your Nokia E52. You can read, resp ond to, and organis e your e-mail on the go. The e-mail service works with a number of internet e- mail providers th at are ofte n used for personal e-mail. 40 Messaging
This service must be support ed by your network and may not be available in all countrie s or regions. For availability, contact your service provider. Set up e-mail on your device 1. Select Menu > Email > New mailb. . 2. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 3. If requested, allow your device to connect to the internet. 4. Select your e-mail service provider or account type. 5. Enter the required accoun t details, such as e-mail address and password. The e-mail service can run on your device even if you have installed other e-mail applications, such as Mail for Exchange. E-mail Set up your e-mail With the E-mail wizard, you can set up your corporate e- mail account, such as Mail fo r Exchange, and your internet e-mail account. When setting up your co rporate e-mail, you may be prompted for the name of the server associated with your e-mail address. For detail s, contact your company IT department. 1. To open the wizard, in the home screen, select Set up e-mail . 2. Enter your e-mail address and pa ssword. If the wizard is not able to configure your e-mail settings automatic ally, you need to select your e-mail ac count type, and enter the rela ted account settings. If your device contains any a dditional e-mail clients, those are offered to you when you open the wizard. Mail for Exchange Use of the Mail for Exchange is limited to over-the-air synchronisation of PIM informat ion between the Nokia device and the authorised Microsoft Exchange server. Send e-mail Select Menu > Messaging . 1. Select your mailbox and Options > Create email . 2. In the To field, enter the recipient's e-mail address. If the recipient's e-mail addres s can be found in Con tacts, start entering the recipient's name, and select th e recipient from the proposed ma tches. If you add several recipients, insert ; to separate the e-ma il addresses. Use the Cc field to send a copy to other recipients, or the Bcc fiel d to send a blind copy to recipients. If the Bcc field is not visible, select Options > More > Show Bcc field . 3. In the Subject field, ente r the subject of the e-mail. 4. Enter your message in the text area. 5. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Add attachment â Add an attachmen t to the message. ⢠Priority â Set the priority of the message. ⢠Flag â Flag the message for follow-up. ⢠Insert temp late â Insert text from a template. 41 Messaging
⢠Add recipient â Add recipients to the message from Contacts. ⢠Editing op tions â Cut, copy, or paste the selected text. ⢠Input opt ions â Activate or deactivate predictive text input, or select th e writing language. 6. Select Option s > Send . The available options m ay vary. Add attachments Select Menu > Messaging . To write an e-mail message, select your mailbox and Options > Create email . To add an attachmen t to the e-mail message, select Options > Add attachment . To remove the selected attachment, select Optio ns > Remove attachment . Read e-mail Select Menu > Messaging . Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Me ssages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your dev ice or PC. To read a received e-mail mess age, select the mailbox, and select the messa ge from the list. To reply to the message sender, select Options > Reply . To reply to the sender and all other recipients, select Options > Reply to all . To forward the message, select Options > Forward . Download attachments Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To view the attach ments in a received e-mail message, scroll to th e attachmen t field, and select Options > Actions . If there is one attachment in the message, select Open to open the attachment . If there are several attachments, select View list to see a list showing which attachments h ave been downloaded. To download the selected attachment or all the attachments from the list to your device, select Options > Actions > Download or Download al l . The attach ments are not saved in your device , and are deleted when you delete the message. To save the selected attachment or all the downloaded attachment s in your device, select Options > Actions > Save or Save all . To open the selected, downloaded attachment, select Options > Actions > Open . Reply to a meeting request Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. Select a received meeting request, Options , and from the following: ⢠Accept â Accept the meeting request. ⢠Decline â Decline the meeting request. ⢠Forward â Forward the meet ing request to another recipient. 42 Messaging
⢠Remove from calendar â Remove a cancelled meeting from your calendar. Search for e-mail messages Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To search for it ems within the recipients, subjects, and body texts of the e-mail mess ages in the mailbox, select Options > Search . To stop the search, select Options > Stop search . To start a new search , select Options > New sea rch . Delete e-mails Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To delete an e-mail me ssage, select the message and Options > Act ions > Delet e . The message is placed in the Deleted items folder, if avai lable. I f there is no Deleted items folder available, the message is deleted permanently. To empty the Deleted items fo lder, select the fo lder and Options > Empty deleted items . Switch between e-mail folders Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To open another e-mail folder or mailbox, select Inbox at the top of the display. Select the e-mail folder or mailbox from the list. Disconnect from the mailbox Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To cancel the synchroni sation between the device and the e-mail server, and to work with e-ma il without a wireless connection, select Options > Disconnect . If your mailbox does not have the Disconnect option, select Options > Exit to disconnect from the mailbox. To start the syn chronisation again, select Options > Connect . Set an out-of-office reply Select Menu > Email . To set an out-of-office reply, if available, select your mailbox and Option s > Settings > Mailbox > Out of office > On . To enter the text for the reply, select Out of office repl y . General e-mail settings Select Menu > Email and Settings > Global settings . Select from the following: ⢠Message list layout â Select whether the e-mail messages in In box display one or t wo lines of text. ⢠Body text p review â Preview messa ges when scrolling through the list of e-mail messages in Inbox. ⢠Title dividers â To be able to expand and collapse the list of e-mail mess ages, select On . 43 Messaging
⢠Download notifications â Set the device to display a notification when an e-mail attachment has been downloaded. ⢠Warn before de lete â Set the device to di splay a warning before you dele te an e-mail message. ⢠Home screen â Defin e how many lines of e-mail are displayed in the home screen information area. Messaging folders Select Menu > Messaging . Messages and data received using Bluet ooth connectivity are stored in the Inbox folder. E-mail messages are stored in the Mailbox folder. Messages that you have been writi ng can be stored in the Dra fts folder. Messages that are waiting to be sent are stored in the Outbox folder, and messages that have been sent, excluding Bluetooth messages, a re stored in the Sen t folder. Tip: Messages are placed in the Outbox folder, for example, when your device is outside network coverage. Note: The message sent icon or text on your device screen does not indicate that the message is received at the intended destination. To request the network to se nd you a delivery rep ort of the text messages and mult imedia messag es you have sent (network service), select Optio ns > Settings > Text message > R eceive re port or Multimedia message > Receive reports . The reports are saved in the Reports folder. Text and multimedia messages Select Menu > Messaging . Only devices that have com p atible features can receive and display multimed ia messages. The appearance of a message may vary depending on the receiving device. A multimedia mess age (MMS) can con tain text and ob jects such as images, sound clips, or video clips. Before you can send or receive multimedia me ssages on your device, yo u must define the multimedia message setting s. Your device may recognise the SIM card provider and configure the correct multimedia mes sage setting s automatically . If not, contact your service provider for the correct settings, order the settings from your service provider in a configuration message, o r use th e Settin gs wizard application. Write and send messages Select Menu > Messaging . Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Mess ages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your dev ice or PC. Before you can create a mult imedia message or write an e-mail, you must h ave the co rrect connection settings in place. The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceed s this limi t, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS . 44 Messaging
Check the size limit of e-mail messages with your service provider. If you attempt to send an e-mail message t hat exceeds the size limit of the e-mail server, the mess age is left in the Outbox folder, and the device attempts to resend it periodically. Sending an e-mail requires a data connection, and continuous attempts to resend the e-mail may increase your data transfer costs. In the Outbox folder, you can delete such a message, or move it to the Drafts folder. 1. Select New mess age > Message to send a text or multimedia message (MMS), Audio message to send a multimedia message th at includes one sound clip, or E-mail to send an e-mail message. 2. In the To field, press the scroll key to select recipients or groups from the contacts list, or enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail a ddress. To add a semicolon (;) that separates t he recipients, press * . You can a lso copy and paste the number or address from the clipboard. 3. In the subject field, enter the subject of the e-mail. To change the fields that are visible, select Options > Message header fields . 4. In the message field, write the message. To insert a template or no te, select Options > Insert conte nt > Insert text > Template or Note . 5. To add a media file to a multimedia message, select Options > Insert conte nt , the file type or source, and the desired file. To insert a business card, s lide, note, or some other file to the message, select Options > Insert content > Insert other . 6. To capture an image or r ecord a video or sound clip for a multimedia messa ge, select Options > Insert content > Inse rt image > New , Insert video clip > New , or Insert sound clip > New . 7. To add special characters, press * , and select More symbols an d a symbol. 8. To add a smiley, pre ss * , and select More emoticons and a smiley. 9. To add an a ttachment to an e-mail, select Op tions and the attachment type. E-mail attachments are indica ted by . 10. To send the message, select Options > Send , or press the call key. Note: The message sent icon or text on yo ur de vi ce screen does not indicate that the message is received at the intended destination. Y o u r d e v i c e s u p p o r t s t e x t m e s s a g e s b e y o n d t he l i m i t f o r a single message . Longer me ssages are sen t as two or more messages. Your service pro vid er may charge accordingly. Characters with accents, other ma rks, or some language options take more space, and limit the number of characters that can be sent in a single messa ge. You may not be able t o send video clips that are saved in the MP4 file format or that exceed the size limit of the wireless network in a multimedia message. Text messages on the SIM card Select Menu > Messaging and Options > SIM messages . Text messages may be stored on your SIM card. Before you can view SIM messages, you mu st copy the messages to a folder in the device. After copying the messa ges to a folder, 45 Messaging
you can view them in the fold er or delete them from the SIM card. 1. Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark al l to mark every message. 2. Select Option s > Copy . 3. Select a folder and OK to begin copying. To view SIM card messages, open the folder where you copied the messages, and open a message. Receive and reply to multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Me ssages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your dev ice or PC. Tip: If you receive multim edia mess ages that contain objects unsupported by y our device, you cannot open them. Try to send these objects to another device such as a computer, an d open them there. 1. To reply to a multimedia message, open the message, and select Opt ions > Reply . 2. Select To sender to reply to the sender, To all to reply to everyone included in the received message, Via audio messa ge to reply with an audio message, or Via e-mail to reply with an e-mail message. E-mail message is available only if a mailbox is configur ed and the message is sent fr om an e-mail address. 3. Enter the text of the message, and select Opt ions > Send . Create presentations Select Menu > Messaging . Creating multimedia presen tations is not possible if MMS creation mode is set to Restricted . To chan ge the setting, select Options > Setti ngs > Multimed ia message > MMS creat ion mode > Free or Guided . 1. To create a presentation, select New message > Message . The message type is changed to multimedia message based on the inserted content. 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scroll key to add a recipient from the contacts list. If you enter more than one num ber or e-mail address, separat e them with a semicolon. 3. Select Options > Insert conten t > Insert presentati on and a presenta tion template. A template may define which media objects you can include in the presentation , where they appear, and which effects are displa yed between images and slides. 4. Scroll to the text area, and enter the text. 5. To insert images, sound or video clips, or notes in your presentation, scroll to the corresponding object area, and select Options > Insert . 6. To add slides, select Options > Insert > New slide . To select the background colour for the presentation and background images for different slides, select Options > Background settings . To set effects between images or slides, select Options > Effect settings . 46 Messaging
To preview the presentation, select Options > Preview . Multimedia presentations may only be viewed in compatible de vices that sup port presentati ons. They may appear different in different devices. View presentations To view a presentation, op en the multimedia message from the Inbox folder. Sc roll to the presentation, and press the scroll key. To pause the presentation, press either selection key. To resume playing the presentation, select Options > Continue . If the text or images are too large to fit on the display, select Options > Activate scrolling , and scroll to see the entire presentation. To find phone numbers and e-mail or web addresses in the presentation, select Options > Find . You may use these numbers and addres ses to make ca lls, send messages, or create bookmarks, for example. View and save multimedia attachments To view multimedia messages as complete present ations, open the message, and select Options > Play present ation . Tip: To view or play a multimedia object in a multimedia message, select View image , Play sound clip , or Play video cli p . To view the name and size of an att achment, select th e message and Op tions > Objects . To save a multimedia object, select Options > Objects , the object, and Options > Save . Organise messages Select Menu > Messaging and My folders . To create a new folde r to organise your messages, select Options > New folder . To rename a folder, select Options > Rename folde r . You can only rename folders that you have created. To move a message to another folder, select the message, Options > Move to folder , the folder, and OK . To sort messages in a specific order, select Options > So rt by . To view the properties of a message, select the message and Options > Message details . Message reader With Message reader you can lis ten to text, multimedia, audio, and e-mail mess ages. To listen to new messages or e-mail, in the home screen, press and hold the left sele ction key until Message reader opens. To listen to a message from your Inbox, scroll to the message, and s elect Options > Listen . To listen to an e- mail message from your mailbox, scroll to the message, 47 Messaging
and select Options > Listen . To stop the reading, press the end key. To pause and continue the read ing, press the scroll key. To skip to the next message, scro ll right. To replay the current message or e-mail, scroll left . To skip to the previous message, scroll left at the beginning of the message. To view the current message or e-mail in text format without the soun d, select Options > View . Speech Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Speech . With Speech , you can set the langua ge, voice, and voice properties for the message reader. To set the language for the message read er, select Language . To download additi onal languages to your device, select Optio ns > Dow nload la nguage s . Tip: When you download a new langu age, you must download at least one voice for that language. To set the speaking voice, select Voice . The voice depends on the selected language. To set the spea king rate, select Sp eed . To set the spea king volume, select Volume . To view details of a voice, open the voice tab, and select the voice and Options > Voice details . To listen to a voice, select the voice and Options > Pl ay voice . To delete languages or v oices, select the item and Options > Delete . Message reader settings To change the messa ge reader settings, open the Set tings tab, and define the following: ⢠Language detection â Activate automatic reading language detection. ⢠Continuous reading â Activate continuous readin g of all selected messages. ⢠Speech prompts â Set the message reader to insert prompts in messa ges. ⢠Audio source â Listen to m essages throu gh the earpiece or loudspeaker. Special message types Select Menu > Messaging . You can receive special messa ges that contain data, such as operator logos, ringing tones, bookmarks, or internet access or e-mail account settings. To save the contents of these messages, select Option s > Save . Service messages Service messages are sent to your device by service providers. Service messages may contain notifications such as news head lines, services, or links through wh ich the message content can be downloaded. To define the service message settings, select Options > Settings > Service message . To download the service or message content, select Options > Download messa ge . 48 Messaging
To view information about the sender, web address, expiration date, and other de tails of the message before downloading it, select Options > Message details . Send service commands You can send a service request message (also known as a USSD command) to your se rv ice provider and request activation for certai n network services. Contact your service provider for the service request text. To send a service reque st message, se lect Options > Service commands . Enter the service request text and select Option s > Send . Cell broadcast Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Cell broadcast . With the cell broadc ast network serv ice, you can receive messages on various topics from your service provider, such as weather or traffic conditions in a particular region. For available topics and r ele vant topic nu mbers, contact your service provider. Cell broadcast messages cannot be received when the device is in the remote SIM mode. A packet data (GPRS) connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS (3G) networks. To receive cell broadcast messages, you may need to turn cell broadcast reception on. Select Optio ns > Settings > Reception > On . To view messages related to a top ic, select the topic. To receive messages related to a topic, select Op tions > Subscribe . Tip: You can set important topics as hot topics. You are notified in the home screen, when you receive a message related to a hot topic. Select a topic and Options > Hotmark . To add, edit, or delete topics, select Options > Topic . Messaging settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings . Open the message type in qu estion, and define all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Your device may recognise the SIM card provider and configure the correct text message, multimedia message, and GPRS settin gs automati cally. If no t, contact yo ur service provider for the correct settings, order the settings from your service provider in a configuration message, or use the Settings wizard application. Text message settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Text message . Select from the following: ⢠Message centres â View the available message centres for your device, or add a new one. ⢠Message centre in use â Select a message centr e to send the message. 49 Messaging
⢠Character encoding â Select Reduce d support to use automatic character conversion to another encoding system when available. ⢠Receiv e report â Select Yes if you want the network to send you delivery reports on your messages (network service). ⢠Message validity â Select how long the message centre resends your messag e if the first attempt fails (network service). If the re cipient cannot be reached within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. ⢠Message sent as â Convert the message to another format. Change this option only if you are sure that your message centre is able to convert text messages into these other formats. For more information, contact your service provider. ⢠Preferred connection â Select the preferred method of connection when sending text messages from your device. ⢠Reply via same centre â Select whether you want the reply message to be sent using the sa me text message centre number (network service). Multimedia message settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Multimedia message . Select from the following: ⢠Image size â Scale images in multimedia messages. ⢠MMS creation mode â Select Rest ricted to set your device to prevent you from including content in multimedia messages that m ay not be supported by the network or the receiving de vice. To receive warnings about including such content, select Guided . To create a multimedia message with no restricti ons on attachment type, s elect Free . If you select Restricted , creating multimedia presentations is not possible. ⢠Access point in use â Selec t the default access point to connect to the multimedia messa ge centre. You may not be able to change the default access point i f it is preset in your device by your service provider. ⢠Multimedia re trieval â Select how you want to receive messages, if available. Select Always automatic to receive multimedia messages always automatically, Auto in home netw. to receive notification of a new multim edia message that you can retrieve from the message centre (for example, when you are travelling abroad and are outside your home network), Manual to retrieve multimedia messages from the message ce ntre manually, or Off to prevent receipt of any multimed ia message s. Automatic retrieval may not be supported in all regions. ⢠Allow anonymous msgs. â Receive messages from unknown senders. ⢠Receive adverts â Recei ve messages de fined as advertisements. ⢠Receive reports â Request for delivery and read reports of sent messages (n etwork service). Receiving a delivery report of a mu ltimedia message th at has been sent to an e-mail address ma y not be possible. ⢠Deny report sending â Select Yes to not send delivery reports from your device for received multimedia messages. ⢠Message validity â Select how long the messaging centre tries to send t he message (netw ork service). If the recipient of a message cannot be rea ched within the validity period, the message is removed from the multimedia messaging centre. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the ne twork. 50 Messaging
The device requires network support to indicate th at a sent message has been received or read. Depending on the network and other circumstances, this inform ation may not always be reliable. Service message settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Service message . To allow your device to receive service messages from your service provider, select Service messages > On . To select how to dow nload services and serv ice message content, select Download messages > Automaticall y or Manually . If you select Automatically , you may still need to confirm some downloads si nce not all services can be downloaded automatically. Cell broadcast settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Cell broadcast . To receive cell broadcast messages, select Recepti on > On . To select the langua ges in which you want to receive cell broadcast messages, select Language . To display new topics in the ce ll broadcast topics list, select Topic detection > On . Other settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Other . Select from the following: ⢠Save sent messages â Select whether to save sent messages in the Sent folder. ⢠Number of saved msgs. â Enter the number of sent messages to save. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. ⢠Memory in use â Select where to save your messages. You can save messages to the memory card only if a memory card is inserted. 51 Messaging
Phone To make and receive calls, the device must be switched on, it must have a valid SIM card insta lled, a nd you must be located in the service area of a cellular network. To make or receive a net call, your device must be connected to a net call service. To connect to a net call service, your device must be in the coverage of a connection network, such as a wireless LAN (WLA N) access point. Voice calls Note: The actual in voice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. Noise canc ellation Noise from the surrounding environment is actively removed from your speech using dual microphone noise cancellation technology. Noise picked up by a secondary microphone is removed from the signal of the main microphone into which you speak. This results in a significantly imp roved transmission of speech in a noisy environment. Noise cancellation is not available when using th e loudspeaker or a headset. For the best results, hold the device with the main microphone to wards your mouth. Answer a call To answer a call, press the call key. To reject a call, press the end key. To mute the ringing tone instead of answering a call, select Silence . When you have an active ca ll and the call waiting function (network service) is activate d, press the call key to answer a new incoming call. The first call is put on hold. To end the active call, press the end key. Make a call To make a call, enter the p h one number, including the area code, and press the call key. Tip: For internation al calls, add the character that replaces the intern ational access code, and enter the country code, area code (omit the leadin g 0, if necessary), and phone number. 52 Phone
To end the call or cancel th e call attempt, press the end key. To make a call using the saved contacts, open the contacts. Enter the first letters of the name, scroll to the name, and press the call key. To make a call using the log, press the call key to view up to 20 numbers that you last called or attempted to call. Scroll to the desired number or name, and press the call key. To adjust the volume of an active call, use the volume keys. To switch from a voice call to a video call, select Option s > Switch to video call . The device ends the voice call and makes a video call to the recipient. Make a conference call 1. To make a conference call, enter a participant's phone number, and press the call key. 2. When the participant answers, select Optio ns > New call . 3. When you have made a phone call to all the participants, select Options > Conference to merge the calls into a conference call. To mute the microphone during the call, press the mute key. To drop a participant from the conference call, select Options > Conf erence > Drop participant and the participant. To discuss privately with a conference call participant, select Option s > Conference > Private and the participant. Voice mail Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Call mailb ox . When you open the Voice mail application (network service) for the first time, you are asked to enter the number of your voice mailbox. To call your voice mailbox, scroll to Voice mailbox , and select Optio ns > Call voice mailbox . If you have configured net call settings to your device and have an internet call mailbox, to call the mailbox, scroll to the mailbox, and select Options > Call internet call mbx. . To call your mailbox in the home screen, press and hold 1 ; or press 1 and then the call key. Select the mailbox you want to call. To change the mailbox numb er, select the mailbox and Options > Change number . Video calls About video calls To be able to make a video call, you need to be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For availability and subscription to video call services, contact your service provider. While talking, you ca n see a real-time, two-way video between you and the reci pient of the call, if the recipient has a compati ble device. The video image recorded by the camera in yo ur device is shown to the video call recipient. A video call can only be made between two parties. 53 Phone
Make a video call To make a video call, enter th e phone number or select the recipient from the contacts list and Options > Cal l > Video call . When the video call sta rts, the camera of the device is activated. If the camera is already in use, video sending is disabled. If the recipient of the call does not want to send video back to you, a still image is shown instead. To define the still image sent from your device instead of video, select Menu > Ctrl. p anel > Settings and Phone > Call > Image in video cal l . To disable the sending of aud io, video, or video and audio, select Options > Disable > Sending audio , Sending video , or Sending au d. & video . To adjust the volu me of an active video call, use the volu me keys. To use the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate loudspeaker . To mute the loudspeaker and use the earpiece, select Options > Activate han dset . To swap the places of im ages, select Opti ons > Swap images . To zoom the image on the display, select Options > Zoom and scroll up or down. To end the video call and make a new voice call to the same recipient, select Options > Switch to voice call . Video sharing Use video sharing (network service) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. The loudspeaker is acti ve when you activate video sha ring. If you do not want to use th e loudspeaker for the voice call while you share video, you can also use a compatible headset. Warning: Continuous exposure to high volume may d a m a g e y o u r h e a r i n g . L i s t e n t o m u s i c a t a m o d e r a t e l e v e l , and do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use. Video sharing requirements Video sharing requires a 3G connection. For more information on the service, 3G network availability , and fees associated with using this service, conta ct your service provider. To use video sharing you must do the following: ⢠Ensure that your device is set up for person-to-person connections. ⢠Ensure you have an active 3G connection and are withi n 3G network coverage. If you move outside the 3G network during a video sh aring session, the sharing stops while your voice call continues. ⢠Ensure that both the sender and recipien t are registered to the 3G network. If you invite someone to a sharing session and the recipientâ s device is not within 3G network coverage , does not have video sharing installed, or person -to-person connections set up, the recipient does not receive invitations. You receive an error message tha t indicates that the recipient cannot acce pt the invitation. 54 Phone
Settings To set up video sha ring, yo u need person-to-person and 3G connection settings. Person-to-person connection settings A person-to-person connect ion is also known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) connection. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you can use video sharing. Ask your service provider for the SIP profile settings, and save them in you r device. Your service provider may send you the settings or give you a list of the needed parameters. To add a SIP address to a conta ct card: 1. Select > Contacts . 2. Open the contact card (or start a new card for that person). 3. Select Options > Add detail > Share video . 4. Enter the SIP address in the format username@domainname (you can use an IP address instead of a domain name). If you do not know the S IP address for the contact, you can use the phone number of the recipient, including the country code, to share video (if supported by the network service provider). 3G connection settings To set up your 3G connection: ⢠Contact your service provider to establish an agreement for you to use the 3G network. ⢠Ensure that your device 3G access point connection settings are configured pro perly. Share live video or video clips During an active voice call, select Options > Share video . 1. To share live video during the call, select Live video . To share a video clip, select Video clip and the clip you want to share. You may need to convert the video clip into a suitable format to be able to share it. If your device notifies you that the video clip must be co nverted, select OK . You r device must have a video editor for the conversion to work. 2. If the recipie nt has severa l SIP addresse s or phone numbers including the country code saved in the contacts list, select the de sired address o r number. If the SIP address or phone number of the recipient is not available, enter the address or number of the recipient including the country code, and select OK to send the invitation. You r device sends the invi tation to the SIP address. Sharing begins automa tically when the recipient accepts the invitation. Options during video sharing Zoom the video (ava ilable for sender only). Adjust the brightness (a vailable for sender only). or Mute or unmute the microphone. or Turn the loudspeaker on and off. or Pause and resume video sharing. Switch to full screen mode (available for receiver only). 55 Phone
3. To end the sharing session, select Sto p . To end the voice call, press the end ke y. When you end the call, video sharing also ends. To save the live video you shared, select Yes when prompted. The device notifies you of the memory location of the saved video. To define the preferred memory location, select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Settings an d Connection > Video sharing > Preferred savin g memory . If you access other applicat ions while you are sharing a video clip, the sharing is paus ed. To return to the video sharing view, and to con tinue sharing, in the home screen , select Options > Continue . Accept an invitation When someone sends you a vi deo sharing invitation, the invitation message displays the senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is not set to silen t, it rings when you receive an invitation. If someone sends yo u a share invitation an d you are not within UMTS network covera ge, you will not know that you received an invitation. When you receive an invitation , select from the following: ⢠Yes â Accept the invitation, and activat e the sharing session. ⢠No â Reject the invitation. The sender receives a message that you rejected the inv itation. You can a lso press the end key to reject the invitation and end the voice call. To mute the video on your device, select Optio ns > Mute . To play the video at the original volume, select Options > Original volume . This does not affect the audio playback of the other party of the phone call. To end the sharing session, select Stop . To end the voice call, press the end key. When you end the call, also video sharing ends. Internet calls About internet calls With the internet call servic e (network service), you can make and receive calls over th e internet. Internet calls can be established between co mputers, between mobile phones, and between a VoIP device and a tradit ional telephone. To be able to use the service, you must subscribe to the service, and have a user acc ount. To make or receive an intern et call, you must be in the service area of a wireless LAN, and connected to an internet call service. Activate internet calls Select Menu > Contacts . Scroll left, and select the internet calls service from the list. To make or receive internet calls, contact your service provider to receive the intern et call connection settings. To connect to an internet call service, your devi ce must be in a network service area. To activate your inte rn et call service, select Options > Activate servi ce . 56 Phone
To search for available wireless LAN (W LAN) connections, select Option s > Sear ch for WLAN . Make internet calls When you have activat ed the in ternet call feature, you can make an internet call from all applications where y ou can make a regular voice call, such as the contacts list or log. For example, in the contacts list, scroll to the desired contact, and select Options > Call > Int ernet call . To make an internet call in the home screen, enter the phone number or internet address, and select Net call . 1. To make an internet call to an internet a ddress that does not start with a digit, press any n umber key in the home screen, then press # for a few seconds to clear the display and to switch from number mode to letter mode. 2. Enter the internet address, and pr ess the call key. Internet call settings Select Menu > Contacts . Scroll left, and select the internet calls service from the list. To view or edit intern et call settings, select Optio ns > Settings and from the following: ⢠Service co nnectivi ty â Select the destinati on settings for internet call connectivity, and edit destination details. To change a destination, scroll to the servi ce, and select Change . ⢠Availability r equests â Select whether to automatically accept all in comi ng presence requests without a confirmation query. ⢠Service information â View technical information about the selected service. Voice functions Voice functions With the Voice functions application, you can use your voice to carry out basic tasks. You can call or send audio messages to contacts, answer ca lls, and listen to your messages. You need to re cord a personal wake-up command before you can ca rry out these tasks. When Voice functions is activated, th e device is listening for your wake-up command. When t he wake-up command is given , the tasks can be carried out. Activate Voice functions Select Menu > Applications > Voice funct. . To activate the appl ication, do the following: 1. Select Rec. commands > Start co mmand to record the wake-up command. 2. In the main view, select Voice functi ons . 3. Say the wake-up command. Select from the following: ⢠Rec. commands â Record commands. ⢠Settings â Chan ge the settings. 57 Phone
⢠What is this? â Read information about the application. The available options m ay vary. Speed dialling Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Phone > Call > Speed diallin g . Speed dialling allows you to make a call by pressing and holding a number key in the home screen. To activate speed dialling, select On . To assign a number key to a phone number, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Pho ne > Speed dial . Scroll to the number key (2 - 9) on the display, and select Options > Assign . Select the desired number from the contacts list. To delete the phone number assigned to a number key, scroll to the speed dialling key, and select Options > Remove . To modify a phone number assigned to a number key, scroll to the speed dialling key, and select Options > Change . Call divert Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Sett ings and Phone > Call divert . Divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or to another phone number. For details, cont act your service provider. Select the type of calls to divert and from the following: ⢠All voice calls or All fax call s â Divert all incoming voice or fax calls. You cann ot answer the calls, only divert the calls to another number. ⢠If busy â Divert incoming calls if you have an active call. ⢠If not answered â Divert incoming calls after your device rings for a specified length of time. Select the length of time for the device to ring before diverting the call. ⢠If out of reach â Divert calls when the device is switched off or out of network coverage. ⢠If not available â Divert calls if you have an active call, do not answer, or the device is switched off or out of network coverage. To divert calls to your voice mailbox, select a call type, a diverting option, and Options > A ctivate > To voice mailbox . To divert calls to another ph one number, select a call type, a diverting option, and Options > Activate > To other number . Enter the number, or select Fi nd to retrieve a number saved in Contacts. To check the current diverting status, scroll to the diverting option, and select Options > Ch eck status . To stop diverting calls, scroll to the diverting option, and select Options > Deactivate . Call barring Select Menu > Ct rl. panel > Se ttings an d Phone > Call barring . If you have defined int e rnet call settings, select Internet call barring . 58 Phone
You can bar the calls that can be made or received with the device (network service). To modify the settin gs, you need the barring password from your service provider. Call barring affects all call types. Select from the following voice call barring settings: ⢠Outgoin g calls â Prevent making voice calls with your device. ⢠Incoming calls â Prevent incoming calls. ⢠Internatio nal calls â Prevent calling to foreign countries or regions. ⢠Incoming calls when roaming â Prevent incoming calls when outside your home country. ⢠International calls except to home country â Prevent calls to foreign countries or regions, but allow calls to your home country. To check the status of voice call barrings, s elect the barring option and Options > Check status . To deactivate all voice call ba rrings, select a barring option and Options > Deactivate all barrings . To change the password used for barring voice and fax calls, select Options > Edit barring password . Enter the current code, then the new code twice. The barring password must be four digits long. For deta ils, contact your service provider. Bar net calls Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Ph one > Call barring > Internet call barring . To reject net calls from anonymous callers, select Anonymous call barring > On . Send DTMF tones You can send dua l-tone multifrequency (DTMF) tones during an active call to contro l your voice mailbox or other automated phone services. Send a DTMF tone sequence 1. Make a call, and wait until the recipien t answers. 2. Select Options > Send DTMF . 3. Enter the DTMF tone sequence, or select a predefined sequence. Attach a DTMF tone sequence to a contact card 1. Select Menu > Contacts . Select a contact and Options > Edit > Options > Add detai l > DTMF . 2. Enter the tone sequence. To insert a paus e of about 2 seconds before or between DTMF tones, enter p . To set the device to send the DTMF tones only aft er you select Send DTMF during a call, enter w . To enter p and w with the keypad, press * repeatedly. 3. Select Done . Talking theme Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Themes and Standby > Talking theme . When the talking theme is acti vated, a list of functions supported by the talking them e is displayed in the home screen. As you scroll through the functions, the device reads the displayed functions aloud. Select the desired function. 59 Phone
To listen to the entries in y our contacts list, select Call features > Contacts . To listen to information on yo ur missed and received calls, and dialled numbers, select Call features > Recen t calls . To make a call by entering the phone number, select Call features > Dialler and the desired numbers. To enter a phone number, scroll to the digits and select them one by one. To call your voice mailbox, select Call features > Voice mailbox . To use voice commands to make a call, select Voice commands . To have your received messages read aloud, select Message reader . To listen to the current time, select Cloc k . To listen to the current date, scroll down. If the calendar alarm expires when you are using voice aid, the application reads the calen dar alarm content aloud. To listen to the avai lable options, select Options . Voice commands Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Voice comm. . Use voice commands to make phone calls and launch applications, profiles, or othe r functions on the device. To start voice recognition, press and hold the mute key. The device creates a voice tag for the entries in Contacts and for the functions design ated in the Voice commands application. When a voice command is spoken, the device compares the spoken words to the voice tag stored in the device. Voice commands are not dependent on a speakerâÂÂs voice; however, the voice recognition in the device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to recognise voice commands better. Make a call A voice tag for a contact is the name or nickname that is saved for the contact in the contacts list. Note: Using v oice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an em ergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dia lling in all circumstances. To listen to a voice tag, select a contact and Options > Voice tag d etails > Options > Play voice tag . 1. To make a call using a voice command, press and hold the mute key. 2. When you hear the tone or see the visual display, clearly say the name saved for the con tact. 3. The device plays a synthe sised voice tag for the recognised contact in the selected device la nguage and displays the n ame. After a ti me-out period of 1.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the recognised contact was not correct, select another contact from the proposed matches, or select Quit to cancel dialling. If several numbers are saved for the contact, select the contact an d the desired numb er. 60 Phone
Launch an application The device creates voice tags for the applications listed in the Voice commands application. To launch an ap plication using a voice command, press and hold the mute key, and clearly say the name of the application. If the recognised application was not correct, select another application from the proposed matches, or select Quit to cancel. To change the voice command of an application, select Options > Ch ange command , and enter the new command. Change profiles Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Voice comm. . The device creates a voice tag for each profile. To activate a profile using a voice command, press and hold the mute key in the home screen, and say the name of the profile. To change the voice command, select Profiles > Options > Ch ange command . Voice command settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Voice comm. . Select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Synthesiser â Activate the synthesiser that pla ys recognised voice commands. ⢠Playbac k volume â Adjust the speech volume. ⢠Recognitio n sensitiv ity â Adjust the voice c ommand recognition sensitivity. ⢠Command verification â Select whether the voice commands are accepted au tomatically , manually, or by voice verification. ⢠Remove voice adapts. â Reset voice recognition learning when the main user of the device has changed. Push to talk Some features may not be av ailable in your region. For availability, contact your service provider. Select Menu > Applications > PTT . About push to talk Push to talk (PTT) (network service) is a real-time voice- over-IP service that uses the cellular network. PTT provides direct voice communication , with the push of a key. Use PTT to have a conversation with one person or with a group of people. Before you can use PTT, you mus t define the PTT set tings (access point, PTT, SIP, XDM, a nd Presence). You may receive the settings in a special text message from the service provider that offers the PTT service. You can also use the Settings wizard application to configure PTT, if supported by your service provider. For more i nformation on the PTT application, see th e user guide for your device or your local Nokia website. In PTT communication, one pe rson talks while the others listen through the built-in loudspeaker. Speakers take turns respondi ng to each other. Beca use only one group member can talk at a ny time, the maximum duration of a speec h turn is limited. Th e 61 Phone
maximum duration is usually se t to 30 seconds. For details of the speech turn duration for your network, contact you r service provider. Phone calls always ta ke priority over push to talk activities. Log in and exit PTT When you start th e push to talk (PTT) service , you are automatic ally logged in and connect ed to the channels that were acti ve the last time y ou closed the ap plication. If the connection fa ils, to attempt to log in again, select Options > Log in to PTT . To exit PTT, select Options > Exit . To switch to another open a pplication , press an d hold the menu key. Make and receive a PTT call To make a PTT call, press and hold the call key as long as you talk. To listen to the response, release the call key. To check the login status of your contacts, in PTT, s elect Options > PTT contac ts > Contacts and from the following: ⢠â person available ⢠â person unknown ⢠â person does not want to be disturbed, but can receive callback request ⢠â person has PTT switched off This service depends on your network operator and is only available for subscr ibed cont acts. To subscribe a contact, select Options > Show login st atus . Make a one-to-one call Select Options > PTT contacts > Contacts . Select the contact you want to talk to and Options > Talk 1 to 1 . Press and hold the PTT key the entire time you are talking. When you have finished, release the key. To talk to a contact, press and hold the PTT key also in other views in the PTT app lication , for example, the Contacts view. To make a new phone call, fi rst end the one-to-one call. Select Disconnect . Tip: Hold the device in front of yo u during a PTT ca ll so you can see the display. Speak towards the microphone, and do not cover the lou dspeaker with your hands. Make a group call To call a group, select Options > PTT cont acts > Contacts , mark the con tacts you want to call, and select Options > Talk to many . Answer a PTT call To answer a on e-to-one call, press the call key. To dismiss the call, press the end key. Tip: You can also make a one-to-one or group call from Contacts. Select Options > PTT > Talk 1 to 1 or Talk to many . Callback requests To send a callback request: 62 Phone
In the contacts list, scroll to th e desired name, and select Options > Send callback request . When someone sends you a callback request, 1 new callback request is displayed in the home screen. To respond to a callback request: Select Show , a contact, and Options > Talk 1 to 1 to start a one-to-one call. PTT groups Channels A PTT channel consists of a gr oup of people (for example, friends or a work team) who joined the channel after they were invited. When you call a channel, all members joined to the channel hear the call simu ltaneously. You can join pre-configured ch annels. Public channels are open to anyone who kn ows the URL for the channel. When you are conn ected to a channel an d talk, all members joined to the channel he ar you talking. Up to five channels can be active at the sam e time. Select Options > PTT contacts > Netw. grps./ channels . To connect to a public pre-configured network group or channel for the first time, you must first create the group or channel. Select Options > Add existing , and enter th e required information. After th e link to the group has been created, you can attempt to join the group. Network groups Network groups consist of pre-configured lists of members that are stored on the server. You can define participants by adding them to the member list. When you want to talk to a n etwork group, you ca n select the group, and make a call to it. The serv er calls each participant in the group, and the call is read y when the first participant answers. To make a call, select Options > PTT contacts > Netw. grps./ channels , open the PTT groups tab, select a group, and press the PTT key. Create a channel group To create a new configured network group or channel, select Optio ns > Create ne w , PTT network grou p , or PTT channel . You can create your own publi c channels, choose you r own channel name, and invite members. Those members can invite more members to the publi c channel. You may also set up private chan nels. Only users inv ited by the host are allowed to join and use private channels. For each channel, define Network group name , Nickname , and Thumbnail (optional). When you have s uccessfully creat ed a channel, you a re asked if you want to send channe l invitat ions. Channel invitations are text messages . Talk to a channel or group To talk to a channel after you log i n to the PTT service, press the PTT key. A tone sounds , indicating that access is granted. Continue to press and hold the PTT key the entire time you are talking. W hen yo u finish talking, release the key. If you try to respond to a channel by pressing th e PTT key while another memb er is talking, Wait is displayed. 63 Phone
Release the PTT key, wait fo r the other person to finish talking, and pr ess the PTT key again. Alternatively, press and hold the PT T key, and wa it for Talk to be displayed. When you are talking in a channel, the first person to press the PTT key when someone st ops talking can talk next. To view the currently active members o f a channel during an active call to the channel, select Options > Active members . When you have finished the PTT call, select Disconnect . To invite new members to a n ac tive call, select the channel when you are connected to it. Select Option s > Send invitation to open the invitation view. You can only invite new members when you are the host of a private channel, or when the channel is a public channel. Channel invitations are text messages. You can also advertise your ch annel, so that others may become aware of it and then join. Select Options > Send invitation , and enter the requ ired information. Respond to a channel invitation To save a received channel invitation, select Options > Save channel . The chan nel is added to y our PTT co ntacts, channels view. After you save the cha nnel invitation, you are as ked if you want to connect to the channel. Select Yes to open the PTT sessions view. Your device logs in to the service, if you are not logged in already. If you reject or clear the invitation, the invitation is stored in your messaging inbox. To join t he chan nel late r, open the invitation message, and save the inv itation. Select Yes from the dialog to connect to t he channel. View the P TT log Select Options > PTT log and Missed PTT calls , Received PTT calls , or Created PTT calls . To make a one-to-one call fr om the PTT log, select a contact, and pr ess the PTT key. PTT settings To change your push to talk (PTT) user set tings, select Options > Settings > User settings and from the following: ⢠Incoming calls â Allow or block PTT calls. ⢠Incoming callback reqs. â Receive or block incoming callback requests. ⢠Accepted list calls â Set the device to notify you of incoming PTT calls, or answer the calls automatically. ⢠Callback request tone â Select a ringing tone for callback requests. ⢠Application start-up â Select if you want to log in to the PTT service when you switch on your device. ⢠Default nickname â Enter your default nickname that is displayed to other users. You may not be able to edit this setting. ⢠Show my PTT address â Select when to show you PTT address to the other part ies of the call. You may not be able to select some of the options. Log Select Menu > Log . 64 Phone
The Log application stores information about the communication history of the device. The device registers missed and received calls only if the network supports these functions, and if the devi ce is switched on and within the network service area. Call and data registers Select Menu > Log . To view recently missed, rece ived, and dialled calls, select Recent calls . Tip: To view the dialled numbers when in the home screen, press the call key. To view the approxim ate duration of calls to and from your device, select Call duration . To view the amount of data transferred duri ng packet data connections, select Packe t data . Monitor all communications Select Menu > Log . To monitor all voice calls , text messages, or data connections registered by the device, open the general log tab . To view detailed inform ation about a communication event, select the event. Tip: Subevents, such as sending a tex t message in more than one part or opening a packet data connection, are logged as one communication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging cen tre, or web pages a re shown as packet data connections. To add the phone number fr om a communication event to Contacts, select Options > Save to Cont acts , and create a new contact, or add t he ph one number to an existing contact. To copy the number, for example to paste it to a text message, selec t Optio ns > Use number > Co py . To view a single type of communication event or communication events with one other party, select Options > Filter and the desired filter. To erase the contents of the lo g, recent c alls register, and messag ing de livery repo rts permanently, select Options > Clear log . Call and send messages from Log Select Menu > Log . To call back a caller, select Recent cal ls > Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled n umbers . Select the caller and Options > Call . To reply to a caller with a message, select Recent calls > Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled numbers . Select the caller and Options > Create message , and send a message. Log settings Select Menu > Log . 65 Phone
To set the time for keeping all communication events in the log, select Option s > Settin gs > Log duration and the time. If you select No log , all log contents are permanently deleted. 66 Phone
Internet With your Nokia E52, you can browse the web and download and install n ew applications to your device. Yo u can also use your device as a modem and co nnect your PC to the internet. Browser About Browser With the Browser application, you can view web pages on the internet. Select Menu > Web . If the web page displays u nreadable characters while browsing, select Menu > Web and Options > Settings > Pa ge > Default encoding , and a corresponding encoding. To browse the web, you need to have an internet access point configured in your device. The browser requires network service. Browse the web With the Browser application, you can browse web pages. Select Menu > Web . Shortcu t: To open Browser, press and hold 0 in the home screen. Go to a web page â In the bookmarks view, select a bookmark, or start en tering a web address (the field opens automatically), and select Go to . Some web pages may contain material, such as video clips, that requires a large amou nt of memory to view. If your device runs out of memory while loading such a web page, insert a memory card. Otherwise, the video clips are not displayed. Disable graphics to save memory and spee d up downloading â Select Options > Settings > Page > Load content > Text only . Refresh the cont ent of th e web page â Select Options > Web page opt ions > Reload . View snapshots of we b pages you have visited â Select Back . A list of pages you have visi ted during the current browsing s ess ion opens. This opt ion is available if History list is activate d in the browser settings. Block or allow the automatic opening of multiple windows â Select Options > Web page options > Block pop-ups or Allow pop-ups . View the shor tcut keys â Select Options > Keypad shortcuts . To edit the sh ortcut keys, select Edit . Zoom in or out o n a web page â Pres s * or # . Tip: To go to the home screen w ithout exiting the Browser application or clos ing the connection, press the end key once. 67 Intern et
Browser toolbar The browser toolbar helps yo u select frequently used functions of the browser. To open the toolbar, press and hold the scroll key on a blank spot on a web page. To move within the toolbar, scroll left or right. To select a function, press the scroll key. To view a description of a toolbar icon's function, scroll to the toolbar icon. Navigate pages When you are browsing a large web page, you can use Mini Map or Page overview to vi ew the page at one glance. Select Menu > Web . Activate the Mini Map â Select Options > Settings > General > Mini map > On . When you scroll through a large web page, the Mini Map opens and shows an overview of the page. Move on the Mini Map â Scroll left, ri gh t, up, or down . When you find the desired loca tion, stop scrolling. The Mini Map disappears and leaves yo u at the select ed location. Find information on a web page with Page overview 1. Press 8 . A miniature image of the current web page opens . 2. Move on the miniature im age by scrolli ng up, d own, left, or right. 3. When you find a section you wa nt to view, select OK to go to that section on the web page. Web feeds a nd blogs With web feeds, you can easi ly follow news headlines and your favourite blogs. Select Menu > Web . Web feeds are XML files on web pages. They are us ed to share, for example, the latest news headlines or blogs. It is common to find web feeds on web, blog, an d wiki pages. The browser application automatically detects if a web page contains web feeds. Subscribe to a web fe ed wh en a feed is available on the page â Select Options > Add fe ed . Update a web feed â In the Web feeds view, select a feed and Options > Web feed options > Refresh . Set automatic up date for all web fee ds â In the Web feeds view, select Options > Edi t > Edit . This option is not available if one or more feeds are marked. Widgets Widgets bring more content to your device! Widgets are small, downloadable web ap plications that deliv er multimedia, news feeds, an d other information, such as weather reports, to your device. Installed widgets appear as separate applications in the Applications folder. You can download widgets from the w eb. You can also install widget s on a compatible memo ry card (if available). 68 Intern et
The default access point for wi dgets is the same as in the web browser. When active in the background, some widgets may updat e information automatically i n your device. Using widg ets may involve t h e transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For information about data transmission charges, contact your service provider. Content search With keyword search, you can quickly find the information you are looking for on a web page. Select Menu > Web . Search for text within the current web page â Select Options > Find word . To go to the previous or next match, scroll up or down. Tip: To search for text within the current web page, press 2 . Bookmarks You can store your favourite web pages in Bookmarks for instant access. Select Menu > Web . Access bookmarks 1. If you have a page othe r than Bookmarks as your homepage, select Options > Go to > Bookmarks . 2. Select a web address from th e list or from the collection of bookmarks in the Recently visited pages folder. Save the current web page as a bookma rk â While browsing, select Options > Web page option s > Save as bookmark . Edit or delete bookmarks â Selec t Options > Bookmark manager . Send or add a bookmark, or set a bookmarked web page as the homepage â Select Options > Boo kmark options . Empty the cache Emptying the cache memory helps you keep your data secure. The information or se rvices you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the device. If you have accessed or tried to access confidential information requiring passwords, empty th e cache after each browsing session. Select Options > Clear privacy data > Cache . End the connection End the con nection and close the Bro wser application â Sel ect Options > Exit . Delete cookies â Select Options > Clear privacy data > Cookies . Cookies contain information collected about your v isits to web pages. Connection security If the security indicator ( ) is displayed during a connection, the data transm i ssion between the device and the internet gateway or server is encryp ted. 69 Intern et
The security icon does not in dicate that the data transmission between the ga teway and the content server (where the data is stored) is secure. The service provider secures the data transmiss ion between the gateway and the content server. Security certificates may be required for some services, such as banking services. You ar e notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. Important: Even if the use of ce rtificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably sm aller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate mana ger must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certific ates for increased security to be available. Certificates ha ve a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. Before changing an y certificate settings, you must make sure that you really trust th e owner of the certificate and that the certific at e really belongs to the listed owner. Web settings Select Menu > Web and Options > Sett ings and from the following: General settings ⢠Access point â Change the default access point . Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service pro vider. You may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. ⢠Homepage â Define the homepage. ⢠Mini map â Turn Mini Map on or off. Mini Map helps with web page nav igation. ⢠History li st â If you select On , while browsing, to see a list of the pages you ha ve visited during the curren t session, select Back . ⢠Web address suffix â Enter a web address suffix that the device uses by default when you enter a web address in the Go to field (f or example, .com or .org). ⢠Security warnings â Hide or show security notification s. ⢠Java/ECMA script â Enable or disable the use of scripts. ⢠Java/ECMA script errors â Select whether you want to receive script notifications. Page settings ⢠Load content â Select whether you want to load images and other objects wh ile browsing. If you select Text only , to lo ad images or objects later during browsing, select Opti ons > Display opti ons > Load images . ⢠Default encoding â If text characters are not shown correctly, you can select an other encoding according to the language for the current page. ⢠Block pop-ups â Allow or block automatic opening of different pop- ups while brow sing. ⢠Automatic reload â Select whether yo u want the web pages to be refreshed automatically whi l e browsing. ⢠Font size â Define the font size that is used for web pages. Privacy settings 70 Intern et
⢠Recently visited pages â Enable or disable automatic bookmark collecting. If you wa nt to contin ue saving the addresses of the visited web pages into the Recently visited pa ges folder, but hide the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder . ⢠Form data saving â Select whether you want the password data or data you enter on different forms on a web page to be saved a nd used the next time you open the page. ⢠Cookies â Enable or disa ble the receiving and sending of cookies. Web feed settings ⢠Acc. point for auto-update â Select the desired access point for updating. This option is only av ailable when Automati c updates is active. ⢠Update when ro aming â Select whether you want the web feeds to be up dated automatically when roaming. Browse the intranet Select Menu > Office > Intranet . To connect to an intra net, open the Intranet appl ication and select Options > Connect . If you have several intranet destinations define d in Connection settings, select Change destinatio n to select which intranet to browse. To define the settings for the intra net connection, select Options > Se ttings . Ovi Store About Ovi Store With Ovi Store, you can downloa d mobile games, applications, videos, pictures , themes, and ringing tones to your device. Some items are free of charge; others you n e e d t o p a y f o r w i t h y o u r c r e d i t c a r d o r i n y o u r ph o n e b i l l . The availability of pay ment methods depends on your country of residence and your network service provider. Ovi Store offers content that is compatible with your mobile device and relevant to your tastes and location. Connect your computer to web You can use yo ur device to connect y our PC to the web . 1. Connect the data cable to the USB connectors of your device and your PC. 2. Select Connect PC to web . The necessary software is automatically installed from your device to the PC. 3. Accept the installation in your PC. Accept also the connection, if prompted. Wh en the connection to the web is established, the web browser of your PC opens. You must have administrator rights to your PC, a nd the autorun opti on enabled in the PC. If you use Mac OS , select PC Suite as the connection method. For more information, see www.nokia .com/ support . 71 Intern et
Travelling Need directions? Looking for a restaurant? Your device has the tools to get you where y ou want to be. Positioning (GPS) You can use applic ations such as GPS da ta to determine your location or measure di stances. These applications require a GPS connection. About GPS The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by th e government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accura cy and maintena nce. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made by the United St ates government and is subject to change with t he United States Department of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan . Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Avai lability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buil dings, natural obstacles, an d weather condit ions. GPS signals may not be available inside buildings or underground and may be impaired by materials s uch as concrete and metal. GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data fro m the GPS receiver and cellular radi o networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. The coordinates in the GP S are expressed using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. The availability of the coordinates ma y vary by region. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) Your device also supports assisted GPS (A-GPS) . A-GPS requires network support. Assisted GPS (A -GPS) is used to retrieve ass istance data over a packet data connection, which assi sts in calculating the coordinates of your current location when your device is receiving sign als from satellites. When you activate A-GPS, your device receives use f ul satellite information from an assistance data server over the cellular network. With the help of assisted data, your device can obtain the GPS position faster. Your device is preconfigured to use the Nokia A-GPS service, if no service provid er-specific A-GPS settings are available. The assistan ce data is retrieved from th e Nokia A-GPS service server only when needed. To disable the A-GPS service, select Menu > Applications > GPS dat a and Options > Positio ning settings > Positioni ng methods > As sisted G PS > Options > Disable . 72 Travelling
You must have an inte rnet access point defined in the device to retrieve assistance data from t he Nokia A-GPS service over a packet data connection. The ac cess point for A-GPS can be defined in posi tioning settings. A wireless LAN (WLAN) access point cannot be used for this service. Only a packet data internet access point can be used. Your device asks you to select the internet a ccess point when GPS is used for the first time. Tips on creating a GPS connection Check the satelli te signal status â Select Menu > Applications and GPS data > Options > Satellit e status . If your device has found satellites, a bar for each satellite is shown in the satellite information view. The longer the bar, the stronger the satellite signal. When your device has receiv ed enough data from the satellite signal to calculate yo ur location, the colour of the bar changes. Initially your device must rece ive signals from at least four satellites to be able to calc ulate your location. When the initial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating your location with three satellites . However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. If no satellite signa l can be found, consider the following: ⢠If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. ⢠If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. ⢠If the weather conditions ar e bad, the signal strength may be affected. ⢠Some vehicles have tinted (athermic) win dows, which may block the satellite sign als. ⢠Ensure you do not cover th e antenna w ith your hand . Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to several minu tes. Establishing a GPS con nec tion in a vehicle may take longer. The GPS receiver draw s its po wer from the device battery. Usin g GPS may dra in the battery faster. Position requests You may receive a request from a network service to receive your position inform ation. Service providers may offer information about local topics, such as weather or traffic conditions, based on th e location of your device. When you receive a position request, the service that is making the request is displayed. Select Accept to allow your position information to be sent or Reject to deny the request. Landmarks With Landma rks, you can save the position information of specific locations in your de vice. You can sort the saved locations into different catego ries, such as business, and 73 Travelling
add other information to them, su ch as addresses. You can use your saved landmarks in compatible applications, such as GPS dat a. Select Menu > Applications > Landmarks . The coordinates in the GPS are expressed using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. Select Options and from the following: ⢠New landmark â Create a new landmark. To make a positioning request for your current location, select Current positi on . To select the location from the map, select Select from map . To enter the position information manually, select Enter manually . ⢠Edit â Edit or add inform ation to a saved lan dmark (for example, a street address). ⢠Add to category â Add a landmark to a category in Landmarks. Select ea ch category to which you want to add the landmark. ⢠Send â Send one or several landmarks to a compatible device. Your received landmarks are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You can sort your landmarks into preset categories, and create new categories. To ed it and create new landmark categories, open the categories tab, and select Options > Edit categori es . GPS data Select Menu > Applications > GPS data . GPS data is designed to provide route guidance information to a select ed destination, position information about your curre nt location, and tr avelling information, such as the approximat e distance to the destination and the app roximate duration of travel. The coordinates in the GP S are expressed using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. To use GPS data, the GPS receiver of your device must initially receive position information from at least four satellites to calculate your location. W hen the initial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating your location with three satellites. However, the accuracy is generally bett er when more satellites are found. Route guidance Select Menu > Applications > GPS data and Navigation . Start the route guidan ce outdoors. If started in doors, the GPS receiver may not receiv e the necessary informat ion from the satellites. Route guidance uses a rotating compa ss on the device display. A red ball shows the direction to th e destinatio n, and the approximate distance to it is shown inside the compass ring. Route guidance is designed to show the straightest route and the shortest distance to the destination, measured in a straight line. Any obstacle s on the route, such as buildings and natural obstacle s, are ignored. Differences in altitude are not ta ken into account when calcula ting the distance. Route guidance is active only wh en you move. To set your trip destination, select Opt ions > Set destinati on and a landmark as the destination, or enter the latitude and longitu de coordinates. 74 Travelling
To clear the destination set for you r trip, select Stop navigation . Retrieve position information Select Menu > Applications > GPS data and Positio n . In the position view, you can view the position information of your current lo cation. An estimate of the accuracy of the loca tion is displayed. To save your current loca tion as a landmark, select Options > Save position . Landmarks are saved locations with more information, and th ey can be used in other compatible applications and transferred between compatible devices. Trip meter Select Menu > Applications > GPS data and Trip distance . The trip meter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS sign als. To turn trip distance calculation on or off, select Options > Start or Stop . The calculated values remain on the display. Use this featu re outdoors to receive a better GPS signal. To set the trip di stance and time and average and maximum speeds to zero, and to star t a new calculation, select Option s > Reset . To set the trip meter an d total time to zero, select Rest art . Maps Maps overview Select Menu > Applications > Maps . Welcome to Maps. Maps shows you what is nearby, helps you pla n your route, and guides you where you want to go. ⢠Find cities, streets, and services. ⢠Find your way with turn- by-turn dire ctions. ⢠Synchronise your favourite loca tions and routes between your mobile device and the Ovi Maps internet service. ⢠Check weather forecasts and other local information, if available. Note: Downloading cont ent su ch as maps, satellite images, voice files, guides or traffic information may involve transmission of larg e amounts of data (network service). Some services may not be avai lable in all countries, and may be provided only in sele cted languages. T he services may be network dependent. For more information, contact your network service provider. Almost all digital cartog raphy is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the cartography that you download for use in this device. Content such as sate llite images, guides, weather and traffic information and related services are generated by third parties independent of Nokia. The content may be 75 Travelling
inaccurate and incomp lete to some extent and is subject to availability. Never rely solely on the aforementioned content and related services. View your location and the map See your current location on the map, and brows e maps of different cities and countries. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and My pos ition . marks your current position, if avai lable. If your position is not available, indicates your last known position. If only cell ID based position ing is available, a red halo around the positioning icon in dicates the general area you might be in. In den sely popu lated areas, the ac curacy of the estimate increases, a nd the red halo is smaller than in lightly popu lated areas. Move on the map â Use the scroll key. By default, the map is oriented north. View your current or last known location â Press 0 . Zoom in or ou t â Press * or # . If you browse to an area not covered by the maps that are stored on your device and you have an active data connection, new maps are automatically downloaded. Map coverage varies by country and region. Map view 1 â Selected location 2 â Indicator area 3 â Point of interest (for example, a railway station or a museum) 4 â Information area Change the look of the map View the map in different mode s, to easily identify where you are. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and My position . Press 1 , and select from the following: ⢠Map â In the standard map view , details such as location names or motorway numbers, are easy to read. ⢠Satellite â For a detailed view, use sa tellite images. ⢠Terrain â View at a glance the ground type, for example, when you are travelling off-road. Change between 2D and 3D views â Press 3 . 76 Travelling
About positioning methods Maps displays your location on the map using GPS, A-GPS, WLAN, or cell ID based positioning. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satellite-based navigation system used for calculating your location. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is a network service that sends you GPS data, improving the sp eed and accuracy of the positioning. Wireless local area network (WLAN) positioning imp roves position accuracy when GPS signals are not available, especially when you are indoors or between tall buildings. With cell ID based positioning, the position is determined through the antenna tower your mobile device is currently connected to. Depending on the available positioning method, the accuracy of positioning may vary from a few metres to several kilometres. When you use Maps for the first time, you are prompted to define the internet access point to use to download m ap information, use A-GPS, or connect to a WLAN. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operate d by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The accuracy of location data ca n be affected by adjustments to GPS satelli tes made by the United Stat es government and is subject to change with th e United States Department of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Availa bility and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather conditi ons. GPS signals may not be available inside buildings or underground and may be impaired by materials such as concrete and metal. GPS should not be us ed for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver and cellular rad io networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. Note: Using WLAN may be restricted in some countries. For example, in Fr ance, you are only allowed to use WLAN indoors. For more information, contact your local authorities. Find a location Maps helps you find spe cific locations and businesses . Select Menu > Applications > Maps and Search . 1. Enter search words, such as a street address or postcode. To clear the search field, select Clear . 2. Select Submit . 3. In the list of pro posed matches, go to the desired item. To display the location on the map, select Map . To view the other locations of the search result list on the map, scro ll up or down. Return to the li st of proposed matches â Select List . Search for diff erent types of ne arby places â Select Browse categories and a category, such as shopping, accommodation, or transport. 77 Travelling
If no search results are found, ensu re the spelling of your search terms is correct. Problems with your internet connection may also affect re sults when sea rching online. To avoid data transfe r costs, you can al so get search result s without an acti ve internet connect ion, if you have maps of the searched area stored on your device. View location details View more information about a specific location or place, such as a hotel or restau rant, if available. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and My pos ition . View the detail s of a place â Select a place, press the scroll key, and select Show details . Save places and routes Save addresses, place s of interest, and routes, so they can be quickly used later. Select Menu > Applications > Maps . Save a place 1. Select My position . 2. Go to the location. To search for an address or place, select Search . 3. Press the scroll key. 4. Select Save place . Save a route 1. Select My position . 2. Go to the location. To search for an address or place, select Search . 3. To add another route point, press the scroll key, and select Add to route . 4. Select Add new route po int and the appropriate option. 5. Select Show route > Options > Save route . View your saved places and routes â Select Favourites > Places or Rout es . View and organ i se places or routes You can quickly access the places and routes you have saved. Group the places and routes in to a collection, for example, when planning a trip. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and Favourites . View a saved place on the map 1. Select Places , and go to the place. 2. Select Show on map . To return to the list of sav ed places, select List . Create a collection â Select Create new collection , a nd enter a collection name. Add a saved place to a collection 1. Select Places , and go to the place. 2. Select Organise collections . 3. Select New collection or an existing collection. If you need to delete a route, go to the Ovi Maps internet service at www.ovi.com. 78 Travelling
Send places to your friends When you want to share pl ace information with your friends, send these details directly to their devices. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and My position . Send a place to your fr ien d's compatible device â Select a location on the map, press the scroll key, and select Send . Share location Publish your current location to Facebook, together with text and a picture. Your Facebook friends can see your location on a map. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and Share loc. . To share your location , you need a Nokia a ccount and a Facebook account. 1. Sign in to your N okia account, or, if you do not yet have one, select Create new account . 2. Sign in to your Facebook account. 3. Select your current location. 4. Enter your status upda te. 5. To attach a picture to your post, select Add a photo . 6. Select Share location . Manage your Facebook account â In the main view, select Options > Account > Share location settings > Facebook . Sharing your location and vi ewing the location of others requires an internet connec tion. This may involve the transmission of larg e amounts of data and related data traffic costs. The Facebook terms of use a pply to sharing your location on Facebook. Familiarise your self with the Facebook terms of use and the privac y practices. Before sharing your location to others, always consider carefully with whom you are sharing it. Check the privacy settings of the social netw orking service you are using a s you might share your location with a large group of people. Synchronise your Favourites Plan a trip on your com puter at the Ovi Ma ps website, synchronise the saved places and routes with your mobile device, and access the plan on th e go. To synchronise places or routes between your mobile device and the Ovi Maps internet service, you need to be signed in to your Nokia account. Select Menu > Applications > Maps . Synchronise saved places and routes â Select Favourites > Synchronise wit h Ovi . If you do not have a Nokia account, you are prompted to create one. You can set your device to synchronise your Favourites automatically when you open or close the Maps application. Synchronise Favourites automatically â Select Options > Settings > Synchronisation > Change > At start-up and shut-d. . Synchronising requires an acti ve internet connection, and may involve the transmission of large amounts of dat a through your service providerâÂÂs network. For information 79 Travelling
about data transmission ch ar ges, contact your service provider. To use the Ovi Maps internet service, go to www.ovi.com. Get voice guidance Voice guidance, if available for your language, helps you find your way to a desti nation, leaving you free to enjoy the journey. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and Drive or Walk . When you use drive or walk navigation for the first time, you are asked to select the la nguage of the voice guidance, and download the appropriat e files. If you select a langua ge that includes street names, also the street names are said al oud. Voice guidance may not be available for your language. Change the voice g uidance language â In the ma in view, select Options > Se ttings > Navigation > Drive guidanc e or Walk guid ance and the appropriate option. Deactivate voice guidance â In the main view, select Options > Settings > Navigation > Drive guidance or Walk guidance and None . Repeat the voice guidanc e for car navigation â In the navigatio n view, select Options > Repe at . Adjust the v olume of the v oice guid ance for car navigation â In the navigation view, select Op tions > Volume . Drive to your destination When you need turn-by-turn directions while driving, Maps helps you get to your destination. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and Drive . Drive to a destination â Select Set de stination and the appropriate option. Drive to your home â Select Drive home . When you select Drive home or Walk home for the firs t time, you are prompted to de fine your home location . To later change the home lo cation, do the following: 1. In the main view, select Options > Settings > Naviga tion > Home L ocation > Change > Redefine . 2. Select the appropriate option. Tip: To drive wi thout a set destination, select Map . Your location is displayed on t he centre of the map as you move. Change views d u ring navigation â Pr ess the scroll key, and select 2D view , 3D view , Ar row view , or Route overview . Obey all local laws. Always k eep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. 80 Travelling
Navigation view 1 â Route 2 â Your location and direction 3 â Compass 4 â Information bar (speed, distance, time ) Get traffic and safety information Enhance your driving expe rience with real-time information about traffic ev ents, lane assistance, and speed limit warnings, if available for your country or region. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and Drive . View traffic ev ents on the map â Duri ng drive navigation, select Options > Traffic info . The events are displayed as triangles and lines. Update traffic informati on â Select Optio ns > Traffic info > Update traffic info . When planning a route, you can set the device to avoid traffic events, such as traffic jams or roadworks. Avoid traffic ev ents â In the main view, select Options > Settings > Navigation > Rerou te due to traffic . Warning: The location of speed/safety cameras can be shown on your route during navigation, if this feature is enabled. Some jurisdictions prohibit or regulate the use of speed/safety camera location data. Nokia is not responsible for the accuracy, or the consequences of us e of speed/safety came ra location data. Walk to your destination When you need directions to follow a route on foot, Maps guides you over squares, an d through parks, pedestrian zones, and even shopping centres. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and Walk . Walk to a destination â Select Set dest ination and the appropriate option. Walk to your home â Select Walk home . When you select Drive home or Walk home for the first time, you are prompt ed to define your home locat ion. To later change the home location, do the following: 81 Travelling
1. In the main view, select Options > Settings > Naviga tion > Home Lo cation > Change > Redefine . 2. Select the appropriate option. Tip: To walk with out a set destina tion, select Map . Your location is displayed on the centre of the map as you move. Plan a route Plan your jou rney, and cr eate your route and view it on the map before sett ing off. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and My pos ition . Create a route 1. Go to your starti ng point. 2. Press the scroll key , and select Add to route . 3. To add another route point, select Add new route point and the appropriate option. Change the order of the route points 1. Go to a route point. 2. Press the scroll key , and select Move . 3. Go to the place where you want to move the route point to, and select OK . Edit the locat ion of a route poi nt â Go to the route point, press the scroll key , and select Edit and the appropriate option. View the rou te on the map â S elect Sho w route . Navigate to the dest ination â Select Show route > Options > Start driving or Start walking . Change the settings for a route The route settings affect the navig ation guidance and the way the route is displayed on the map. 1. In the route planner view, op en the Settings tab. To get to the route planner view from the navigation view, select Options > Route points or Route point list . 2. Set the transportation mode to Drive or Walk . If you select Walk , one-way streets are regarded as normal streets, and walkways an d routes through, for example, parks and shopping centres, can be used. 3. Select the desired option. Select the walking mode â Open the Settings tab, and select Walk > Preferred route > Streets or Straight line . Straight line is useful on off-road terrain as it indicates the walking direction. Use the faster or shorter driving rou te â Open the Settings tab, and select Drive > Route selection > Faster route or Shorter route . Use the opti mised driv ing route â Open the Settings tab, and select Drive > Route selection > Op timised . The optimised driving route combines the advantages of both the shorter an d the faster routes. You can also choose to allow or avoid using, for example, motorways, toll roads, or ferries. Use the compass When the comp ass is activated, both the arr ow of the compass and the ma p rotate automatically in the direction to which the top of your device is pointing. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and My position . 82 Travelling
Activate the comp ass â Press 5 . Deactiv ate the co mpass â Pres s 5 again. The map is oriented north. The compass is active when ther e is a gr een outline. If the compass needs calibration, th e outline of the compass is red or yellow. Calibrate the compass â Rotate the device around all axes in a continuous moveme nt until the outline of the compass turns green. 83 Travelling
Nokia Office Tools Nokia Office T ools support mobile business and enable effective communication with work teams. Active notes Select Menu > Office > Acti ve notes . Active notes allows you to create, edit, and view different kinds of notes, for examp le, meeting memos, hobby notes, or shopping lis ts. You can in sert images, videos, and sound in the notes. You can link notes t o other a pplications, such as Contacts, an d send notes to others . Create and edit notes Select Menu > Office > Acti ve notes . To create a note, st art writing. To edit a note, select the note an d Options > Editing options . To add boldface, italics, or underlining to your text or change the font colour, press a nd hold # , and scroll to select the text. Then select Options > Text . Select Options and from the following: ⢠Insert object â Insert images, sound or video clips, business cards, web bookma rks, and files. ⢠Insert new â Add new items to the note. Y ou can record sound and video cl ips, and capture images. ⢠Send â Send the note. ⢠Link note to call â Select Add contacts to link a note to a contact. The note is displayed when making a call to or receiving a call from the contact. Active notes settings Select Menu > Office > Activ e notes and Options > Settings . Select wher e to save notes â Select Memory in use an d the desired memory. Change the layout of active n otes â Select Change view > Grid or List . Display a note during phone calls â Select Show note during call > Yes . Tip: If you tempora rily do not want to see notes during phone calls, select S h o w n o t e d u r i n g c a l l > No . This way you do not have to remove the links between notes and contact cards. Calculator Select Menu > Office > Cal culator . This calculator has limited a ccuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, enter th e first number of the calculation. Select a function such as add or subtract from the function map. Enter the second number of the 84 Nokia Office Tools
calculation, and select = . The calculator performs operations in the order they ar e entered. The result of the calculation remains in the editor field and can be used as the first number of a new calculation. The device saves the result of the last ca lculation in its memory. Exiting the Calcula tor application or switching off the device does not clear th e memory. To recall the last saved result the next time you open the Calculator application, select Options > Last result . To save the numbers or resu lts of a calculation, select Options > Memory > Save . To retrieve the results of a calculation from the memory and use th em in a calculation, se lect Options > Memory > Recall . File manager Select Menu > Office > Fi le mgr. . About File manager Select Menu > Office > Fi le mgr. . With File manager, you ca n browse, manage, and open files. The available options may vary. To map or delete drives, or to define settings for a compatible remote drive connected to your device, select Options > Re mote drives . Find and organise files Select Menu > Office > File mg r. . To find a file, select Options > Find . Select where to search, and enter a search term th at matches the file name. To move or copy files and fold ers, or to create new folders, select Optio ns > Orga nise . Shortcut: To apply actions to multiple items at once, mark the items. To mark or unmark items, press # . Manage a memory card Select Menu > Office > File mg r. . These options are available on ly if a compatible memory card is inserted in the device. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Memory card options â Rename or format a memory card. ⢠Memory card password â Password protect a memory card. ⢠Unlock memory card â Unlock a memory card. Back up files to a memory card Select Menu > Office > File mg r. . To back up files to a memory c ard, select the file types you want to back up, and Optio ns > Back up phone memory . Ensure that your memo ry card has enough free memory for the files that you ha ve chosen to back up. 85 Nokia Office Tools
Quickoffice Read Microsoft Word, Ex cel, and PowerPoint documents You can view Microsoft Office documents, such as Word documents, Excel worksheets, or PowerPoint presentations. Select Menu > Office > Quickoffice . Open a file â Select Browse files and the memory where the file is stored, browse to the correct folder, and select the file. Sort files â Select Opt ions > Sort by . Not all formats or features are supported. Converter Select Menu > Office > Converter . The converter has limited a ccuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Convert measurements Select Menu > Office > Converter . 1. Scroll to the type field, and select Options > Conversi on type to open a list of measures. Select the measurement type to use (other t han currency) and OK . 2. Scroll to the first unit field, and select Options > Select unit . S elect the unit from which to conv ert and OK . Scroll to the next unit field, and select the unit to which to conv ert. 3. Scroll to the first amount field, and enter the value to convert. The other amount field changes a utomatically to show the converted value. Set base currency and exchange rate Select Menu > Office > Co nverter . When you change base curre ncy, you must enter new exchange rates because all pr eviously set exchange rates are cleared. Before you can make currency con versions, you must choose a base currency and add exchange r ates. The rate of the base currency is al ways 1. The base currency determines the conversion ra tes of the other currencies. 1. To set the exchange rate fo r the unit of currency, scroll to the type field, and select Opti ons > Currency rates . 2. Scroll to the currency type, and enter the exchange rate you would like to set per single un it of currency. 3. To change the base currency, scroll to the currency, and select Options > Set as base currency . 4. Select Done > Yes to save the ch anges. After you have set all the necess ary exchang e rates, you can make currency conversions. 86 Nokia Office Tools
Zip manager Select Menu > Office > Zi p . With Zip manager, you can crea te new archive files to store compressed ZIP formatted file s; add single or multiple compressed files or directories to an archive; set, clear, or change the archive pa ssword for protected archives; and change settings, such as comp ression level, and file name encoding. You can save the archive files in the device memory or on a memory card. PDF reader Select Menu > Office > Ado be PDF . With PDF reader, you can re ad PDF documents on the display of your device; search for text in the documents; modify settings, such as zoom level and page views; and send PDF file s using e-mail. Printing You can print documents, such as files, messages, ima ges, or web pages, from your device. You may not be able to print all types of documents . File printing Print files Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Printers . Before printing, ensu re that all the necessary configurations have bee n done to connect your device to the printer. Select Options > Printin g options and from t he following: ⢠Print â Print a document. To prin t to a file, select Print to file , and define the location for the file. ⢠Page setup â You can change the p aper size and orientation, define the margin s, and in sert a header or a footer. The maximum length of th e header and footer is 128 characters. ⢠Preview â Preview the document before printing. Printing options Open a document, such as a file or message, and select Options > Printing options > Print . Define the following options: ⢠Printer â Select an available printer from the list. ⢠Print â Select All pages , Even pages , or Odd pages as the print range. ⢠Print range â Selec t All pages in range , Current page , or Defined pages as the page range. ⢠Number of copi es â Select the number of copies to print. ⢠Print to file â Select to print to a file and determine the location for the file. The available options may vary. Printer settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Printers . To add a new printer, select Options > Add . Define the following: 87 Nokia Office Tools
⢠Printer â Enter a name for the printer. ⢠Driver â Select a driver for the printer. ⢠Bearer â Select a bearer for the printer. ⢠Access point â Select the access point. ⢠Port â Select the port. ⢠Host â Define the host. ⢠User â Enter the user. ⢠Queue â Enter the print queue. ⢠Orientation â Select the orientation. ⢠Paper size â Select the paper size. ⢠Media type â Select the media type. ⢠Colour mode â Select the colour mode. ⢠Printer model â Select the printer model. The available options m ay vary. Image print You can print images from yo ur device using a printer compatible with PictBridge. You can only print images that are in the JPEG file format. To print images in Photos, camera, or image viewer, mark the images, and select Options > Print . Connect to printer Connect your device to a compatible printer with a compatible data cable, and select Image transfer as the USB connection mode. To set your device to ask the purpose of the connection each time the cable is connected, select Menu > Ctrl. panel and Connectivity > USB > Ask on conn ection > Yes . Print preview After you select the p rinter, the selected images are displayed using predefined layouts. If the images do not fit on a single page, scroll up or down to display the ad ditional pages. Image print view After you select t he images to pri nt and the print er, define the printer settings. Select from the following: ⢠Layout â Select the layout for the images. ⢠Paper size â Select the paper size. ⢠Print quality â Select the print qual ity. Clock Select Menu > Applications > Clock . In the Clock application , you can view your local time an d time zone information, set and edit alarms, or modify date and time settings. Alarm clock Select Menu > Applications > Clock . To view your active an d inactive alarms, open t he alarms tab. To set a new a larm, select Options > New alarm . Define the repetition, if needed. When an al arm is active, is displayed. To turn off the sounding alarm, select Stop . To stop the alarm for a certain tim e period, select Sn ooze . If your 88 Nokia Office Tools
device is switched off when an alarm is due, your dev ice switches itself on a nd starts soundi ng the alarm tone . Tip: To define the time perio d after which the alarm sounds again when you set it to snooze, select Options > Settings > Alarm snooze time . To cancel an alarm , select Options > Remove alarm . To change the t ime, date, and clo ck type setting s, select Options > Se ttings . To automatically updat e the time, date, and time zone information to your device (network service), select Options > Se ttings > Automatic time update > On . World clock Select Menu > Applications > Cloc k . To view the time in differen t locations, open the world clock tab. To add location s to the list, select Op tions > Add location . You can add a maximum of 15 locations to the list. To set your current location, scro ll to a location, and select Options > Set as current location . The location is displayed in the clock main view, and the time in you r device is changed according to the selected location. Ensure that the t ime is correct and match es your time zone. Clock settings Select Options > S ettings . To change the t ime or date, select Time or Date . To change the clock shown on the home screen, select Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To allow the mobile phone network to update the time, date, and time zone informat ion to your device (network service), select Automatic time update > On . To change the alarm tone, select Clock alarm tone . Dictionary You can tran slate words from one langu age to another. Not all languages may be supported. Look up a word to translate 1. Select Menu > Office > Dictionary . 2. Enter text in the search field. As you enter text, suggestions of words to translate are displayed. 3. Select the word from the list. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Listen â Listen to the selected word. ⢠History â Find previously tr anslated words from the current session. ⢠Langua ges â Chan ge the source or target lan guage, download languages from th e internet, or remove a language from the dict ionary. You cannot remove t he English language from the dictionary. You ca n have two additional languages inst alled, besides English. ⢠Speech â Edit the voice feature settings. You can adjust the speed and volume of the voice. 89 Nokia Office Tools
Notes Select Menu > Office > Notes . You can create an d send notes to other compatible devices, and save received plai n text files (TXT file format) to Notes. To write a note, start en tering the text. The note editor opens automatically. To open a note, select Open . To send a note to othe r compatible devices, select Options > Send . To synchronise or to define synchronisation settings for a note, select Options > Synchronisation . Select Start to initialise synchronisation or Settings to define the synchronisation settings for the note. 90 Nokia Office Tools
Media Your device contains a va riety of media applicat ions for both business and leisure time use. Camera Activate the camera To activate the camera, select Menu > Media > Camera . Tip: You can also activate the camera by press ing and holding the capture key until the Camera application opens. Full focus Your device camera has a Full focus feature. Full focus enables you to capture images in which objects in both the foreground and back ground are in focus. Capture an image Select Menu > Media > Camera , or press the capture key to activate the camera. Your device supports an image capture resolution of 2048x1536 pixels. The image reso lution in this guide may appear different. To capture an image, use the display as a viewfinder, and press the capture key. The device saves the image in Gallery. To zoom in or out before ca pturing an image, use the zoom keys. The toolbar provides you with shortcuts to different ite ms and settings before an d after capturing an image or recording a video. Select to a toolbar item and press the scroll key. Switch to image mode. Switch to video mode. Select the scene. Switch the video light on or off (video mode only) Select the flash mode (images only). Activate the self-timer (images only). Activate sequen ce mode (images o nly). Select a colour tone. Adjust the white balance. Adjust the exposure compensation (image s only). The available option s vary depending on the capture mode and view you are in. The settings return to the default values when you close the camera. To customise the camera tool bar, switch to image mode, and select Options > Customise to olbar . 91 Media
To view the toolbar before and a fter capturing an image or recording a video, select Options > Show toolbar . To view the toolbar only when you need it, select Options > Hide toolbar . Scenes Select Menu > Media > Camera . A scene helps you to find the right colour and lighting settings for the current environment. The settin gs of each scene have been set accord ing to a certain style or environment. To change the scene, select Scene m odes from the toolbar. To make your own scene, scroll to User defined, and select Options > Change . To copy the settings of another scene, select Based on scene mode and the desired scene. To activate your own scene, select User defined > Select . Capture images in a sequence Select Menu > Media > Camera . To capture several images in a sequence, if enough memory is available, select Sequence mode fr om the toolbar and press the capture key. The captured images are show n in a grid on the display. To view an image, scroll to it and press the scroll key. If you used a time in terval, only the last image is shown on the display, and the other imag es are available in Gallery. To send the image, select Options > Send . To send the image to a caller durin g an active call, select Options > Send to caller . To deactivate sequence mode, select Sequence mode > Single shot in the toolbar. View captur ed image Select Menu > Media > Camera . The image you captured is au tomatically saved in Gallery. If you do not want to keep the image, select Delete from the toolbar. Select from the following toolbar items: ⢠Send â Send the image to compatible devices. ⢠Send to caller â Send the image to the caller during an active call. ⢠Post to â Send the image to your compatible online album (network service). To use the image as the background image, select Options > Set as wallpaper . To add the image to a contact, select Op tions > Assign to contact . Record videos Select Menu > Media > Camera . 1. If the camera is in image mode, select video mode fr om the toolbar. 2. To start recording, press the capture key. 92 Media
3. To pause recording, select Pause . Select Continue to resume recording. 4. To stop recording, select Stop . The video clip is automatically saved in Gall ery. The ma ximum length of the video clip depends on the available memory. Play a video clip Select Menu > Media > Camera . To play a recorded video clip, select Play from the toolbar. Select from the following toolbar items: ⢠Send â Send the video clip to other compatible devices. ⢠Send to caller â Send the video clip to the caller during an active call. ⢠Post to â Send the video clip to an online album (network service). ⢠Delete â Delete the video clip. To enter a new name for the video clip, select Opt ions > Rename video clip . Image settings Select Menu > Media > Camera . To change the still ima ge settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Image quality â Set the image quality. The better the image quality, the more me mory the image consumes. ⢠Show GPS info â To add the location information to the captured image, if the information is available, select On . ⢠Add to album â Define to which album t he captured images are saved. ⢠Show captured image â To see the image after the capture, select Yes . To continue capturing images immediately, select Of f . ⢠Default image name â Define the default name for the captured images. ⢠Extended digital z oom â The On (continuo us) option allows the zoom in crements to be smooth and continuous between the digi tal and extended digital zoom. The Off option allows a limited amount of zoom while retaining the image resolution. ⢠Capture tone â Set th e tone that sou nds when you capture an imag e. ⢠Memory in use â Choose where to store your images. ⢠Restore camer a settings â Restore the camera settings to the default values . Video settings Select Menu > Media > Camera . To change the video mode settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Video quality â Set the quality of the video clip. Select Sharing , if you want to send the video clip using a multimedia message. The cl ip is recorded with OCIF resolution, in the 3GPP fi le format, and the size is limited to 300 kB (approximately 20 seconds). You may not be able to send video clips saved in the MPEG-4 file format in a multimedia message. ⢠Show GPS info â To add the location information to the recorded video clip, if the information is available, select On . 93 Media
⢠Audio recording â Select Mute if you do not want to record sound. ⢠Add to album â Define to which album th e recorded videos are saved. ⢠Show captured vi deo â View the first frame of the recorded video clip after the recording stops. To view the entire video clip , select Play from the toolbar. ⢠Default video name â Define the default name for recorded video clips. ⢠Memory in use â Choose where to store your video clips. ⢠Restore camera se ttings â Restore the camera settings to the default values. Gallery About Gallery Select Menu > Media > Gallery . Gallery is a storage place for your images, video and sound clips, songs, a nd streaming links. Main view Select Menu > Media > Gallery . Select from the following: ⢠Images â View images and video clips in Photos. ⢠Video clips â View video clips in Video centre. ⢠Songs â Open Music player. ⢠Sound clips â Listen to sound clip s. ⢠Streaming links â View and open streaming links. ⢠Presenta tions â View presentations. You can browse and open fold ers and copy and move items to folders. You can also crea te albums and copy and add items t o albu ms. Files stored on your compatib le memory card (if inserted) are indicated with . To open a file, select the file from the list. Video clips and streaming links open and play in Video centre, and music and sound clips in Music player. To copy or move files to another memory location, select a file, Options > Move and copy , and the appro priate option. Sound clips Select Menu > Media > Gallery and Sound clips . This folder contains al l the sound clips you have downloaded from the web. The sound clips created with the Recorder application with MMS optimised or normal quality settings are also saved in this folder, but the sound clips created with high quali t y settings are stored in the Music player application. To listen to a sound file, select the file from the list. To rewind or fast-forward, scroll left or right. To download sounds, select Downl d. sounds . Streaming links Select Menu > Media > Gallery and Streaming links . To open a streaming link, sele ct the link from the list. 94 Media
To add a new streaming link, select Options > New link . Presentations Select Menu > Media > Gallery . With presentations, you can view scalable vector graphics (SVG) and flash file s (SWF), such as cartoons and maps. SVG images maintain their ap pearance wh en printed o r viewed with different screen sizes and resolutions. To view files, select Presentat ions . Go to an image, and select Options > Play . To pause playing, select Options > Pause . To zoom in, press 5 . To zoom out, press 0 . To rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise or anticlockwise, press 1 or 3 , respectively. To rotate the image 45 degrees, press 7 or 9 . To switch between full and normal screen mod e, press * . Photos About Photos Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Images and from the following: ⢠Captured â View all the images and videos you have captured. ⢠Months â View images and vi deos categorised by the month they where captured. ⢠Albums â View the default albums and the ones you have created. ⢠Tags â View the tags you ha ve created for each item. ⢠Downloads â View items and videos downloaded from the web or received as a multimedia or e-mail message. ⢠All â View all items. ⢠Share online â Post your images or videos to the web. Files stored on your compatible memory card (if inserted) are indicated with . To copy or move files to another memory location, select a file, Options > Move and copy , and from the available options. View images and videos Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Images and from the following: ⢠All â View all images and videos. ⢠Captured â View images captured and video clips recorded with the camera of your device. ⢠Downloads â View downloaded video clips. Images and video clips can also be sent to you from a compatible device. To be able to view a received image or video clip in Photos, you must first sa ve it. The images and video clip files are in a loop and ordered by date and time. The number of files is displayed. To browse the 95 Media
files one by one, scroll left or right. To browse files in groups, scroll up or down. To open a file, select the fi le. When an image opens, to zoom in the image, use the zoom keys. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently. To edit an image or a video clip, select Opt ions > Edit . To see where an image marked with was captured, select Options > Show on map . To print your images on a compatible printer, select Options > To printer or kiosk . To move images to an album for later printing, select Options > Add to album > Print la ter . View and edit file details Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Images . Go to an item. To view and edit image or video properties, select Options > Details > View and edit and from the following: ⢠Tags â View the currently us ed tags. To add more tags to the current file, select Add . ⢠Description â View a free-form description of the file. To add a description, select the field. ⢠Location â View GPS location information, if available. ⢠Title â View the thumbnail image of the file and the current file name. To edit th e file name, select the file name field. ⢠Albums â View in which albu ms the current file is located. ⢠Resolution â View the size of the image in pixels. ⢠Duration â View the length of the video. ⢠Usage rights â To view the DRM rights of the current file, select View . Organise images and videos Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Images . You can organise files as follows: To view items in the Tags view, add tags to the items. To view items by months, select Months . To create an album to st ore items, select Albums > Options > New album . To add an image o r a video clip to an album, select the item a nd Add to album from the active toolbar. To delete an image or vide o clip, select the item and Delete from the active toolbar. Active toolbar The active toolbar is availabl e only when you have selected an image or a video clip in a view. In the active toolbar, go to different items, and select the desired option. The available options vary depending on the view you are in and wh ether you have select ed an image or a video clip . To hide the toolbar, select Options > Hide toolbar . To activate the active toolbar when it is hidden, press the scroll key. Select an image or a video clip and from the following: 96 Media
View the image in la ndscape or portrait mode. Play the video clip. Send the image or video clip. Upload the image or video clip to a compatible online album (only ava ilable if you have set up an account for a compatible online album). Add the item to an album. Manage tags and othe r properties of the item. Albums Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Images an d Albums . With albums, y ou can conveniently m anage your images and video clips. To create a ne w album, select Options > New album . To add an image or a video clip to an album , select the item and Option s > Add to album . A list of album s opens. Select the albu m to which you want to ad d the image or video clip. The item you added to the album is still visible in Photos. To remove an image or a video clip from an album, select the album and the item, and Option s > Remove from album . Tags Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Images . Use tags to categorise media i t ems in Photos. You can create and delete tag s in Tag manager. Tag manager shows the currently used tag s and the number of items associated with each tag. To open Tag manager, select an image or video clip and Options > Details > Tag manager . To create a tag, select Options > New t ag . To assign a tag t o an image, select the image and Options > Add tags . To see the tags you have created, select Tags . The size of the tag name corresponds t o the number of items the tag is assigned to. To view all the imag es associated wit h a tag, select the t ag from the list. To view the list in alphabetical order, select Options > Alphabetical . To view the list in most fr equently used order, select Options > Most used . To remove an image from a tag, select the tag and the image, and select Options > Remove fro m tag . Slide show Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Im ages . To view your imag es as a slide s how, select an imag e and Options > Slide show > Play forwards or Play backwards . The slide show starts from the selected file. To view only the selected im ages as a slide show, se lect Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to mark images. To start the slide sh ow, select Options > Slide show > Play forwards or Play backwards . To resume a pause d slide show, select Co ntinue . 97 Media
To end the slide show, select En d . To browse the images, scroll left or right. Before starting th e slide sh ow, to adjust the slide show settings, select Options > Slide show > Settings and from the following: ⢠Music â Add sound to the slide show. ⢠Song â Select a music file from the list. ⢠Delay between slides â Adjust the tempo of the slide show. ⢠Transition â Make the slide show move smoothly from one slide to another, and zoom in and out in the images randomly. To adjust the volume duri ng the slide show, use the volume key. Edit images Image editor To edit the pictures after taki ng them or the ones already saved in Photos, select Options > Edit . The image editor opens. To open a grid where you can select different edit options indicated by small icons, select Options > A pply effect . You can crop and rotate the image; adjust the brightness, colour, contrast, and resolution ; and add effects, text, clip art, or a frame to the pict ure. Crop image To crop an image, select Options > A pply effect > Crop , and a predefined as pect r atio from the list. To crop the image size manually, select Manual . If you select Manual , a cross appear s in the upper left corner of the image. Use the scroll key to select the area to crop, and select Set . Another cross appears in the lower right corner. Again se l e c t t h e a r e a t o b e c r o p p e d . T o a d j u s t the first selected area, s elect Back . The selected areas form a rectangle that forms the cropped image. If you select a predefined aspe ct ratio, select the upper left corner of the area to be cropp ed. To resize the highlight ed area, use the scroll key. To fr eeze the selected area, press the scroll key. To move the area within the picture, use the scroll key. To select the area to be cropped, press the scroll key. Reduce re d-eye To reduce red-eye in an image, select Options > A pply effect > Red eye reduction . Move the cross onto the eye, and press the scroll key. A loop appears on the display . To resize the loop to fit the size of the eye, use the scro ll key. To reduce the redness, press the scroll key. When you have finished editing the image, press Done . To save the changes and return to the previous view, press Back . Useful shortcuts You can use th e following shor tcuts when editing images: ⢠To view a full-screen image, press * . To return to the normal view, press * ag ain. ⢠To rotate an image clockwise or counterclockwise, press 3 or 1 . ⢠To zoom in or out, press 5 or 0 . 98 Media
⢠To move on a zoomed imag e, scroll up, down, left, or right. Edit videos The video editor supports .3gp and .mp4 video file formats, and .aac, .am r, .mp3, and .wav audio file fo rmats. It does not necessa rily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. To edit video clips in Photos , scroll to a video clip, select Options > Ed it , and from the following: ⢠Merge â to add an image or a video clip to the beginning or the end of the selected video clip ⢠Change sound â to add a new so und clip, and to replace the original so und in the video clip. ⢠Add text â to add text to the beginning or the en d of the video clip ⢠Cut â to trim the video and mark the sections yo u want to keep in the video clip To take a snapshot of a vide o clip, in the cut video view, select Option s > Take snap shot . In the thumbnail preview view, press the scroll key, and select Take snapshot . Print images Image print To print images with Imag e print, select the image you want to print, and the p rin t option in Photos, camera, image editor, or image viewer. Use Image print to print your images using a compatible USB data cable, or Blue tooth connectivity. You can also print images using wi reless LAN. If a compatible memory card is inserted, you can store the images to the memory card, and print them using a compati ble printer. You can only prin t images that are in .jp eg format. The pictures taken w ith the camera ar e automatic ally saved in .jpeg format. Printer selection To print images with Ima ge pr int, select the i mage and the print option. When you use Image print for the first time, a list of available compatible printers is displayed. Select a printer. The printer is set as the default p rinter. To use a printer compatible with PictB ridge, connect the compatible data cable before you select the print option, and check that the data cable mode is se t to Image print or Ask on connection . The printer is automatica lly displayed when you select t he print option. If the default printer is not av ailable, a list of available printers is displayed. To change the default printer, select Option s > Settings > Default prin ter . Print preview After you select the printer, the selected images are displayed using predefined layouts. To change the layout, scroll left or right to browse through the available layouts for the se lected printer. If the images do not fit on a single page, sc roll up or down to display the additional pages. 99 Media
Print settings The available options v ary de pending on the capabilities of the printing device you selected. To set a defaul t printe r, select Options > Default printer . To select the paper size, select Paper size , the size of paper from the list, and OK . Select Cancel to return to the previous view. Share online About Share online Select Menu > Media > Share online . With Share online (network service), you can post your images, video clips, and sound clips from your dev ice to compatible online sharing services, such as al bums and blogs. You can also view and send comments to the pos ts in these services, and download content to your compatible Nokia device. The supported content types an d the availability of the Share online service may vary. Subscribe to services Select Menu > Media > Share online . To subscribe to an on line sharing service, go to the service provider's website, and check that your Nokia device is compatible with the service. Crea te an account as instructed on the website. You receive a user name and password needed to set up your device with th e account. 1. To activate a service, open the Share online application in your device, select a service and Options > Activate . 2. Allow the dev ice to create a network connect ion. If you are prompted for an internet access point, select one from the list. 3. Sign in to your account as instructed on the service providerâÂÂs website. For the availability a nd cost of the third party se rvices and data transfer costs, contact your se rvice provider or the relevant third party. Manage yo ur acco unts To view your accounts, select Opt ions > Settings > My accounts . To create a new account, select Options > Add new account . To change your user name or password for an account, select the account and Options > Open . To set the account as the default when sending posts from your device, select Options > Set as default . To remove an account, select the account and Options > Delete . Create a post Select Menu > Media > Share online . To post media files to a service, go to a service, and select Options > New upload . If the online sharing service 100 Media
provides channels for postin g files, select the desired channel. To add an image, video clip, or sound clip to the post, select Options > Insert . Enter a title or description for the post, if available. To add tags to the post, select Tags: . To enable the posting of lo cation information contained in the file, select Locat ion: . To send the post to the service, select Options > Upload . Post files from Photos You can post your files from Photos to an online sharing service. 1. Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Im ages and the files you want to post. 2. Select Options > Send > Upload and the desired account. 3. Edit your post as required. 4. Select Options > Upload . One-click upload One-click upload lets you post images to an online sharing service immediately af ter capturing th em. To use one-click upload, capture an image with your device camera, and select the online sharing icon from the toolbar. Tag list Select Menu > Media > Share online . Tags describe the content of the post, and help viewers find content in the online sharing services. To view the list of availabl e tags when creating a post, select Tags: . To add tags to your post, select a tag from the list and Done . To add several t ags to the post, select each tag and Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark . To search for tags, enter the search text in the search field. To add a tag to the tag list, select Options > New tag . Manage posts in Outbox Select Menu > Media > Share online . Outbox shows the posts you are currently uploading , posts that have failed to upload, and the p osts you have sent. To open Outbox, select Outbo x > Optio ns > Open . To start uploadin g a post, select the post and Option s > Upload now . To cancel uploa ding a post, select th e post and Options > Cancel . To delete a post, select the post and Op tions > Delete . View service content Select Menu > Media > Share online . 101 Media
To view the content of a serv ice, select the service and Options > Open . To open a feed, select the f eed. To open the feed in the browser, select the service provider's website. To view comments related to a file, select the file and Options > View comments . To view a file in full scre en mode, select the file. To update a feed, select the feed and Options > Update now . If you see an interestin g file and want to download the entire feed to your device, select the file and Options > Subscribe to contact . Service provider settings Select Menu > Media > Share online . To view the list of service providers, select Options > Settings > Service provide rs . To check the details of a service, select th e service from the list. To delete the selected service, select Option s > Delet e . Edit account settings Select Menu > Media > Share online . To edit your accounts, select Options > Settings > My accounts and an account. To change the user name for the account, select User name . To change the password for an account, s elect Password . To change the account name, select Account name . To determine the size for images that you p ost, select Upload image size > Original , Medium (1024 x 768 pixels), or Small (640 x 480 pixels). Edit advanced settings Select Menu > Media > Share online . To edit the advanced settings, se lect Opti ons > Settings > Advanced . To only use a wireless LAN (WLAN) connection for sharing, select Use cellu lar > Disabled . To also a llow a packet data connection, select Enabled . To allow sharing and downlo ading items while outside your home network, select Allow roaming > Enabled . To download new items from the s ervice automatically, select Download interval and the interval for the downloads. To download items manually, select Manual . Data counters Select Menu > Media > Share online . To check the amount of da ta you have uploaded and downloaded, select Optio ns > Settings > Data transferred . To reset the counters, select Optio ns > Clear sent , Cle ar receive d , or Clear all . 102 Media
Nokia Video Centre With Nokia Video Centre (network service), you can download and stream video c lips over the air from compatible internet video se rvices using a packet data or wireless LAN (WLAN) c onnection. You ca n also transfer video clips from a compatible PC to your device and view them in Video centre. Using packet data access p oints to download videos ma y involve the transmission of la rge amounts of da ta through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission cha rges. Your device may have predefined services. Service providers may provide free content or charge a fee. Check the pricing in the service or from the service provider. View and download video clips Connect to video services 1. Select Menu > Media > Video centre . 2. To connect to a service to install video services, select Add new servic es and the desired video service from the service catalogue. View a video clip To browse the content o f in stalled video services, select Video feeds . The content of some video services is divided into categories. To browse video clips, select a category. To search for a video clip in the service, select Video search . Search may not be availa ble in all services. Some video clips can be stream ed over the air, but others must be first downloaded to your device. To download a video clip, select Options > Download . Downloads continue in the background if you exit the application. The downloaded video clips are saved in My videos. To stream a video clip or view a downloaded one, select Options > Play . When the video clip is playing, use the selection keys and the scroll key to control the player. To adjust the volume, use the volume key. Warning: Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Listen to mus ic at a moderate level, and do not hold t he device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Resume download â Resume a paused or failed download. ⢠Cancel download â Cancel a download. ⢠Preview â P review a video clip. This option is available if supported by the serv ice. ⢠Video details â View information about a v ideo clip. ⢠Refresh list â Refresh the list of video clips. ⢠Open link in b rowser â Open a link in the web browser. Schedule downloads Setting the app lication to download video clips automatically may involve the tran smission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For information about data transmission charg es, contact your service provider. To schedule an automatic download 103 Media
for video clips in a service, select Opti ons > Schedule downloads . Video centre automatically downloads new video clips daily at the time you define. To cancel scheduled downloads, select Manual downl oad as the download met hod. Video feeds Select Menu > Media > Video c entre . The content of the installed vi deo services is distributed using RSS feeds. T o view and mana ge your feeds, select Video feeds . Select Options and from the following: ⢠Feed subscripti ons â Chec k your current feed subscriptions. ⢠Feed details â View information about a video. ⢠Add feed â Subscribe to new feeds. Select Via Video directory to select a feed from the services in the video directory. ⢠Refresh feeds â Refresh the content of all feeds. ⢠Manage account â Manage your account options for a particular feed, if available. ⢠Move â Move video clips to a desired location. To view the videos available in a feed, select a feed from the list. My videos My videos is a storage place fo r all video clips in the Video centre application. You can li st downloaded video clips and video clips recorded with the device camera in separate views. 1. To open a folder and view video clips, us e the scroll key. To control the video player when the video clip is playing, use the scroll key and the selection keys. 2. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Resume download â Resume a paused or failed download. ⢠Cancel download â Cancel a download. ⢠Video details â View information about a video clip. ⢠Find â Find a video clip. Enter a search term that matches the file name. ⢠Show via home network â P lay a download ed video clip in a compatible home network. The home network must be configured first . ⢠Memory status â View the amount of free and used memory. ⢠Sort by â S o r t v i d e o c l i p s . S e l e c t t h e d e s i r e d c a t e g o r y . ⢠Move and copy â Move or copy video clips. Select Copy or Move and the desired location. Transfer videos from your PC Transfer your own video clips to Video centre from compatible devices using a compatible USB data ca ble. Video centre displays only th e video c lips w hich ar e in a format supported by your device. 1. To view your device on a PC as a mass memory device where you can transfer any da ta files, make the connection with a USB da ta cable. 2. Select Mass storage as the connection mode. A compatible memory card need s to be inserted in the device. 104 Media
3. Select the video clips you wa nt t o copy from your PC. 4. Transfer the video clips to E:\My Vi deos in the memory card. The transferred video clips appear in the My videos folder in Video centre. Video files in other folders of your device are not displayed. Video centre settings In the Video centre main view, select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Video service selection â Select the video services that you want to appea r in Video centre. You can a lso add, remove, edit, and view the details of a vi deo service. You cannot edit preinstalled video services. ⢠Connectio n settings â To defin e the network destination used for the network connection, select Network connection . To select the connection manually each time Vide o ce ntre ope ns a network connection, select Always ask . To set GPRS connection on or off, select Confirm GPRS usage . To set roaming on or off, select Confirm roami ng . ⢠Parental control â S et an age limit to videos . The required password is the same as the device lock code. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . In video- on-demand services, videos which have the same or a higher age limit than you have set, are hidden. ⢠Preferred memory â Select whether downloaded videos are saved in the device memory or on a compatible memory card. ⢠Thumbnails â Select whether to download and view thumbnail images in video feeds. Music player Select Menu > Media > Music player . Music playe r supports files formats such as AAC, AAC , eAAC , MP3, and WMA. Music player does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. You can transfer music from other compatible devices to your device. See "Transfer music from PC" , p . 106 . Play a song To add all available songs to the music library, select Options > Refresh library . To play a song, selec t the de sired category, and the song. To pause playback, press the scroll key; t o resume, press the scroll key again. To s top playback, scroll down. To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold the scroll key to the right or left. To skip to the next item, scroll right. To return to the beginning of the item, scroll left. To skip t o the previous item, scroll left again within 2 s econds after a song has started. To modify the tone of the music playba ck, select Options > Equaliser . To modify the balance and ster eo image, o r to enhance the bass, select Options > Sett ings . 105 Media
To return to the home screen and leave the player playing in the background, press the end key. Playlists To view and manag e playlists, select Music player > Playlists . To create a new playlist , select Opti ons > New playlist . To add songs to the playlist , select the song and Op tions > Add to playlist > Saved playlist or New playlist . To reorder songs in a playlist, scroll to the song you want to move, and select Options > Reorder playlist . About Ovi Music With Ovi Music, you can pu rchase and download songs to your device and your computer, a nd copy the songs between the two. To manage your music collection and downloads, you can install Ov i Player on your compatible PC, or use your internet browser to download music. To start discovering music, select Menu > Media > Ovi Music or go to www.ovi.com. Transfer music from PC 1. Ensure that a compatible memory card i s inserted in the device. 2. Connect your device to the PC using B luetooth connectivity or a compat ible USB data cable. If you are using a USB data cable, connect it first to your device, and then to t he computer . 3. If you are using a U S B data cable, select Media transfer as the connection mode. If you select Media transfer as the connection mode, you can use Windows Media Play er to synchronise music between your device and PC. Preset frequency settings Select Menu > Media > Music player and Opt ions > Go to Now pl aying > Options > Equaliser . To use a preset frequency setting when playing music, select the frequency s etting you want to use and Options > Activate . To modify the frequency of a preset setting, select Options > Edit and a frequency b and, and scroll up or down to adjust its value. You hear your frequency adjustment immediately in the pla yback. To reset the fr equency bands to their original values, select Options > Reset to defaults . To create your own frequ ency setting, select Options > New pres et . Enter a name for the frequency setting. Scroll up or down to move between the frequency bands, and set the frequency for each band. RealPlayer Select Menu > Media > RealPlayer . RealPlayer plays video and s ound clips that are st ored on your device, transferred from an e-mail message, or a compatible computer, or stream ed to your device over the web. Supported file formats include MPEG-4, MP4 (not 106 Media
streaming), 3GP, RV, RA, AMR, and Midi. RealPlayer does not necessaril y suppor t all variat ions of a media file format. Play video clips and stream links To play a video clip, select Video clips and a clip. To list recently played files, in the application main view, select Recently played . To stream content over the air (network service), select Streaming links and a link. RealPlayer recognises two kinds of links: an rt sp:// URL and an http:// URL that points to a RAM file. Before the co ntent begin s streaming, you r device must connect to a websit e and buffer the content. If a network connection prob lem causes a playback er ror, RealPlayer attempts au tomatically to reconnect to the internet access point. To download video clips from the web, select Downld. videos . To adjust the volume during playback, use the volume keys. To fast-forward during playback, scroll right and hold. To rewind during play, scroll left and hold. To stop the playback or streaming, select Stop . Buffering or the connection to the stre aming site stops, the playback of the clip stops, and the clip rewinds to the beginning. To view the video clip in normal screen mode, select Options > Continue in normal scr. . View information about a media clip To view the properties of a video or sound clip, or web link, select Optio ns > Clip det ails . Informat ion may includ e for example the bit rate or the internet link of a streaming file. RealPlayer settings Select Menu > Media > RealPlayer . You may receive RealPlayer settings in a message from your service provider. To define the settings manually, select Options > Settings > Video or Streaming . Recorder Select Menu > Media > Recorder . With the Recorder application, you can record voice memos and telephone con versations. The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active. To record a sound clip, select . To stop recordin g a sound cl ip, sel ect . To listen to the sound clip , select . To select the recording qualit y or where you want to save your sound clips, sele ct Option s > Settings . 107 Media
Recorded sound clips are saved in the Sound clips folder in Gallery. To record a telephone conver sation, open recorder during a voice call, and select . Both parties hear a tone at regular intervals during recording. Flash player With Flash player, you can view, play, and intera ct with flash files made for mobile devices. To open Flash player and play a flash file, select the file. To send a flash file to compatible devices, select Opti ons > Send . Copyright protection ma y prevent the sending of some flash files. To switch between flash file s saved in the device memory or on the memory card, scro ll to the corresponding tabs. To change the flash fi le quality, select Options > Quality when you are play ing the flash file. If you select High , the playback of some flash files may appea r uneven and slow due to their original settings . Change the quality setting of such files to Normal or Low for improved playback. To organise your flash files, select Options > Organise . FM radio The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenn a. A compatible heads et or accessory needs to be attached to th e device for the FM radio to function properly. Select Menu > Media > Radio > FM radio . The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. Listen to the radio Select Menu > Media > Radio > FM radio . The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. You can make a call or answer an incoming call while listening to the radio. The ra dio is muted when there is an active call. To start a station s earch, select or . If you have saved radio stations in your devi ce, to go to the next or previous saved station, select or . Select Options and from the following: ⢠Activate loudspe aker â L i s t e n t o t h e r a d i o u s i ng t h e loudspeaker. ⢠Manual tuning â Change the frequency manually. ⢠Station dire ctory â View ava ilable stations based on location (network service). ⢠Save station â Save the station to which you are currently tuned to your station list. ⢠Stations â Open the list of your save d stations. ⢠Play in background â Return to the home screen while listening to the FM radio in the background. Saved stations Select Menu > Media > Radio > FM radio . To open the list of your saved stations, select Options > Stations . 108 Media
To listen to a saved sta tion, select Options > Station > Listen . To change station details, select Op tions > Station > Edit . FM radio settings Select Menu > Media > Radio > FM radio . To automatically search for al ternative frequencies if the reception is weak, select Options > Settings > Alternative f requencies > Auto scan on . To set the default access point for the radio, select Options > Se ttings > Access po int . To select the region where you currently are, select Options > Se ttings > Current region . This setting is displayed only if there is no network coverage when you start the application. Nokia Internet Radio Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio . With the Nokia I nternet Radio application (network service), you can listen to ava ilable radio stations on the internet. To listen to rad io stations, you must have a wireless LAN (WLAN) or pa ck et data access point defined in your device. Listening t o the stations may involve the transmission of large amounts of da ta through your service provider's network. The recommended connection method is WLAN. Check with your service provider for terms and data service f ees before using other connections. For example, a flat rate data plan can allow large data transfers for a set monthly fee. Listen to internet radio stations Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio . To listen to a radi o station on the i nternet, do the following: 1. Select a station from your favourites or the station directory, or search for stations by name from the Nokia Internet Radio service. To add a station man ually, select Options > Add station manually . You can also browse for station links with the Web browser ap plication. Compatible links are automatically open ed in the Internet Radio application. 2. Select Options > Listen . The Now playing view opens, displaying informat ion about the currently playing station and song. To pause the playback, press the scroll key; to resume, press the scroll key again. To view station in formation, select Optio ns > Statio n information (not available if you have saved the station manually). If you are listening to a station saved in your favourites, scroll left or right to listen to the previous or next saved station. 109 Media
Favourite stations Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio . To view and listen to your favourite stations, select Favourites . To add a stat ion manually to favourites, select Options > Add station manually . Enter the web address of the station and a name th at you want to ap pear in the favourites list. To add the currently pl aying station to favourites , select Options > Add to Favourit es . To view station information, to move a station up or down in the list, or to delete a station from favourites, select Options > Station and the desired option. To view only stations beginning wi th particular letters or numbers, start entering the characters. Matching s tations are displayed. Search for stations Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio . To search for radio stations in the Nokia Internet Radio service by name, do the following: 1. Select Search . 2. Enter a station name or the first letters of the name in the search field, and select Search . Matching stations are displayed. To listen to a station, select the station a nd Listen . To save a sta tion to your favou rites, select the station and Options > Add to Favourit es . To make another search, select Options > Search again . Station directory Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio and Station dire ctory . The station directory is mainta ined by Nokia. If you want to listen to internet radio stations outside the directory, add station information manu ally or browse for station links on the internet with the Web browser application. Select from the following: ⢠Browse by genre â View the availab le radio station genres. ⢠Browse by language â View the la nguages in which there are stations broa dcasting. ⢠Browse by cou ntry/region â View the countries in which there are station s broadcasting. ⢠Top stations â View the most popular stations in the directory. Internet radio settings Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio and Options > Settings . To select the default access poin t to connect to the network, select Default access point and from the available options. If you want the device to ask you t o select the access point every time you open the application, select Always ask . To change the connection speeds for different connection types, select from the following: 110 Media
⢠GPRS connection bitrate â GPRS packet data connections ⢠3G conne ction bit rate â 3 G p a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n s ⢠Wi-Fi connecti on bitrate â WLAN connections The quality of the radio broa dcast depends on the selected connection speed. The higher the speed, the better the quality. To avoid buffering, use the highest quality only with high speed connections. 111 Media
Connectivity Your device offers several options to connect to the internet, a corporate intranet, another mobile device, or a computer. Fast packet data High-speed packet access (HSPA, also called 3.5G, indicated with ) is a network service in UMTS networks and provides high-speed data downloads and uplo ads. When HSPA support in the device is activated and the device i s connected to a UMTS network t hat supports HSPA, downloading and uploading da ta such as e-mail and browse r pages throu gh the cellu lar network may be faster. An active HSPA connection is indicated with . The icon may vary between regions. To activate HS PA, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > Packet data > Hi gh speed packet access . Some cellular networks do not allow incoming voice calls when HSPA is active, in which case you need to deactivate HSPA to receive calls. For more information, contact your service provider. For availability and subscription to data connection services, contact your service provider. Data cable To avoid corrupting data, do not disconnect the USB data cable during data tran sfer. Transfer data between your device and a PC 1. Insert a memory card in your device, and connect the device to a compatible PC with the data cable. 2. When the device asks wh ich mode to use, select Mass storage . In this mode, you can see your device as a removable hard drive in your computer. 3. End the connection from the computer (from the Unplug or Eject Hardware wizard in Microsoft Windows, for example) to avo id damaging th e memory card. To use Nokia PC Suite with your device, install Nokia PC Suite on your PC, connect th e data cable, and select PC Suite . To use your device to connect your PC to the web, connect the data cable, and select Conne ct PC to web . To synchronise the music in your device with Nokia Music Player, install the N okia Music Player software on you r PC, connect the data cable, and se lect PC Suit e . To print images on a compatible printer, select Image transfer . To change the USB mode you no rmally use with the data cable, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > USB and USB connection mode , and the desired option. To set the device to ask for the mode each time you connect the data cable t o the device, select Menu > Ct rl. panel > Connectivity > USB and Ask on connection > Yes . 112 Connectivity
Bluetooth Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Bluetooth . About Bluetooth Bluetooth technolog y in your device enables wireles s connections between electronic devices within a range of 10 metres (33 feet). A Bluetooth connection can be used to send images, videos, text, bu siness cards, calendar notes, or to connect wire lessly to devices that use Bluetooth technology . Since devices using Bluetooth technology communicate using radio waves, your devi c e and the other devices do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. The two devices only need to be within a maximum of 10 metres of each other, although the connection can be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or other electronic devices. Several Bluetooth connections can be active at a time. For example, if your device is connected to a headset, you can also transfer files to another compatible device a t the same time. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 EDR supporting the following profiles: Advanc ed Audio Distribution, Audio Video Remo te Control, Basic Imaging, Basic Printi ng, Dial- up Networ king, File Transfer, Generic Access, Hands-free , Headset, Human Inte rface Device, Local Positioning, Obj ect Push, Phone Book Access, SIM Access, Serial Port, Video Distribution. To ensure interoperability between other devices supporting Bluetooth technolog y, use Noki a appro ved accessories for this model. Check with the ma nufacturers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this device. Features using Bluetooth tech nology increa se the deman d on battery power and reduce the battery life. Send and receive data with Bluetooth Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Bluetooth . 1. When yo u activate Blu etooth connect ivity for the firs t time, you ar e asked to na me your device. Give your device a unique name to ma ke it easy to recognise if there are several Blue tooth devices nearby. 2. Select Bluetoot h > On . 3. Select My phone's visibility > Shown to all or Define period . If you select Def ine period , you need to define the time during which your device is visible to others. Your dev ice and the name you entered can now be seen by other us ers with devices using Bluetooth tech nology. 4. Open the application where the item you want to send is stored. 5. Select the item and Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . The device searches for other devices using Bluetooth tech nology within range and lis ts them. Tip: If you have sent data us ing Bluetooth connectivity before, a li st of the previous search results is displayed. To se arch for more Bluetooth devices, select More devices . 113 Connectivity
6. Select the device with wh ich you want to connect . If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, you are asked to enter a passcode. When the connection has been establis hed, Sending data is displayed. The Sent folder in the Messa ging application does not store messages sent using Bluetooth connectivity. To receive data using Bluetooth connectivity, select Bluetooth > On and My phone's vi sibility > Sho wn to all to receive data from a non-paired device or Hidden to receive data from a paired de vice only. When you receive data through Blue tooth connectivity, depending on the settings of an a ctive profile, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you wan t to accept th e message in which the data is included. If you accept, the mess age is placed in the Inbox folder in the Messaging application. Tip: You can access the files in the device or on the memory card using a compat ible accessory that supports the File Transfer Profile Client service (for example, a laptop computer). A Bluetooth connection is disconnected au tomatically after sending or receiving da ta. Only Nokia PC Suite and some accessories such as headsets may mainta in a connection even if not actively used. Pair devices Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Bluetooth . Open the paired devices tab. Before pairing, decide on yo ur own passcode (1-16 digits), and agree with the user of th e other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user i n terface have a fixed passcode. You need the passc ode only when you connect the devices for the first time. Af ter pairing, it is possible to authorise the connection. Pa iring and authorising the connection makes connecti ng quicker and easier, as you do not have to accept th e connection between paired devices every time you establish a connection. The passcode for remote SIM access must have 16 digits. In remote SIM mode you can use your device's S IM card with compatible accessories. When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compatible conn ected accessory, such as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not ma ke any calls, except to the emergency numbers programmed into your device, while in this m ode. To make calls, you must fi rst leave the remote SIM mode. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code to unlock it first. 1. Select Options > New paired devi ce . The device starts to search for Bluetooth dev ices within range. If you have sent data using Bluetooth connectivit y before, a list of the previous sear ch results is displayed. To search for more Bluetooth devices, select More devices . 2. Select the device with which you wa nt to pair, and enter the passcode. The same passcode must be entered in the other device as well. 3. To make the connection be tween your device and the other device automatic, select Yes . To confirm the connection manually every ti me a connection attempt 114 Connectivity
is made, select No . After pairing, the device is saved to the paired devices page. To give a nickname to the paired device, select Options > Assign short name . Th e nickname is displayed in your device. To delete a pairing, select the device whose pairing you want to delete and Options > Dele te . To delete all pairings, select Options > Delete all . If you are curren tly connected to a device an d cancel the pairing with that device, pairing is remove d immediately, and the connection is ended. To allow a paired device to connect automatically to your device, select Set as authorised . Connections between your device and the other device can be made without your knowledge. No separate acceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status only for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or computer, or devices that belong to someone you trust. If you want to accept connection requests from the other device separately every time, select Set as unauthorised . To use a Bluetooth audio accessory, such as a Bluetooth handsfree or headset, you need to pair your device with the accessory. For the pass co de and further instructions, see the accessory user guide. To connect to the audio accessory, switch on th e accessory. Some audio accessories connect automatically to your device. Otherwise, open th e paired devices tab, and select the accessory and Options > Connect to audio device . Block devices Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Bluetooth . 1. To block a device from establishing a Bluetooth connection to your device, open the paired devices tab. 2. Select a device you want to block and Options > Block . To allow the pair ing of a device again after it was blocked, delete it from the blocked devices list. Open the blocked devices tab, and select Options > Delete . If you reject a pairing reques t from another device, you are asked if you want to block all fu ture connection requests from this device. If you accept the query, the remote device is added to the list of blocked devices. Security tips Operating th e device in hi dden mode is a safer way to avoid malicious software. Do not accept Bluetooth connectivity from sources you do not trust. Alternatively, switch off the Bluetoot h function. T his does not affect other functions of the device. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Bluetooth . When you are not u sing Bluetooth connectivi ty, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's vi sibility > Hidden . Do not pair wi th an unknown dev ice. SIM access profile With the SIM access profile, yo u can access the SIM card of your device from a compatible car kit device. This way, you 115 Connectivity
do not need a separate SIM card to access SIM card data and connect to the GSM network. To use the SIM access profil e, you need the following: ⢠Compatible car kit device that supp orts Bluetooth wireless technology ⢠Valid SIM card in your device When the wireless device is in the remote SIM m ode, you can only use a compatible conn ected accessory, such as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not ma ke any calls, except to the emergency numbers programmed into your device, while in this mode. To make calls, you must firs t leave the remote SIM mode . If the device has been locked, enter the lock code to unlock it first. For more information about car kit devices and compatibility wi th your device, see the Nokia web site and your car kit user guide. Use the SIM access profile 1. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Conne ctivity > Blueto oth and Remote SIM mode > On . 2. Activate Blu etooth connec tivity in the car kit. 3. Use your car kit to start a search for compatible devices. For instructions, see the us er guide of your car kit. 4. Select your device from th e list of compatible devices. 5. To pair the devices, enter the Bluetooth p asscode shown on the display of th e car kit to your device. Tip: If you have a lready ac cessed the SIM c ard from the car kit with the active u ser profile, the car kit searches autom atically for a device with the SIM card. If it finds your dev ice, and automatic authorisation is activ ated, the car kit automatically connects to the GSM netw ork when you switch on the car ignition. When you activate the remote S IM access profile, you can use applications on your device that do not n eed network or SIM services. To make connections between your d evice and the car kit without separa te acceptance or authorisation, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Bluetoot h , and open the paired devices ta b. Select the car kit and Set as authorised , and answer Ye s to the confirmation query. If the car kit i s set as unauth orised, c onnection requests from it must be accepted separately every time. To end the remote SIM access co nnection from your device, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Bluet ooth and Remote SIM mode > Off . Wireless LAN About WLAN Your device can detect and connect to wireless local area networks (WLA N). Using a WLAN, you can connect your device to the intern et and compatible dev ices that suppo rt WLAN. To use a WLAN connection , you need the following: ⢠WLAN must be available in your location. ⢠Your device must be connected to the WLAN. Some WLANs are protected, and you need an access key from the service provider to connect to them. 116 Connectivity
⢠An internet access point created for WLA N. Use the access point for applications that need to connec t to the internet. A WLAN connection is establ ished when you create a data connection using a WLAN intern et access point. The active WLAN connection ends when you end the data connection. You can use WLAN during a v oice call or when packet data is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several applications can use the same access point. Features that use WLAN, or that are allowed to run in the background while using othe r features, increase the demand on battery power an d reduce the battery life. Your device supports the following WLAN features: ⢠IEEE 802.11b/g standard ⢠Operation at 2.4 GHz ⢠WEP, WPA/WPA2, and 802.1x authentication methods. These function s can be used only if they are supported by the network. Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to incr ease the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encryption reduces the risk of unauthorised a ccess to your data. When the device is in the offline profile, you can still use WLAN, if available. Remem ber to comply with any applicable safety requiremen ts when establishing and using a WLAN connection. Tip: To check the unique media access contro l (MAC) address that identifies your device, enter *#62209526# in the ho me screen. Note: Using WLAN may be restricted in some countries. For example, in Fr ance, you are only allowed to use WLAN indoors. For more information, contact your local authorities. See WLAN availability To set your device to show wireless LAN (WLAN) availability, select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Settings and Connection > Wireless LAN > Show W LAN availability . If a WLAN is av ailable, is displayed. WLAN wizard Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > WLAN wiz. . The WLAN wizard helps you find and connect to a wireless LAN (WLAN). When you open the application, your device starts to scan for available WLANs an d lists them. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Refresh â Update the list of available WLANs. ⢠Filter WLAN netwo rks â Filter out WLANs in the list of found networks. The sele cted networks are filtered out the next time the ap plication searches for WLANs. ⢠Start web browsi ng â Start browsing the web using the access point of the WLAN . ⢠Cont.web browsing â Continue web browsi ng using the currently active WLAN conn ection. ⢠Disconnect WLAN â Disconnect the active connection to the WLAN. ⢠Details â View the details of the WLAN. 117 Connectivity
Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase the security of your wireless LAN conne ction. Using encrypt ion reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data. Use the WLAN wizard in the home screen In the home screen, the WLAN wizard shows the status of your WLAN connections and ne twork searches. If the WLAN wizard is not activated by default in the home screen, you can activate it in t he home screen settings. To view th e available options, select the row showing the status. Depending on the stat us, you can start the web browser using a WLAN conn ection, connect to your net call service, discon nect from a WLAN, sea r ch for WLANs, or enable or disable network scanning. If WLAN scanning is disa bled, and you are not connected to any WLAN, WLAN scanning off is displayed in the home screen. To enab le WLAN scanning, and to search for available WLANs, select the row showing the s tatus. To start a sea rch for available WLANs, select the row showing the status and Search for W LAN . To disable WLAN scanning, select the row showing the status and Switch WLAN scan off . When Start web browsing or Use for is selected, the WLAN wizard a utomatically crea tes an access point for the selected WLAN. The access point can also be used with other applications requiring WLAN connection. If you select a secured WL AN, you are asked to ente r the relevant passcodes. To connect to a hidden netw ork, you must enter the correct service set identifier (SSID). To use the foun d WLAN for a ne t call connection, select the row showing the status, Use for , the desired net call service, and the WLAN to be used. Connection manager Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connec tivity > Conn. mgr. . View and end active connections Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connec tivity > Conn. mgr. . To see the open data connections, select Active d ata connections . To view detailed information about network connections, select a connection from the lis t and Option s > Details . The type of information shown depends on the connection type. To end the selected netw ork connection, select Options > Disconnect . To end all activ e network connection s simultaneously, select Options > Disconnect all . Search for WLAN To search for WLANs availa ble within range, select Available WLAN networks . The availa ble WLANs are listed with their network mode (infrast ructure or ad-hoc), signal strength, a nd network encryption indica tors, and 118 Connectivity
whether your device has an ac tive connection with the network. To view the details of a network, scroll to it, and press t he scroll key. To create an internet access point for a network, select Options > Define access point . 119 Connectivity
Security and data management Manage the data an d software on your device, and take care of the security of th e device and its contents. Important: Your device can only support one antivirus applicat ion. Having more than one application with antiviru s functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functioning. Lock the device The lock code protects your device again st unauthorised use. The preset code is 12345. To lock the device, in the home screen, press the power key, and select Lock phone . To unlock your device, select Unlo ck > OK , enter the lock code, and select OK . To change the lock code, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Ge neral > Security > Phone and SIM card . Enter the old code and then the new co de twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alphabets and digits can be used, and both uppercase and lowercase alphabets are possible. Write down the new code, and k eep it secret and in a safe place separate from your device. If you forget the lock code and your device is locked, you must take the device to a Nokia authorised service faci lity and additional charges may apply. To unlock the device, the software must be reloaded, and the data you ha ve saved in the device may be lost. You can also lock the device remotely by sending a text message to the device. To enable remo te locking, and to define the text for the message, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Genera l > Security > Phone and SIM card > Remote phone locking > Enabled . Enter the remote lock message, and confirm the message. The message must be at least 5 characters long. Write down the text, as yo u may need it later. Memory card security Select Menu > Office > File mgr. . You can protect a memory card with a password to prevent unauthorised access . To set a password, select Optio ns > Memory card p assword > Set . The password can be up to 8 characters long an d is case-sensitive. The pa ssword is stored in your device. You do not need to enter it again while you use the memory card on the same device. If you use the memory card on anot her device, you are asked for the password. Not all memory cards support password protection. To remove the memory card password, select Options > Memory card password > Remove . When you remov e the password, the data on the memory card is not protected against unau thorised use. 120 Security and data management
To open a locked memory card, select Options > Unloc k memory card . Enter the password. If you cannot recall the password to unlock a lo cked memory card, you may reformat the card, in which case the card is unlocked and pa ssword removed. Formatting a memory card deletes all data stored on the card. Encryption Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > En cryption . Encrypt your device or memory card to prevent outsiders from accessing your important information. Encrypt device memory or memory card To encrypt the device memory, select Ph one memory . To encrypt the mem ory card, select Memory card and from the following: ⢠Encrypt witho ut saving key â En crypt the memory card without saving the encryp tion key. If you select this option, you cannot use the memory card in other devices, and if you restore fa ctory settings , you cannot decrypt the memory card. ⢠Encrypt and save key â Encrypt the memory card a nd save the key manually in the default folder. For security, store the key to a safe place outside the device. For example, you can send the key to your computer. Enter a pass phrase for the key an d a name for the key file. The pass phrase should be long and complex. ⢠Encrypt with re stored key â Encrypt the memory card with a key you have re ceived. Select the key file, and enter the pass phrase . Decrypt device memory or memory card Always remember to decrypt the device memory and/or the memory card before upda ting the device software. To decrypt the device memory, select Phone me mory . To decrypt the memory card w ithout destroying the encryption key, select Memory card > Decrypt . To decrypt the memory card and destroy the encryption key, select Memory card > Decrypt and turn off encryption . Fixed dialling Select Menu > Contacts and Options > SIM numbers > Fixed dial contacts . With the fixed dialling servic e, you can restrict calls from your device to certain phon e numbers. Not a ll SIM cards support the fixed dialling service. For more information, contact your service provider. When security feat ures that restrict calls are in use ( such as call barring, closed user gr oup, and fix ed dialling), calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Call barr ing and call diverting cannot be active at the same time. 121 Security and data management
You need your PIN2 code to acti vate and deactivate fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling contacts. Contact your service provider for your PIN2 code. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Activate fixe d dialling â Activate the fixed dialing. ⢠Deactivate fixed dialling â Dea ctivate the fixed dialing. ⢠New SIM contact â Enter the contact name and phone number to which calls are allowed. ⢠Add from Contacts â Copy a contact from the list of contacts to the fi xed dialling list. To send text mess ages to the SIM contact s while the fixed dialling service is active, you n eed to add the text message centre number to the fixed dialling list. Certificate manager Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Security > Certificate management . Digital certificates are used to verify the origins of software bu t do not guarantee safety. The re are four different types of certificat es: authority certificates, personal certificates, trusted site certificates, and device certif icates. During a se cure connection, a server may send a server certificate to your device. Upon receipt, it is checked through an au thority certificate stored in your device. You receive notification i f the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct certificate in your device. You can download a certificate from a web site, or receive a certificate as a mess age. Certific ates should be us ed when you connect to an online bank or a remote s erver to transfer confidential inform ation. They should also be used if you want to reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious software, and to check the authenticity of software when you download and install software to your device. Tip: When you add a new certificate, check its authenticity. View certificate details You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the v a lidity period of a server certificate have been checked. To view certificate details, open a certificate folder, and select a certificate and Options > Certifi cate details . One of the following notes may appear: ⢠Certificate not truste d â You have not set any application to use the certificate. You may want to change the trust setting s. ⢠Expired certificate â The period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate no t valid yet â The perio d of v alidit y has not yet begu n for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted â The certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer. Certificate trust settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Security > Certificate man agement . Trusting a certificat e means th at you authorise it to verify web pages, e-mail servers, software packages, and other 122 Security and data management
data. Only trus ted certificates c a n b e u s e d t o v e r i f y s e r v i c e s and software. Important: Even if the use of certificat es makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certi ficates for increased securit y to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. Before changing any certific ate setting s, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belon gs to the listed owner. To change the trust settings, select a certi f icate and Options > Trust se ttings . Scroll to an app lication field, and press the scroll key to select Yes or No . You cannot change the trust settin gs of a personal certificate. Depending on the certificate, a list of applications that can use the certificate is displayed: ⢠Symbian installation â N ew Symbian operating system application. ⢠Internet â E-mail and graphics. ⢠App. installation â New Java application. ⢠Online certif. check â Online certificate status protocol. View and edit security modules Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Security > Security module . To view or edit a security module, select the module from the list. To view detailed information about a security module, select Optio ns > Security detai ls . To edit the PIN codes for th e security module, open the module, and select Module PIN to edit the PIN code for the security module or Signing PIN to edit the PIN code for digital signatures. You may not be able to change th ese codes for all security modules. The key store contains the contents of the security mo dule. To delete the key store, select Options > Delete . You may not be able to delete the key store of all security modules. Remote configuration Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Device mg r. . With Device manager, you can manage settings, da ta, and software on your device remotely. You can connect to a server, and receive configuration settings for your device. You may receive server profiles and different configuration se ttings from your service providers or company information management department. Co nfiguratio n settings ma y include connection and other settings us ed by different 123 Security and data management
applications in your device . The available options may vary. The remote configuration conn ection is usually started by the server when the device se ttings need to be updated. To create a new server profile, select Options > Server profiles > Options > New server profile . You may receive these settings from your service provider in a configurati on message. If not, define the following: ⢠Server name â Enter a name for the configuration server. ⢠Server ID â Enter th e unique ID to identify the configuration server. ⢠Server password â Enter a password to identify your device to the server. ⢠Session mode â Select the preferred connection type. ⢠Access point â Select the access point to use for the connection, or create a new access point. You can also choose to be asked for the access point every time you start a connection. This setting is avai lable only if you have selected Internet as the bearer type. ⢠Host address â Enter the web address of the configuration server. ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the server. ⢠User name and Password â Enter your user ID and password for the configuration server. ⢠Allow configurat ion â Select Yes to allow the server to initiate a configuration session. ⢠Auto-accept al l requests â Select Yes if you do not want the server to ask for your confirmation when it initiates a configuration session. ⢠Network authent ication â Select whether to use http authenticati on. ⢠Network user name and Network password â Enter your user ID and pass word for the http authen tication. This setting is available only if you have selected Network authenticat ion to be used. To connect to the server and receive configuration settings for your device, select Options > Start configuration . To view the configuration log of the selected profile, select Options > View log . To update the device soft ware over the air, select Options > Check for updates . The update does not erase your setti ngs. Wh en you re c eive the update package on your device, follow the instru ctions on the display. Your device is restarted once th e installation is complete. Downloading software updates may involve the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Make sure that the device battery has enou gh power, or connect the charger before starting the u pdate. Warning: If you install a software update, you cannot use the device, even to make emergency calls, until the installation is completed and the device is rest arted. Application manager With Application manager, you can see the software packages installed in your de vice. You can view details of installed applications, remove applications, and define installation settings. You can install two types of applicati ons and software to your device: ⢠JME applications bas ed on Java technology with the .jad or .jar file extensions 124 Security and data management
⢠Other applications and software suitable for the Symbian operating system with the .sis or . sisx file extensions Only install software that is compatible with your device. Install applications and software You can transfer installation files to your device from a compatible computer, downlo ad them during browsing, or receive them in a multim edia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using othe r connectivity methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity . You can use Nokia Application Installer in Nokia PC Suite to install an application to your device. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > App. mgr. . The installation files are in the Installation files folder, and installed applications in th e Installed apps. folder. Icons indicate the following: .sis or .sisx application Java application Application installed on the memory card Important: Only install and use ap plications an d other s oftware f rom truste d so urces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or ha ve passed the Java Verified⢠testing. Before installation, note the following: ⢠To view the application type, versi o n number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Option s > View details . To display the security certificate details of the application, select View details . ⢠If you install a file that con tains an upda te or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you ha ve the original installation file or a full backup copy of the removed software package. To restore the original application, remove the application, and install the application again from the original installation file or the backup copy. The JAR file is required for installing Java applications. If it is miss ing, the device may ask you to down load it. If there is no access point defi ned for the application, you are asked to select one. When you are downloading the JAR file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the server. Y ou obtain these from the supplier or manufact urer of the application. To install an application or software, do the following: 1. To locate an insta llation file, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > App. mgr. and Installation files . Alternat ively, search inst allation files using File manager, or select Messaging > Inbox , and open a message that conta ins an installation file. 2. In Application manager, select the application you want to install. During installation, the device shows information about the progress of the ins tallation. If you install an application without a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warn ing. Continue installation only if you are sure of the origin and contents of the application. 125 Security and data management
To start an insta lled application, select the application. If the application does not ha ve a default folder defined, it is installed in the Installations folder in the main menu. To see which software packag es are installed or removed and when, select Op tions > View log . Important: Your device can only support one antivirus applicat ion. Having more than one application with antiviru s functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functioning. After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation files (.sis, .sisx) remain in the device memory. The files may use la rge amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia PC Suite to back up installation files to a compatible PC, th en use the fil e manager to remov e the installation files from the devi ce memory. If the .sis file is a message attach ment, dele te the message from the Messaging inbox. Remove applications and software Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > App. mgr. and Installed apps. . Scroll to a software package, and select Options > Uninstall . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, you can only reinstall it if you have the original software packag e or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to o pen documents created with that software. If another software packag e depends on the software package that you remov ed, the other softwa re package may stop working. For more information, see the documentation of the inst alled software package. Application manager settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > App. m gr. . Select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Software installation â Select whether Symbian software that has no verifi ed digital signature can be installed. ⢠Online certificate check â Check the online certificates before inst alling an applica tion. ⢠Default web address â Set the default add ress used when checking online certificates. Some Java applications may require that a message be sent or a network connection be made to a specific acc ess point to download extra data or components. Licenses Digital rights management Content owners may use different ty pes of digital right s management (DRM) tech nologies to protect their intellectual property, includ ing copyrights. This devi ce uses various typ es of DRM software to access D RM- protected content. With this device you can access content protected with WMDRM 10 and OMA DRM 2.0. If certain DRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask that such DRM soft ware's ability to acces s new DRM- protected content be revoked. Revocation may also 126 Security and data management
prevent renewal of such DR M-protected content already in your device. Revocation of such DRM software does not affect the use of content protected with other types of DRM or the use of non-DRM-protected content. About Licenses Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Licence s . Some media files, such as imag es, music, or video clips, are protecte d by digi tal usage ri ghts . The licenses for such files may allow or restrict their usage. For example, with some licenses you may listen to a song only a limited nu mber of times. During one playback session you may rewind, fast- forward, or pause the song, but once you stop it, you have used one of the instances allowed. Use licences Digital rights mana gement (DRM) protected cont ent comes with an associated licence that de fines your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM-protected content, to back up both the licence and the con t ent, use the backup feature of Nokia PC Suite. Other tran sfer method s may no t tr ansfer the licence which need to be restored with the content f or you to be able to continue the use of OMA DRM-protected content after the d e v i c e m e m o r y i s f o r m a t t e d . Y o u m a y a l s o n e e d t o r e s t o r e the licence in case the files on your device get corrupted. If your device has WMDRM-pr otected content, both the licence and the content will be lost if the device memory is formatted. You may also lose the licence and the content if the files on your device ge t corrupted. Losing the licence or the content may limit your ability to u se the same content on your device ag ain. For more information, contact your service provider. Some licence may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected content can be a ccessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. To view your licences by type, select Vali d licen ces , Invalid licences , or Not in use . To view the licenc e details, select Options > Licen ce details . The following details are disp layed for each media file: ⢠Status â The stat us is Licence is val id , Lic ence expired , or Licence not yet valid . ⢠Content sending â Allowed indicates that you can send the file to another device. ⢠Content in phone â Yes indicates that the file is in the device and the path of the file is displayed. No indicates that the related fi le is not currently in the device. To activate a licence, in the licences main view, select Invalid licences > Options > Get new licence . Establish a network connection at the prompt, and you are directed to a website wh ere you can purcha se rights to the media. To remove file rights, go to the desired file, and select Options > Delete . If there are several rights related to the same media fi le, all the rights are deleted. The group licence view displays all of the files related to a group right. If you have down loaded multiple media files with the same rights, they are all displayed in this view. You can open the group view fr om either the valid licences 127 Security and data management
or invalid licences tabs. To access these files, open the group rights folder. Sync Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Sync . Sync enables you to synch ronise your note s, calendar entries, text and m ultimedia messages, browse r bookmarks, or contacts with various compatible applications on a compatible computer or on the internet. You may receive synchronisat ion settings in a special message from your service provider. A synchronisation profile contains the necessary settings for synchronisation. When you open the Sy nc application, the default or previously used sync profile is displayed. To modify the profile, scroll to a sync item, and select Mark to include it in the profile or Unmark to leave it out. To manage sync p rofiles, select Opti ons and the desired option. To synchronise data, select Options > Synchronise . To cancel synchronisation before it finishes, select Cancel . Mobile VPN Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings an d Connection > VPN . The Nokia mobile virtual priv ate network (VPN) client creates a secure connection to compatible corporate intranet and services, s uch as e-mail. Your device connects from a mobile network, th rough the internet, to a corporate VPN gateway tha t acts as a front door to the compatible corporate network. The VPN client uses IP Security (IPSec) tech nology. IPSec is a framew ork of open standards for supporting the se cure exchange of data over IP networks. VPN policies define the method used by the VPN client and a VPN gateway to au thenticate each other, and t he encryption algorith ms that they us e to help protect the confidentiality of data. For a VPN policy, conta ct your company's IT department. To install and configure the VPN client, certificates, and policies, contact the IT admini strator of your organisation. Manage VPN Select from the following: ⢠VPN policies â I nstall, view, and upda te VPN policies. ⢠VPN policy servers â Edit the connection settings of VPN policy servers from which you can insta ll and update VPN policies. A polic y server refers to a Nokia Security Service Manage r (NSSM), which is not necessarily requ ired. ⢠VPN log â View the log for your VPN policy installations, updates and synchronisation s, and other VPN connections. Edit VPN access points Select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Settings and Connection > Destinations . An access point is where your phone connects to the network. To use e-mail and multimedia services, or to 128 Security and data management
browse web pages, you must first define internet access points for these services. Vi rtual private network (V PN) access points pair VPN policies with regular internet access points to create secure connections. Your service provider may pres et some or all access points for your device, and you may n ot be able to crea te, edit, or remove them. Select a destination and Options > Edit , and define the following: ⢠Connectio n name â Enter a name for th e VPN access point. ⢠VPN policy â Select the VPN policy to combine with the internet access point. ⢠Internet access point â Select the internet access point with which to combine the V PN policy to create secure connections for data tran sfer. ⢠Proxy ser ver address â Enter the proxy server address of the private network. ⢠Proxy port number â Enter the proxy port number. ⢠Use access point â Select whether connections using this access point are establish ed automatically. The settings available for editing may vary. For the correct settings, contact your company's IT department. Use a VPN connection in an application You may have to prove y our identity when you log on to the enterprise network. Contact your comp any's IT department for the credentials. To use a VPN connection in an application, the applicat ion must be associated with a VPN access poin t. Tip: Yo u can configure the ap plication's connection setting to Always ask , in which case you select the VPN access point from a li st of connections when a connection is established. 1. In the application in whic h you want to create a VPN connection, select a V PN access point as the access point. 2. If you are using legacy au thentication, enter your VPN user name and pass code or password. If the SecurID token has become out of synchronisation with the clock of the ACE/Server, enter the next passcode. If you are using certificat e-based authentication , you may have to enter the key store password. 129 Security and data management
Settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings . You can define and modify various settings of your device. Modifying these settings affe cts the operation of your device across several applications. Some settings may be preset for the device or sent to you in a special message by your service provider. You may not be able to change such settings. Select the setting you wan t to edit to do the following: ⢠Switch between two values , such as on or off. ⢠Select a value from a list. ⢠Open a text editor to enter a value. ⢠Open a slider, and scroll left or right to adjust a value. General settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General . Select from the following: ⢠Personalisation â Change the display settings, and personalise the device. ⢠Date and time â Change the date and time. ⢠Enhancement â Define the settings for your accessories. ⢠Sensor settings â Ch ange the sensor settings. ⢠Security â Define the security settings. ⢠Factory settings â Restore the original settings of the device. ⢠Positioning â Define the posi tioning method and server for GPS-based a pplications. Personalisation settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Personalisation . Display settings To define the level of light that the device needs before switching on the backlight, select Display > Light sensor . To change the text size, select Display > Font size . To adjust the length of time the display can be left idle before the screen saver is activated, select Display > Power saver time-out . To select a welcome note or logo for the display, select Display > Welcome note / logo . You can either choose the default welcome note, enter your own text, or select an image. To set how quickly the display dims after the last keypress, select Display > Light time-out . Tone settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings . Select General > Personalisation > Tones and from the following: 130 Settings
⢠Ringing tone â Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for downloading tones using the browser. I f you have two altern ate phone lines in use, you can specify a ringing tone for each line. ⢠Video call tone â Select a ringing tone for video calls. ⢠Say caller's name â If you select this se tting, and someone from your contacts list calls you, the device sounds a ringing tone that is a combination of the spoken name of the con tac t and the selected ringing tone. ⢠Ringing type â Select how you wa nt the ringing tone to alert you. ⢠Ringing volume â Set the volume level of the ringing tone. ⢠Message alert tone â Select a tone for received text messages. ⢠E-mail alert tone â Select a tone for received e-mail messages. ⢠Calendar alarm tone â Select a tone for calendar alerts. ⢠Clock alarm tone â Select a tone for clock alarms. ⢠Vibrating alert â Set the device to vibrate when you receive a call or m essage. ⢠Keypad tones â Set the volume level o f the keypad tones. ⢠Warning tones â Turn the warning tones on or off. Language settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Gene ral > Personalisation > Language . ⢠Phone la nguag e â Set the device la nguage. ⢠Writing language â Selec t the language used for writing notes and messages. ⢠Predictive te xt â Activate predictive text inp ut. ⢠Input options â Define the setti ngs for predictiv e text input. Scroll key lights Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Personalisation > Notificati on lights . To set the scroll key to blink slowly when you do not use the device, select Standby br. light . To set the scroll key to blink rapidly when you have missed calls or received messages, select Notification light , set the blinking time, and select the events you want to be notified of. Settings for One-touch keys Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Personalisation > One-touch keys . To select which application an d task is opened when you press a One-touch key, select the key and Options > Open . To restore the prese t applications and tasks, select Restore defaults . Date and time settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Date and time . Select from the following: ⢠Date and Time â Set the current date a nd time. ⢠Time zone â Define your time zone. ⢠Date format and Date separator â Define the date format and separator. 131 Settings
⢠Time format and Time separator â Select whether to use the 12-hour or 24-hour clock syst em and with which symbol to separ ate h ours and minutes. ⢠Clock type â Define the clock type. ⢠Clock alarm tone â Select the tone for t he alarm clock. ⢠Alarm snooze time â Define the snooze time for the alarm clock. ⢠Workdays â Define the days of the week that are work days for you. ⢠Automatic time update â Update the t ime, date, and time zone information au tomatically (network service). Accessory settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Enhancement . To define which profile is activated when you attach an accessory to your device, select the accessory and Default profile . To set the device to answer phone calls automatically after 5 seconds when an accessory is attached, select the accessory and Automatic a nswer > On . If the ringing type is se t to Beep once or Si lent in the selected profile, automatic answering is disabled. To illuminate the dev ice wh ile it is attached to an accessory, select Lights > On . This option is onl y available for certain accessories. Turn to silence calls or alarms When you activate the s ensors in your dev ice, you can control certain functions by turning the device. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Sensor sett ings . Select from the following: ⢠Sensors â Set the display to rotate au tomatically according to the device's orientation. ⢠Turning control â Set the device to silence incoming calls or snooze alarms when you turn the device face down. To enable this option , the Sensors o ption needs to be activated. Security settings Security settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Security . Select from the following: ⢠Phone and SIM card â M o d i f y t h e s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s f o r your device and SIM card. ⢠Certificate management â Manage your security certificates. ⢠Protected conten t â Modify your settings for DRM- protected content. ⢠Security module â Manage your security module. Avoid using codes that are si milar to emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number. Codes are shown as asterisks . When you change a code, enter the current code, then the new code tw ice. Device and SIM card security To change the PIN code, select Phone and SIM card > PIN code . The new code must be 4 to 8 digits long. The PIN code prot ects your SIM c a rd against un authorised use 132 Settings
and is provided with the SIM card. A fter three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, th e code is blocked, and you need to use the PUK code to unblock it before you can use the SIM card again. To set the keypad to lock automatically af ter a defined period, select Phone and SI M card > Keypad autolock period . To set a time-out af ter which the device is automatically locked and can be used only if the correct lock code is entered, select Phone and SI M card > Phon e autolock period . Enter a number for the time-out in minutes, or select None to set off the autolock period. When the device is locked, you can still answer inc oming calls, and calls may still be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To set a new lock code, select Phone and SIM card > Loc k code . The preset lock code is 12345. Enter the current code and then the new code twice. The new code can be 4- 255 characters long. Both a lphabets and digits can be used, and both uppercase and lowercase alp habets are possible. The device notifies you if the lock code is not properly formatted. Restore original settings To restore the original device settings, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Factory settings . To do this, you need your device lock code. After resetting, the device may take a longer time to switch on. Documents, contact information, calendar entries, and files are unaffected. Positioning settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Positioning . To use a specific positioning method to detect the location of your device, select Position ing methods . To select a positioning server, select Positioning server . To select which measurement system you wa nt to use for speeds and distances, se lect Notation preferen ces > Measurement s ystem . To define in which format the coordinate information is displayed in your device, select Notatio n preferenc es > Coordinate form at . E-mail key settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General . To select which mailbox to open with the e-mai l key, select E-mail key settings > E-mail key , and press the scroll key. Telephone settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and Phone . Select from the following: ⢠Call â Define general call settings. ⢠Call divert â Define your call divert se ttings. See "Call divert" , p. 58 . ⢠Call barring â Define your call barring settings. See "Call barring" , p. 58 . 133 Settings
⢠Network â Adjust the network settings. Call settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Phone > Call . Select from the following: ⢠Send my caller ID â Display your ph one number to the person you are calling. ⢠Send my internet call ID â Display your internet call address to the person you ar e calling using an internet call. ⢠Call waiting â Set the device to notify you of incoming calls while you are in a call (network service). ⢠Internet call waiting â Set the device to n otify you of new incoming internet ca lls while you are in a call. ⢠Internet call ale rt â To set the device t o notify you of incoming internet calls, select On . If you select Off , you receive only a notification if you missed a call. ⢠Reject call with message â Reject a call, and send a text message to the caller. ⢠Message text â Write the standard text message that is sent when you reject a call. ⢠Own video in recvd. call â Allow or deny video sending during a video call from your device. ⢠Image in video call â Display a still image if video is not sent during a v ideo call. ⢠Automatic red ial â Set your device to make a maximum of 10 attempts to con nect the call after an unsuccessful ca ll attempt. To stop a utomatic redialling, press the end key. ⢠Show call duration â Display the length of a call during the call. ⢠Summary after call â Display the length of a call after the call. ⢠Speed diall ing â Activate sp eed dialling. ⢠Anykey answer â Activate anykey an swer. ⢠Contact search â Activate contact search in the home screen. ⢠Line in use â This setting (network service) is displayed only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use for m aking calls and sending t ext messages. Calls on both lines can be answered irrespective of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you are not able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is displayed in the home screen. ⢠Line change â Prevent line selection (network service), if supported by yo ur SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Network se ttings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Phone > Networ k . To select the network mode, select Network mode and Dual mode , UMTS , or GSM . In dual mode, the device switches automatically between networks. Tip: Select ing UMTS enables faster data transfer, but may increase the dema nd on battery power and reduce the battery life. In regions close to both GSM and UMTS networks, selecting Dual mode may cause constant jumpi ng between the two networks, which also increases th e demand on battery power. 134 Settings
To select the operator, select Operato r selec tion and Manual to select from available networks, or Automati c to set the device to select the n etwork automatically. To set the device to indicate when it is used in a microcellular network (MCN), select Cell info display > On . Connection settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection . Select from the following: ⢠Blueto oth â Edit the Blu etooth settings. ⢠USB â Edit the da ta cable settings. ⢠Destinations â Set up new or edit existing access points. Some or all access p oints may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to create, edit, or remove them. ⢠VPN â Manage the sett in gs for virtual private networking. ⢠Packet data â Define when packet data network is attached, and enter the default packet switched access point name if you use your device a s a modem for a computer. ⢠Wireless LAN â Set the device to display an indicator when a wireless LAN (WLA N) is available, and define how often the device searches for netw orks. ⢠Video sharing â Enable video sharing, select the SIP profile for video sharing, and define the video saving settings. ⢠SIP settings â View or create session initiation protocol (SIP) profiles. ⢠XDM profile â Create an XDM profile. The XDM profile is required for many comm unications applications, for example, presence. ⢠Presence â Edit the settings for presence (network service). To register for the service, contact your service provider. ⢠Remote dr ives â Connect the device to a remote drive. ⢠Configurat ions â View and delete trusted servers from which your device may receive configuration settings. ⢠APN control â Restrict packet data connections. Access points Create a new access point Select Menu > Ctrl. panel and Connectivity > Destinations . You may receive acces s point settings in a m essage from a service provider. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create , edit, or remove them. When you open one of th e access point groups ( , , ), you can see th e access point type s: indicates a protected access point indicates a packet data access point indicates a wireless LA N (WLAN) access point Tip: You can create internet access points in a WLAN with the WLAN wizard. 135 Settings
To create a new access point, select Access point . The device asks to check for availa ble connections. After the search, connections that are already available are shown and can be shared by a new access poin t. If you skip this step, you are asked to select a connect ion method and to define the settings needed. To edit the settings of an a ccess point, open one of the access point groups, and select an access point. Follow the instructions from your service provider. ⢠Connection name â Enter a name for the connection. ⢠Data bearer â Select the data connection type. Depending on th e data connect ion you select, only certain setting fields are avai lable. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red *. Other fields can be left empty, unless your servic e provider has instructed otherwise. To use a data connection, your service provider must support this feature, and if necessary , activate it for your SIM card. Create access point groups Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings an d Connection > Destinations . Some applic ations allow you to use ac cess point groups to connect to a network. To avoid selecting which access point to use every time the device attempts to connect to a network, you can create a group that contai ns various access points, and define the order in which the access points are used to connect to a network. For example, you can add wireless LAN (WL AN) and packet data access points to an internet access point group and use the group for browsing the web. If you give the WLAN access point the higher priority, the device connects to the internet through a W LAN if available and through a packet data connection if not. To create a new access point group, select Options > Manage > New destination . To add access points to a n access point group, select th e group and Options > New access point . To copy an existing access point from another group , select the group, scroll to an existing access point, and select Options > Organise > Copy to other dest . . To change the priority order of access points within a group, scroll to an access point, and select Option s > Organise > Change priority . Packet data access points Select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Settings and Connection > Destinations > Access point , and follow th e instructions on the display. Or, open one of the access point groups, and select an access point marked with . Use the instructions provided by your service provi der to edit the following: ⢠Access point name â The access point name is provided by your service provider. ⢠User name â The user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by your service provider. ⢠Prompt password â If you want to set the device to ask for a password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the device, select Yes . 136 Settings
⢠Passwor d â A password may be needed to make a data connection an d is usually p r o v i d e d b y y o u r s e r v i c e provider. ⢠Authenti cation â Select Secure to always sen d your password encrypted or Normal to send your password encrypted when possible. ⢠Homepage â Depending on the access point type you are setting up, enter th e we b address or the address of the multimedia message centre. ⢠Use access point â Select After confi rmation to set the device to ask for confirmation before th e connection us ing this a ccess point is created, or Automatically to set the device to connect to t he destination using this access point automatica lly. Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: ⢠Network type â Select the internet protocol type to transfer data to and from your device. The other settings depend on the selected network type. ⢠Phone IP addr ess (for IPv4 only ) â Enter the IP address of your device. ⢠DNS addresses â Enter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers, if required by your service provider. To obtain these addresses, contact your internet service provider. ⢠Proxy server address â Enter the address of the proxy server. ⢠Proxy port number â Enter the port number of the proxy server. WLAN internet access points Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Se ttings an d Connection > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions on the display. Or, open on e of the access point groups, select an access point marked with , and select Options > Edit . Use the instructions provided by your service provider to edit the following: ⢠WLAN netwo rk name â Select Enter manually or Search for networks . If you select an exist ing network, WLAN network mo de and WLAN security mode are determined by the settings of its access point device. ⢠Network status â Define wh ether the network name is displayed. ⢠WLAN network mo de â Select Ad-hoc to create an ad hoc network, and to a llow devices to send and receive data directly; a WLAN access point device is not needed. In an ad hoc networ k, all devices must use the same WLAN network name. ⢠WLAN security mo de â Select the encryption used: WEP , 802.1x , or WPA/WPA2 . (802.1x and WPA/WPA2 are not available for ad hoc networks.) I f you select Open net work , no encryption is used. The WEP, 802.1x, and WPA functions can be used only if the ne twork supports them. ⢠Use access poin t â Select After confirmati on to set the device to ask for confirmat ion before the connection using this a ccess point is created or Automatically to set the device to connect t o the destination using this a ccess point automatically. To enter the settings for the selected security mode, select WLAN security setti ngs . Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: 137 Settings
⢠IPv4 settin gs â Enter the IP address of your device, the subnet IP address, the default gateway, and the IP addresses of the primary a nd secondary DNS servers. Contact your internet se rvi ce provider for these addresses. ⢠IPv6 settin gs â Define the type of DNS address. ⢠Ad-hoc channel (only for ad hoc networks) â To enter a channel numbe r (1-11) manually, select User defined . ⢠Proxy server address â Enter the address for the proxy server. ⢠Proxy port number â Enter the proxy port number. Packet data (GPRS) settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings an d Connection > Packet data . Your device supports packet data connections, such as GPRS in the GSM netw ork. When you are using your devi ce in GSM and UMTS networks, it is possible to hav e multiple data connections act ive at the same time; access points can share a data connection, and data connections remain active, for example, during voice calls. To define the packet data settings, select Packet data connection and When available to register the device to the packet data ne twork when you switch the device on in a supported network, or When needed to register the device to a packet data network only when an application or action attempts to establish a packet data connection. This setting affects all acce ss points for packet data connections. To use the devi ce as a packet data modem for your computer, select Access point, and enter the access point name provided by your service provider. To use a high-speed data connection, select High speed packet access > Enabled . WLAN settings Select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Settings and Connection > Wireless LA N . To have an indicator displa yed when there is a wireless LAN (WLAN) available in your current locat ion, select Show WLAN availability > Yes . To select the interval for your device to scan for available WLANs, and to update the indicator, s elect Scan for networks . This setting is not av ailable unless you select Show WLAN availabi lity > Yes . To set the device to test the internet capability of th e selected WLAN automatically, to ask for permission every time, or to never perform the connectivity test, select Internet connectivity te st > Run aut omatically , Ask every time , or Never run . If you select Run automatically or allow the test to be performed when the device asks for it, and the connectivity test is performed successfully, the access point is saved to intern et destinations. To check the unique media a ccess control (MAC) addr ess that identifies your device, enter *#62 209526# in the home screen. The MAC address is displayed. Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings . The advanced WLAN settings are normally defined automatically, and changing them is not recommended. 138 Settings
To edit the settings manually , select Automati c configuration > Disabled , and define the f ollowing: ⢠Long re try lim it â Enter the maximum number o f transmission attempts if th e device does not receive a receiving acknowledgement signal from the network. ⢠Short retry limit â Ente r the maximum nu mber of transmission attempts if th e device does not receive a clear-to-send signal from the network. ⢠RTS threshold â S elect the data packet size at which the WLAN access point devi ce issues a request to send before sending the packet. ⢠TX power level â Select the power level of your device when sending data. ⢠Radio measurement s â Enable or disable the radio measurements. ⢠Power savin g â Select whether to use the WLAN power saving mechan ism to save the power in the device battery. Using the power sa ving mechanism enhances the battery performance but may weaken WLAN interoperability. To restore all settings to their original values, select Options > Re store defau lts . WLAN security settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Se ttings an d Connection > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions on the display. To edit a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point, open one of the access point groups, and se lect an access point marked with . To enter the settings for the selected security mode, select WLAN security setti ngs . WEP security settings Select WEP as the WLAN security mode. The wired equivalent privacy (WEP) encryption method encrypts data before it is tra nsmitted. Access to the network is denied to us ers who do not have th e required WEP keys. When the WEP security mode is in use, and your device receives a data packet not encrypted with the WEP keys, the data is discarded. In an ad-hoc network, all devices must use the same WEP key. Select WLAN security settings and from the following: ⢠WEP key in use â Select the desired WEP key. ⢠Authenticati on type â Select Open or Shared . ⢠WEP key setti ngs â Edit the sett ings for the WEP k ey. WEP key settings In an ad-hoc network, all devices must use the same WEP key. Select WLAN security settings > WEP key settings an d from the following: ⢠WEP encryption â Select the desired WEP encryption key length. ⢠WEP key format â Select whe t her you want to ente r the WEP key data in ASCI I or Hexadecim al format. ⢠WEP key â Enter the WEP key data. 139 Settings
802.1x security settings Select 802.1x as the WLAN security mode. 802.1x authenticates and authorises dev ices to access a wireless network, and prevents access if the authorisation process fai ls. Select WLAN security settings and from the following: ⢠WPA/WPA2 â Select EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key us ed for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in sett ings â I f y o u s e l e c t e d WPA/WPA2 > EAP , select which EAP plug -ins defined in your device t o use with the access point. ⢠Pre-shared key â I f y o u s e l e c t e d WP A/WPA2 > Pre- shared key , enter the shared private key that identifies your device to the WLAN to which you connect. WPA security settings Select WPA/WP A2 as the WLAN security m ode. Select WLAN security settings and from the following: ⢠WPA/WPA2 â Select EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key us ed for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in settings â If you select WPA/WPA2 > EAP , select which EAP plug -ins defined in your device t o use with the access point. ⢠Pre-shared key â If you select WPA/WPA2 > Pre- shared key , enter the shared private key that identifies your device to the WLAN to which you connect. ⢠WPA2 only mod e â To allow both TKIP and AE S (Advanced Encryption Stan dard) encryption, select Off . To allow AES only, select On Wireless LAN plugins Select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Settings and Connection > Destinations , and an access poin t group. The extensible authentication protocol (EAP) plug-ins are used in wireless net works to authenticate wireless devices and authenticat ion servers, and the different EAP p lug-ins make possible the u se of various EAP methods (network service). You can view the EAP plug-ins current ly installed in yo ur device (network service). EAP plug-ins 1. To define the EAP plug-in setti ngs, select Options > New access point and define an ac cess point th at uses WLAN as a d ata bearer. 2. Select 802.1x or WPA/WP A2 as the security mode. 3. Select WLAN securit y settin gs > WPA/WPA2 > EAP > EAP plug-in settings . Use EAP plug-ins To use an EAP plug -in when you connect to a WLAN using the access poin t, select the desi red plug-in and Opti ons > Enable . The EAP plug-ins enabled for use with this access point have a check mark n ext to them. To not use a plug- in, selec t Options > Disable . To edit the EAP plug-i n settings, select Op tions > Edit . 140 Settings
To change the priority of the EAP plug-in settings, select Options > Ra ise priority to attempt to use the p lug-in before other plug-ins wh en connecting to the ne twork with the access point, or Options > Lower priority to use this plug-in for network authentication after attempting to us e other plug-ins. See the device help for more information on EAP plugins. Session initiation protocol (SIP) settin gs Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Se ttings an d Connection > SIP settings . The session initiation protocol (SIP) is used for creating, modifying, and terminating certain types of communication sessions with one or more participants (network service). Typical c ommunication sessions are video sharing and net calls. SIP profiles include settings for these sessions. The SIP profile used by default for a communication session is underlined. To create a SIP profile, select Options > New SIP profile > Use default pr ofile or Use existin g profile . To select the SIP profile you want to use by default for communication sessions, select Options > Default profile . Edit SIP profiles Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Se ttings an d Connection > SIP settings . Select Options > Edit and from the following: ⢠Profile na me â Enter a name for the SIP profile. ⢠Service prof ile â Select IETF or Nokia 3GPP . ⢠Default destination â Select the de stination to use for the internet connection. ⢠Default access point â Select the access point to use for the internet connection. ⢠Public us er name â Ent er your user name prov ided by your service provider. ⢠Use compr ession â Select if compression is used. ⢠Registration â Select the registration mode. ⢠Use secur ity â Select if security negotiation is used. ⢠Proxy se rver â Enter the proxy server settings for this SIP profile. ⢠Registrar server â Enter the registration server settings for this SIP profile. Edit SIP proxy servers Select Options > New SIP profile or Edit > Proxy server . Proxy servers are intermediate servers between a browsing service and its users used by some service providers. These servers may provide additional security and speed up access to the service. Select from the following: ⢠Proxy serve r address â Enter the host name or IP address of the proxy server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the proxy server realm. ⢠User nam e and Password â Enter your user name and password for the proxy server. ⢠Allow loose routing â Select if loose routing is allowed. ⢠Transport type â Select UDP , Automatic , or TCP . 141 Settings
⢠Port â Enter the port number of the proxy server. Edit registration servers Select Options > New SIP profile or Edit > Registrar server . Select from the following: ⢠Registrar server address â Enter the host name or IP address of the registrar server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the registrar server realm. ⢠User name and Passwor d â Enter your user name a nd password for the registrar server. ⢠Transport type â Select UDP , Automatic , or TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the registrar server. Configuration settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings an d Connection > Configurations . You can receive messages from your service provider or company informat ion management containing configuration settings for trusted servers. These settings are automatically sa ved in Configurati ons. You may receive configuration sett ings for access points, multimedia or e-mail messaging services, or synchronisation settings from trusted servers. To delete configurations for a trusted server, select Options > Delete . The configuration settings for other applications provided by this server are also deleted. Restrict packet data Select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Settings and Connection > APN control . With the access point contro l service, you can restrict packet data connections from yo ur device to certain access points only. Your SIM card may n ot support the access point control service. For more information, contact your service provider. To restrict packet data co nnections from your device, select Options > Activate restrictions . Y ou need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate access point control or to edit the packet data acce ss points on the control list. To add access points that ca n be used for packet data connections to the control list, select Options > Add name manually . To enable connections to an operator- provided access point, cr eate an empty access point. To remove access point s from the list, select Op tions > Remove . Application settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Applications . Select an applicat ion from th e list to adjust its settings. 142 Settings
Shortcuts Here are some of the available keyboard shortcuts in your device. Shortcuts can make the use of the applications more efficient. General shortcuts General shortcuts Power key Press and hold to sw itch your device on and off. Press once to switch between profiles. * Press and hold * t o turn Blu etooth connectivity on or off. # Press and hold # to turn the Silent profile on or off. Home screen Left selection key right selection key Lock and unlock the keypad an d keyboard. Call key Open the call log. 0 Press and hold to open your homepage in the Web browser. 1 Press and hold to call your voice mailbox. Number key (2â 9) Call a phone number using speed dialling. Yo u must first acti vate speed dialling in Menu > Ctrl. panel and Settings > Ph one > Call > Speed dialling . 143 Shortcuts
Nokia original accessories Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and accessories approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any othe r types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. In particular , use of unappr oved chargers or batteries may present a risk of fire, explos ion, leakage, or other hazard. For availability of approved accessories, check with your dealer. An extensive range of accessories is available for your device. For more details, seewww.nokia-asia.com/ accessories. Practical rules about accessories ⢠Keep all accessories out of the reach of small children. ⢠When you disconnect t he po wer cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug, not th e cord. ⢠Check regularly that accessories i nstalled in a vehicle are mounted and are operating p roperly. ⢠Installation of any comple x car accessories must be made by qualified personnel only. Battery Type: BP-4L Talk time: Up to 6 hours (WCDMA) / 8 hours (GSM). Standby Up to 696 hours (WCDMA) / 552 hours (GSM). Important: Battery talk and stand-by times are estimates and only possible under optimal network conditions. Actual battery talk and standby times depend on SIM cards, features used , battery age and condition, temperatures to which battery is exposed, network conditions, and many ot her factor s, and may be significantly shorter than th ose specified above. Ringing tones, hands free c all handling , use in digital mode, and other features will also consume the battery, and the amount of time a device is used for calls will affect its stand-by time. Likewise, the a mount of time that t he de v i c e i s t u r n e d o n a n d in t h e standby mode will affect its talk time. 144 Nokia orig inal accessorie s
Troubleshooting To view frequently asked qu estions about your device, go to www.nokia.com/support. Q: What is my lock, PIN, or PUK code? A: The default lock code is 12345. If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your device dealer . If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. Q: How do I close an application that is not responding? A: Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the application, and press the backspace key to close the application. Q: Why do images look smudgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, discoloured, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I switch on my device? A: This is a charact eristic of this type of display. Some displays may contain pi xels o r dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device whi le using Bluetooth con nectivity? A: Check that both devices are compatible, have activated Bluetooth connectivity , and are not in hidden mode. Check also that the distan ce between the two devices is not ov er 10 metres (33 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I c lose a Bluetooth connec tion? A: If another device is conn ected to your device, you can close the connection using the ot her device or by deactivating Bluetooth connectivity. Sele ct Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connecti vity > Bluetooth and Blueto oth > Off . Q: Why can't I see a wireless LA N (WLAN) access point even though I know I'm within its range? A: Check that the Offline profile is not in use in your device. The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can on ly access networks that u se a h i d d e n S S I D i f y o u k n o w t h e c o r r e c t S S I D , a n d h a v e c r e a t e d a WLAN access point for the ne twork on your Nokia device. Check that the WLAN access point is not on channels 12-13, as they canno t be associated wi th. Q: How do I turn the WLAN off on my Nokia device? A: The WLAN on your Nokia device deactivates when you are not connected or trying to connect to another access point, or not scanning for av ailable networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your Nokia device does not sca n, or scans le ss often, for available networks in the background. The WLAN deactivates in between background scans. 145 Troubleshooting
To stop the backgroun d scans, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Co nnection > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN availability > Neve r . You can still manually scan for available WLANs and connect to WLANs as usual. To increase the background scan interval, select Show WLAN availability > Yes , and define the interva l in Scan for network s . Q: Why can't I browse th e web even though the WLAN connection is work ing and the IP settings are correct? A: Check that you have defined the HTTP/ HTTPS proxy settings correctly in th e advanced settings of your WLA N access point. Q: How do I check the signal qu ality of my WLAN connection? â Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Co nn. mgr. and Active data connections > Options > Details . If the signal quality is weak or moderate, yo u may encounter connection problems. Try ag ain closer to the access point. Q: Why do I have problems with the security mode? A: Check that you ha ve configured the secu rity mode correctly, and that it is the same that the network uses. To check the security mode the network uses, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivi ty > Conn. mgr. and Active data co nnecti ons > Options > Details . Check also the following: you have the correct WPA mode (preshared key or EAP), you ha ve disabled all EAP types that are not needed, and all the EAP type settings are correct (passwords, us er names, certificates ). Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact for my message? A: The contact card does n ot have a phone number, an address, or an e-ma il address. Select Menu > Cont acts , and edit the contact card. Q: The note Retrieving message is sh own briefly. What i s happening? A: The device is tr ying to r etrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia messaging cent re. This note is shown if you ha ve selec ted Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Multim edia retriev al > Always automatic . Check that the settings for multimedia messaging ar e defined correctly and that there are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. Q: How can I end the da ta connection when the device starts a data connection again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia message centre. To st op the device from making a data connection, select Menu > Messagin g and Option s > Settin gs > Multimedia message > Multimedia retrieval > Manual to have th e multimedia messaging cent re save messages to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia messages. If you select Manua l , you receive a notificat ion when there is a new multimedia message that you can retrieve in the multimedia message centre. If you select Off , the device does no t make any networ k connections related to multimedia messaging. To set the device to use a pa cket data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it , select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and Connection > 146 Troubleshooting
Packet data > Packet data co nnection > When needed . If this does not help, restart the device. Q: How do I save battery power? A: Many features in your de vice increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To save battery power, do the following: ⢠Deactivate Bluetooth connectivity w hen you do not need it. ⢠Stop the background scans for WLAN. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Se ttings and Connection > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN availability > Never . You can still manually scan for available WLANs a nd connect to WLANs as us ual. ⢠Set the device t o use a pack et data connection only if you start an appli cation or action th at needs it. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > Packet data > Packet data connection > When needed . ⢠Prevent the device from automati cally downloading new maps in the Maps application. Select Menu > Applications > Maps and Option s > Settings > Internet > Connection . ⢠Change the time-out after which t he backlight is switched off. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Genera l > Personalisation > Display > Light time-out . ⢠Close the applications you are not using. Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the application, and press the backspace key to close the application. 147 Troubleshooting
Protect the environment Save energy You do not need to charge your battery s o often if you do the following: ⢠Close applications and data connections, such as your WLAN or Bluetooth connection, when not in use. ⢠Decrease the brightness of the screen. ⢠Set your device to enter power saver mode after the minimum peri od of inactivity. ⢠Deactivate un necessary so unds, such as key tones. Recycle When this device has reached the end of its working life, all of its materia ls can be recovered as materials and energy. To guarantee the correct disposal and reuse, Nokia co-opera tes with its partners through a program called We:recyc le.For information on how to recycle your old Nokia products and where to find collection sites, go to www. nokia.com/werecycle, or using a mobile device, nokia.mobi/w erecycle, or call the Nokia Contact Cent er. Recycle packaging and user guides at yo ur local recycling scheme. For more information on the environmental attributes of your device, go to www.nokia.com/ecodeclara tion. 148 Protect the environme nt
Product and safety information Digital rights manage ment Digital rights ma nagement Content owners may use different types of digital rights management (DRM) technologies to protect their intellectual property, includ ing copyrights. This device uses various types of DRM software to access DRM- protected content. W ith this device yo u can access content protected with WMDRM 10 and OMA DRM 2.0. If ce rtain DRM software fails to pr otect the content, content owners may ask that such DRM software 's ability to access new DRM- protected content be revoked. Revocation m ay also prevent renewal of such DR M-protected content already in your device. Revocation of such DRM software does not affect the use of content protected with other types of DRM or the use of non-DRM-protected content. Digital rights mana gement (DRM) protected cont ent comes with an associated licence that de fines your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM-protected content, to back up both the licence and the con t ent, use the backup feature of Nokia PC Suite. If your device has WMDRM-pr otected content, both the licence and the content will be lost if the device memory is formatted. You may also lose the licence and the content if the files on your device ge t corrupted. Losing the licence or the content may limit y our ability to use the same content on your device ag ain. For more information, contact your service provider. Some licence may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected content can be a ccessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. Battery Battery and charger information Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery intended for use with this device is BP-4L. Nokia may make additiona l battery models availa ble for this device. This device is intended for use when s upplied with power from the following ch argers: AC-10. The exact charger model number may vary depending on the type of plug. The plug va riant is identified by one of the following: E, EB, X, AR, U, A, C, K, or UB. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the talk and standby times a re noticeably shorter than normal, rep lace the battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a battery is being us ed for the first time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to connect the charger, then disconnect and 149 Product and safety information
reconnect it to begin chargin g the battery. If the ba ttery is completely discharged, it may take several minutes before the charging indicator a ppears on the display or before any calls can be made. Safe removal. Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Proper charging. Unp lug the charger from the electrical plug and the device whe n not in use. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a ch arger, since overcharging may shorten its li fetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. Avoid extreme temperatures. Always try to keep the battery between 15ðC and 2 5 ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). Extreme temperatures reduce the capa city and lifetime of the battery. A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily. Battery performanc e is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not short-circuit. Accident al short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pe n causes direct connection of th e positive ( ) and negativ e (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happe n, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short- circuiting the termin als may damag e the battery or the connecting object. Disposal. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle wh en possible. Do not disp ose as household waste. Leak. Do not dismantle, cut, open, crush, bend, pun cture, or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, prevent battery liquid contact with skin or eyes. If this happens, flush the affected areas immediately with water, or seek medical help. Damage. Do not modify , remanufacture, attempt to in sert foreign objects into the batter y, or immerse or expose it to water or other liquids. Batteries may explode if damaged. Correct use. Use the battery on ly for its i ntended purpose. Improper battery use may resu lt in a fire, explosion, or other hazard. If the device or battery is dro pped, especially on a hard surface, and you believe the battery has been damaged, take it to a servic e centre for inspection before continuing to use i t . Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Keep your battery out of the reach of small children. Taking care of your device Your device is a product of supe rior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will help you protect your warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your dev ice does get wet, remove the ba ttery, and allow th e device to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. 150 Product and safety information
⢠Do not store the device in high or cold temperature. High temperatures can shor ten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. When the devi ce warms to its normal temperature from a cold temp erature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the device other tha n as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not us e harsh chem icals, cleani ng solvents , or strong detergents to clean the device. Only use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean the surface of the device. ⢠Do not pai nt the device. Pain t can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthoris ed antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device an d may violate regulations govern ing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Backup all data you want to keep, such as c ontacts an d calendar notes. ⢠To reset the device from t ime to time for optimum performance, power off the device and rem ove the battery. These suggestions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any accessory . Recycle Always return your use d electronic products, batteries, and packaging materials to dedicated collection points. This way you help prevent uncontrolled waste disposal and promote the recycling of materials. Check product environmental information an d how to recycle your Nokia products at www.nokia .com/werecycle, or with a mobile device, nokia.mobi/werecycle. Additional safety information Small children Your device and its accessories are not toys. They may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment This device meets RF exposu re guidelines in the normal use position at the ear or at least 2.2 centimetres (7/8 inch) away from the body. Any carry ca se, belt clip, or holder for body-worn operation should not contain metal and should position the device the above-stated distan ce from your body. To send data files or messages requires a quality connection to the network. Da ta files or messages may be delayed until such a connect ion is available. Follow the separation distance in struct ions until t he tr ansmission is completed. 151 Product and safety information
Parts of the device are magnetic. Metalli c materials may be attracted to the device. Do not plac e credit cards or other magnetic storage medi a near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of radio transmitting equipmen t, including wireless phones, may interfere with the function of inadequately protect ed medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine whether they are adequately shielded from external RF energy. Swit ch off your device when regulations posted instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities ma y use equipment sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of medical devices recommen d a minimum separation of 15.3 centimet res (6 inches) between a wireless device and an implan ted medical device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the medical device. Persons who h ave such devices should: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimetres (6 inches) from the medical device. ⢠Not carry the wireless devi ce in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the wireless device to the ear opposite the medical device. ⢠Turn the wireless device off if there is an y reason to suspect that interference is takin g place. ⢠Follow the manufacturer directions for the implanted medical device. If you have any questions about u sing your wireless device with an implanted medical device, consult your health care provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. Vehicles RF signals may affect improper ly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection, el ectronic antilock braking, electronic speed control, and air bag systems. For more information, ch eck with the ma nufacturer of your v ehicle or its equipment. Only qualified personnel should service the device or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalida te your warranty. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive mat erials in the same compartment a s the device, its parts, or accessories. Remember that ai r bags inflate with great force. Do not place your device or accessories in the air bag deployment area. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircra ft and may be illegal. 152 Product and safety information
Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device in any area with a pot entially explosive atmosphere. Obey a ll posted instructions. Sparks in such areas could ca use an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at servi c e stations. Observ e restrictions in fuel depots, st orage, and dis t ribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosiv e atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include areas where you would be advis ed to turn off your vehicle engine, below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities and where the air co ntains chemicals or particles such as grain, du st, or metal powders. You should check with the manufacturers of vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) to determine if this device can be safe ly used in their vicinity. Emergency calls Important: This device operates using radio signals, wireless networks, landli ne networks, and user- programmed functions. If your device supports voice calls over the internet (i nternet calls), activate both the internet calls and the cellular phone. The device may attempt to make emergency calls over bo th the cellular networks and through your internet call provider if both are activated. Connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. Y ou should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Depending on your device, you may also need to complete the following: ⢠Insert a SIM card if your device uses one. ⢠Remove certain call restrictions you have activated in your device. ⢠Change your profile from O ffline or Flight profile to an active profile. 2. Press the end key as many ti mes as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call key. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call un til given permissi on to do so. Certification information (SAR) This mo bile dev ice meets guideli nes for exposur e to radio waves. Your mobi le device is a rad io transmi tter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended by intern ational guidelines. These guidelines were developed by the independent scientific organisation ICNIRP and incl ude safety margins designed to assure the protection of a ll persons, regardless of age and health. 153 Product and safety information
The exposure guidelines for mobile devices employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted u sing standard operating positions with the device tran smitting at its hig hest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operat ing device can be below the maximum value because the devi ce is designed to use only the power required to reac h the network. That amount changes depending on a n umber of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest SAR value under th e ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device at the ear is 1.30 W/kg. Use of device accessories ma y result in different SAR values. SAR values may va ry depending on national reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Additional SAR informat ion may be provided under product information at www.nokia -asia.com. 154 Product and safety information
Index Symbols/Numbers 3-D ringing tones 32 802.1x security settings 140 A A-GPS (assist ed GPS) 72 access codes 21 access points 135 groups 136 VPN 128 accessories settings 132 Active notes 84 active notes 84 active toolbar in Photos 96 alarm clock 88 albums media 9 7 alert tones 1 30 antennas 20 application manager 124 application settings 142 applicat ions 10, 124, 126 common actions 28 assisted GPS ( A-GPS) 72 attachments multimedia messages 47 audio files details 107 audio messages 44 audio themes 31 auto-update for time/date 88 autolock perio d 132 B background image 31 backing up device memory 85 battery charge level 25 charging 13 inserting 12 blogs 68 Bluetooth 114 receiving data 113 security 115 sending data 113 Bluetooth connect ivity blocking devices 115 bookmarks 69 browser 6 7, 69 bookmarks 67, 69 browsing pages 67, 68 cache memory 69 searching cont ent 69 security 69 settings 70 toolbar 68 widgets 68 browsing intranet 71 C cable 112 cache memory 69 calculator 84 calendar 35 creating entries 36 meeting requests 36 views 37 calendar key 35 call barring 58 net calls 59 call divert 58 caller ID 134 calls answering 52 barring net calls 59 conference call 53 internet calls 57 making 52, 60 making a call from log 65 muting the ringing tone 52 reje cting 52 restr ictin g See fixed dialling settings 134 speed dialling 58 155 Index
voice m ail 53 camera capturing images 91 full focus 91 image settings 93 playing vi deos 93 scenes 92 sequence mode 92 toolbar 91 video clips 92 video settings 93 viewing images 92 car kit remote SIM access 115 cell broadcast 49 settings 51 certificates details 122 settings 122 charger battery 13 Clock settings 89 conference calls 53 configuration messages 142 connection methods Bluetooth 113 data cable 112 connections PC connection 71 connectors 15 contacts 37 adding ringing tones 38 groups 38 searching 38 settings 38 synchronising 128 content synchronising, sending, and retrieving 19 converting currencies 86 measurements 86 cookies 69 currency conversions 86 D data connections 118 synchronisation 128 wireless 116 date settings 131 date and time 88 decrypting device memory and memory card 121 device manager 123 device setup 24 dictionary 89 digital rights 149 display indicators 25 settings 130 DTMF tones 59 E e-mail 40 accounts 43 adding attach ments 42 attachments 42 deleting 43 disconnecting 43 folders 43 out-of-office reply 43 reading 42 searching 43 sending 41 settings 43 setup 41 e-mail key 35 e-mail k ey settings 1 33 EAP plug-in s ettings 14 0 using an EAP plug-in 140 encryp ting device memory and memory card 121 enhancements remote SIM access 115 environmental tips 148 equaliser 106 F feeds, news 68 file management 85 file manager 85 files flash files 108 fixed dialling 121 FM radio 108 G gallery 94 presentations 9 5 sound clips 94 156 Index
streaming links 94 general information 9 GPRS settings 138 GPS position requests 73 GPS (global positioning system) 72, 73 H headset connecting 18 help application 10 home key 35 home screen 34 settings 30 HSPA HSDPA, HSUPA 112 I images editing 98 printing 99 indicators 25 inserting memory card 14 installing applications 12 5 internet calls 56, 134 activating 5 6 making 57 settings 57 internet connection 67 See also browse r internet radio 109 favourites 110 searching for stations 110 settings 110 station directory 110 intranet browsing 71 J Java applications 124 JME Java applicatio n support 124 K key store 123 keyguard 17 keypad lock settings 132 locking 17 tones 130 keys 15 WEP keys 139 keys and parts 16 L landmarks 73 langua ge settings 131 licences 127 location information 72 lock code 21, 120, 132 locking device 120 device autolock 132 keypad 17, 132 log 65 adding numbers to Contacts 65 deleti ng 65 making a call 65 sending message s 65 settings 65 logos welcome logo 130 M making a cal l 52 Maps 75 browsing 76 changing v iews 76 compass 82 display elements 76, 81 driving routes 80 finding locations 77 location details 78 navigating 80, 81 organising places 78 organising routes 78 planning routes 82 positioning 77 saved places 78 saving places 78 saving routes 78 sending places 79 sharing locations 79 synchronising 79 traffic information 8 1 voice guidance 80 walking routes 81 measurem ents converting 86 157 Index
media radio 108 meeting requests receiving 42 memory clearing 28 web cache 69 memory card inserting 14 locking 120 passwords 120 removing 14 menu 24 message reader 47 selecting voice 4 8 messages 44 cell broadcast settings 51 configuration messages 142 other settings 51 service messages 48 text message sett ings 49 messaging folders 44, 47 Mini Map 68 MMS (multimedia mess age service) 44, 5 0 modem 71 multimedia 94 multimedia messages 4 4, 50 attachments 47 creating presentations 46 receiving 46 replying to 46 multitasking 39 music player playing 105 playlists 106 transferring music 106 N navigation tools 72 net calls barring 59 network settings 134 news feeds 68 noise cancellation 52 Nokia Messaging 40 Nokia original accessories 144 Nokia support informatio n 9 notes 90 O office applications 86 One-touch keys 131 operator selecting 134 original settings 133 out-of-offi ce reply message 4 3 Ovi by Nokia 22 Ovi Music 106 Ovi Store 71 Ovi Sync 39 P packet data restricting 142 settings 138 packet data conne ction access point settings 136 page overview 68 pairing dev ices 114 PDF rea der 87 personalisation changing language 131 display 130 tones 130 personalising your devi ce 24, 29 photos editing 98 file details 96 organising files 96 red-eye 98 tags 97 toolbar 96 viewing 95 PictBridge 99 PIN code 21 changing 132 PIN2 co de 21 playing video and audio 107 position ing settings 133 positioning in formation 72 predictive text inp ut 27, 131 presentatio ns 46, 95 printer settings 87 printing 87 images 99 profiles creating 29 personalising 29, 30 158 Index
selecting ringing tones 29 proxy settin gs 136 PTT See push t o talk PUK codes 21 Push to talk creating a channel 63 push to talk 61 answering a PTT ca ll 62 callback requests 62 channels 63 logging in and exiting 62 making a group call 62 making a one-to-one call 62 network groups 63 responding to a cha nnel invitation 64 settings 64 talking to a channe l 63 viewing the log 64 Q Quickoffice 86 R radio 108 listening 108 settings 109 stations 108 RealPlayer playing media clips 107 settings 107 viewing clip details 107 recycling 148 red-eye removal 98 remote configuration 123 remote datab ase search 38 remote lock 120 restoring original se ttings 133 ringing tones 130 3-D 3 2 contacts 38 in profiles 29 vibrating alert 130 S saving files 28 settings 28 screen sav er 31, 130 scroll key 131 searching 27 available WLANs 118 contacts 38 security Bluetooth 115 browser 69 device and SIM card 132 memory card 120 security code 21, 120 security module 123 sending files 28 using Bluetooth 113 service commands 49 service message s 48 settings 51 settings access points 135, 136 accessories 132 advanced WLAN 138 applications 142 browse r 70 call 134 camera 93 cell broadcast 51 certificate 122 clock 89 contacts 38 date 131 display 130 e-mail key 133 EAP plug-ins 140 FM radio 109 GPRS 138 internet calls 57 internet radio 110 keypad lock 132 language 131 lights 131 log 65 messages 50 network 134 packet data 138 packet data a ccess points 136 positioning 133 printer 87 RealPlayer 1 07 restoring 133 security 132 service messages 51 SIP 141 text messages 49 time 131 159 Index
tones 130 video centre 105 video sharing 5 5 voice commands 61 WEP secu rity 13 9 WLAN 137, 138 WLAN internet access points 137 WLAN securi ty 139 settings wizard 2 4 Share online 100 account sett ings 102 accounts 100 activating services 100 advanced settings 102 creating posts 100 data counters 102 one-click upload 101 Outbox 101 posting 101 service content 101 service provider settings 102 subscribing 100 tags 101 shared video 54 sharing media files online 100 shortc uts 143 signal strength 25 SIM access profile 115 SIM card inserting 12 text messages 45 SIP creating profiles 141 editing profiles 141 editing proxy servers 141 editing registration servers 142 settings 141 slide show 97 SMS (short mess age service) 44 software 126 software applicatio ns 124 software upd ates 9, 10 sound clips 94 speech 48 speed dialling 5 8 streaming links 94 support 9 switching device on and o ff 17 Symbian applicat ions 124 synchronisation 39 synchronisation of data 128 T tabs 28 talking theme 59 text changing size 130 predictive input 27 text input 26 text messa ges messages on SIM card 45 sending 44 settings 49 themes 31 downloading 31 time settings 131 time and date 88 time zone setti ngs 89 tones personalising 31 settings 130 toolbar camera 9 1 transferring content 19, 24 troublesh ooting 145 U updates 10 applications 9, 10 device software 9, 10 UPIN code 21 changing 132 uploading me dia files 100 UPUK cod e 21 USB data ca ble 112 useful information 9 V vibrating alert 130 video playing 9 3 video calls making a call 54 switching to voice call 54 Video Centre 103 video centre downloading 103 my videos 104 transferring videos 104 video feeds 104 viewing 103 160 Index
video clips details 107 playing 107 shared 54 video sharing accepting invitation 56 sharing live video 55 sharing video clips 55 virtual private network use in applications 129 voice aid See talking theme voice commands 60 changing profiles 61 launching an app lication 61 settings 61 voice func tions 57 activating 5 7 voice mail calling 53 changing number 53 volume 18 VPN access points 128 use in applications 129 W warning tones 130 web connection 67 welcome note 130 WEP keys 139 security settings 139 widgets 68 WLAN 802.1x security settings 140 access points 117 advanced settings 138 availability 117 MAC address 138 searching for networks 118 security settings 139 settings 138 WEP keys 139 WPA security settings 140 WLAN (wireless local area network) 116 WLAN wizard 117 world clock 89 WPA security settings 140 Z Zip manager 87 161 Index